RIGGERS HANDBOOK VOL 17. Work with HSI Slings TM Since A tremendous reference guide for every Rigger!

Transcription

1 VOL 17 Work with HSI Slings TM Since 1930 RIGGERS HANDBOOK A tremendous reference guide for every Rigger! Wire Rope Chain Slingmax TM Slings Fittings Accessories General Usage Safety Guidelines

2 SEVEN LOCATIONS & THE WEB TO SERVICE YOUR NEEDS! BUFFALO, NY ROCHESTER, NY ALBANY, NY SYRACUSE, NY WATERTOWN, NY BRANFORD, CT NORTH & SOUTH CAROLINA Our Headquarters is located in Buffalo, New York 55 James E. Casey Drive Buffalo, NY PHONE FAX Jetview Dr Rochester, NY PHONE FAX Thompson Rd, Suite 500A Syracuse, NY PHONE FAX US Route 11 Watertown, NY PHONE FAX Railroad Avenue Albany, NY PHONE FAX Indian Neck Avenue Branford, CT PHONE FAX NORTH CAROLINA SOUTH CAROLINA ADDITIONAL SERVICES WE PROVIDE REPAIR AND RENTAL SERVICES: LOAD TESTING: Hoists Lifting Equipment Hydraulic Equipment Slings Fittings Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices FIRE EXTINGUISHER SERVICES: Sales Service Testing Training CONFINED SPACE: Equipment Rental and Sales Detection Device Service, Calibration and Sales BELOW-THE-HOOK LIFTING DEVICES: Standard or Custom Designed for your Specific Application CUSTOMIZED TOOL KITS Assembled to Your Specifications Rigging, Hoists, Hydraulics, Tools, Safety, Etc.

3 Table of Contents Hanes Supply has complete testing facilities for tension and cycling of wire rope, chain, nylon, highperformance fiber slings, and related items including spreader beams and other types of rigging gear. With three new Chant Engineering testing machines, we have the latest state of the art testing equipment to satisfy all of your testing requirements. Buffalo, NY Specifications: Horizontal Machine, 186' length with testing capacity 3' minimum to 165' maximum. Capacity: Two-load range 300 ton high or 35 ton low holding range, pull or break test. Ram Stroke: 12' ram. Capable of elongation measurement. Robert s 50 Ton Vertical Test Machine. Ram Stroke: 4.5' ram. Albany, NY Specifications: Horizontal Machine, 60' length with testing capacity 3' minimum to 51' maximum. Capacity: Two-load range 175 ton high or 25 ton low holding range, pull or break test. Ram Stroke: 6' ram. Rochester, NY Specifications: Horizontal Machine, 100' length with testing capacity 3' minimum to 84' maximum. Capacity: Two-load range 300 ton high or 35 ton low holding range, pull or break test. Ram Stroke: 6' ram. Calibration: In accordance with ASTM E4 +/-1% and complies with MIL-STD-45662A and traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technologies. Re-calibrated yearly. Applies to machines in all branches. Digital Load Readout with Test Certificate in all branches. Programmable Cycling Capability: Buffalo, NY and Rochester, NY branches. Adjustable Slings...44 Blocks , Sheave Snatch Boom Pendants Pendant Fittings , Bridles , 33-35, 40-44, 203 Chain Measuring Length Twin-Path Wire Rope Buttons, Swage Chain , Saddle Rings...44 Slings Slings, Inspection...39 Transport (Binding)...61 Clevises Clips, Wire Rope Cordage Information Davit Cranes...87 Dynamometers Eye Bolts Gator-Flex Grommets...26 Gator-Laid Slings, Wire Rope...27 General Information TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Conversions Crane Hand Signals (USA Std.) Definitions Formulas How to Read a Tag Weights of Material Grommet Slings...26, Cable-Laid...31 Gator-Flex...26 Strand-Laid...32 Hoists Hand (manual) Chain...63, 64, 67 Electric (power) Chain...65, 68 Lever...62, 64, 66 Hooks Barrel Clevis...133, 135 Eye , 133 Golden Gate Grab Hoist Replacement Shank Shur-loc Sliding Choker Sling , Snap WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

4 Table of Contents Sorting Swivel , 134 Synthetic Sling Hydraulics Lifting Attachments...98 Lifting Beams...97 Lifting Clamps Lift Engineering Links, Master Oblong Load Binders Machinery Rollers...95 Man Baskets...99 Personnel Crane Basket...99 Ratchet Assembly, Polyester Rope Hand Line...80 Pulling & Stringing Line...80 Samson Solid & Double Braid Specifications...75 Twisted Winch Yale Shackles Easy-Loc Long Reach Sheet Pile Sling Saver...110, Wide , 116 Slide-Loc Sling Connector Slings...6, 15, 23-35, 40-44, Cable-Laid...25, 30 Chain Gator-Flex Grommets...26 Gator-Laid...27 Hitch Types Nylon Web , Polyester Roundsling...51 Reversed Eye...51 Tri-Flex Twin-Path...6, 15 Wide Lift...50 Wire Mesh Wire Rope Sling Protection Cornermax Covermax Sleeves...10 Shackle Pin Pad...12 Synthetic Armor...11 Syn-Glide...12 Sockets , Spelter Swage Wedge Spreader Beams...98 Swivels Swivel Hoist Rings...161,163 Thimbles Tri-Flex Slings Turnbuckles Twin-Path Abrasion...8 Check-Fast...7, 15 Cornermax Covermax Equalizer Block...16 Extra Covermax Slings...6 Field Taper...16 Inspection...7, 21 K-Spec Core Yarn...6 Mechanical Considerations Rigging Practices...17 Rifled Cover...8 Shackle Pin Pad...12 Slings...6,15 Sparkeater Slings...15 Syn-Glide...12 UV Resistance...9 Wear Pads Winches...87 Winch Lines Windmill Lifting Brackets...96 Wire Mesh Slings Wire Rope , x19 Classification x36 Classification Abrasion & Bending Abuse Aircraft Cable Breaking Strength Bridle Fittings...36 Clips Cross Sections D/d Ratio High Performance Inspection Rotation Resistant Slings WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

5 Innovative Lifting Solutions Hanes Supply specializes in lifting solutions for a wide variety of applications. As a manufacturer of Slingmax slings we are proud to provide riggers with innovative products that increase productivity and safety. The following product inventions provide benefits that make a rigger s work easier, safer or more cost effective. SYNTHETIC SLINGS Twin-Path Synthetic roundslings for heavy lifting by Slingmax Rigging Solutions are the only synthetic roundslings available that come equipped with the Check-Fast External Warning Indicator, Covermax Cover, and Rifled Cover technology. Think Twin-Path slings for all your heavy lifting and rigging needs. TWIN-PATH PG. 6 SPARKEATER PG. 15 SINGLE PATH PG. 15 ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE PG INSPECTION METHODS NO EXPOSURE 500 Hrs EXPOSURE CHECK-FAST PG. 7 UV PG. 9 ABRASION PG. 8 3 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

6 Innovative Lifting Solutions SYNTHETIC SLING PROTECTORS Experts agree that over 80% of synthetic sling accidents are caused by cutting; always be SURE you have the correct Sling Protection for your specific lift! CORNER-MAX PAD PG. 11 CORNER-MAX SLEEVE PG. 10 SYN-GLIDE PG. 12 SYNTHETIC SLING ACCESSORIES SYNTHETIC ARMOR PG. 11 SHACKLE PIN-PAD PG. 12 WIRE ROPE SLINGS EQUALIZER BLOCK PG. 16 TWIN-PATH TAPER PG. 16 GATOR-LAID PG. 27 GATOR-FLEX GROMMETS PG. 26 TRI-FLEX PG. 25 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

7 Twin-Path Slings TWIN-PATH SLINGS IN ACTION 88 ton Refinery Compressor with CornerMax Pads 500 ton Steam Generator Replacement Mark V Navy Assault Boat Turbine Rotor Removal of 500 ton Bridge Decking Reactor Coolant Pump Motor 5 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

8 Twin-Path Extra Covermax Slings TWIN-PATH SLINGS WITH COVERMAX COVER, K-SPEC CORE YARN AND CHECK-FAST INSPECTION SYSTEM US Patent #7,926,859, #7,661,737, #7,568,333 CA #2,547,632 EP #1,899,255 Japan #4,864,965 China #ZL Twin-Path synthetic roundslings have Check-Fast Inspection overload indicators, Covermax Covers for superior abrasion resistance, and inner red covers as an aid to inspection. Twin-Path slings are used worldwide in place of steel rigging for heavy lifts. They are approximately 10% of the weight of a steel sling and are repairable. The Twin-Path sling design, which has two individual paths of fiber working as one sling, gives the rigger confidence. These slings have less than 1% elongation at rated capacity. If productivity, safety, and precision are important, then Twin-Path high-performance roundslings are your best choice. Independent testing shows that K-Spec core yarn is the longest lasting load-bearing core yarn in any sling. NOTE: Capacities shown include both paths and are for one complete sling. Sling ratings based on commercial fittings of equal or greater capacity. Conforms to ANSI/ASME B30.9 chapter 6, NAVFAC P-307 section , and the Cordage Institute Roundsling Standard. This chart is based on a 5:1 Design Factor (DF); but any other DF can be fabricated. Higher capacity slings are available. CAPACITIES ARE IN POUNDS (LBS.). UNITED STATES PATENT #4,850,629 RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.) 5:1 DF CANADIAN PATENT #1,280,458 TWIN-PATH EXTRA COVERMAX STOCK NO. VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET BASKET HITCHES APPROXIMATE WEIGHT (LBS. PER FT.) (BEARING-BEARING) NOMINAL BODY WIDTH (INCHES) TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14, TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21, TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28, TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35, TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42, TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56, TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 40, ,000 86,600 70, TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 48, , ,920 84, TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 56, , ,240 98, TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 68, , , , TPXCCF/ TPXC ,000 80, , , , TPXCCF/ TPXC , , , , , TPXCCF/ TPXC , , , , , TPXCCF/ TPXC , , , , , TPXCCF/ TPXC , , , , , TPXCCF/ TPXC , , , , , TPXCCF/ TPXC , , , , , TPXCCF/ TPXC , , , , , TPXCCF/ TPXC , , , , , TPXCCF/ TPXC , ,000 1,000, , , TPXCCF/ TPXC , ,000 1,200,000 1,039, , DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITY NOTE: When ordering a Twin-Path sling, the Check-Fast Inspection system is included unless specified otherwise.! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light, sunlight & temperature above 180 F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

9 Check-Fast Inspection System CHECK-FAST INSPECTION SYSTEM Now available in Polyester or K-Spec Single-Path and Twin-Path Roundslings Patent US Patent #7,661,737 CA #2,547,632 EP #1,899,255 The Check-Fast Inspection System is designed to improve job site safety. The Check-Fast External Warning Indicator (EWI) provides a criteria for pass/fail inspection when the internal load-bearing core yarn may be damaged. The Check-Fast Inspection System can also indicate ultraviolet (UV) light degradation, fiber-on-fiber abrasion, fatigue, and severe overload. If the sling is overloaded beyond its rated capacity, the EWI is designed to retract before the sling fails. The sling inspector now has an objective GO/NO-GO inspection device rather than relying on subjective and labor-intensive inspection techniques to guess if the load-bearing core yarns are in good condition. Sacrificial strand (same material as sling core yarns) Weak Link +/- 65% breaking strength vs. sling core yarns. External Warning Indicator (E.W.I.) Sacrificial strand recoils Weak Link fails from severe overload. External Warning Indicator pulls violently into the sling 7 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

10 Covermax Covers COVERMAX RIFLED COVER TECHNOLOGY US Patent #7,926,859 Rifled Cover Technology is a major patented breakthrough only available on Slingmax Twin-Path high-performance fiber roundslings. Rifled Cover Technology works like the inside of a rifle barrel, where the bullet spins as it leaves the muzzle of the gun. The helical winding of the core fibers significantly improves strength and efficiency. Twin-Path high-performance roundslings with patented Rifled Cover Technology yield three major advantages: 1. Increased strength-to-weight ratio. 17% increased breaking strength with the same amount of core yarn. 2. Consistent and predictable breaking strength for every sling. 3. Repeatability in the manufacturing process. COVERMAX COVER - ABRASION Any Twin-Path sling can be made with a Covermax cover. This is made of a heavy-duty, double layer industrial nylon material. The outside cover is green and the inside cover is red. If you see any red showing through the green cover, stop using the sling and get a repair evaluation. This cover has been tested to provide the best ultraviolet (UV) protection and the best abrasion protection of any commercially available synthetic lifting sling. Below are summary charts of the cover tests. Roundsling Cover Abrasion Test Results Cycles Covers WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

11 Covermax Protection COVERMAX COVER - UV RESISTANCE Ultra-Violet Light (UV) Resistance (Testing) Because of the Covermax tubing s thick dense structure the material restricts a vast majority of the ultra-violet rays that penetrate other roundsling covers. NO EXPOSURE 500 Hrs EXPOSURE FIBER TYPE NO UV EXPOSURE BASE LINE NO COVER DBL YELLOW POLY COVER DBL ORANGE DBL BLACK POLY COVER PERCENTAGE OF STRENGTH LOST AT 500 HOURS OF UV EXPOSURE TO COVERS / FIBER COVERMAX COVER POLYESTER 100% 36% 12% 9% 5% 2% ARAMID 100% 28% 26% 27% 9% 2% K-SPEC 100% 12% 1.13% SLING PROTECTION Once synthetic slings have been selected, they then need to be protected. Web slings and roundslings can be quickly damaged from cutting and friction. In ASME B30.9 Slings it states, Slings in contact with edges, corners, protrusions, or abrasive surfaces shall be protected with a material of sufficient strength, thickness, and construction to prevent damage. Edges have varying degrees of danger. You should protect all edges. This removes all subjectivity from the workers guessing which edges protection and which may not. All edges can cut a sling. A sling s design factor of 5:1 is not reached until the radius of the protected edge is approximately 1". THEREFORE: Slingmax recommends cut protection for edges with a radius <1". 70,000 Chart 1: Sling Break Load vs. Edge Type Test Load (lbs) 60,000 50,000 40,000 30,000 20,000 10,000 Treated Polyester Polyester Nylon FS 2 (25,600 LBS) WLL (12,800 LBS) 0 Knife /64" 1/32" 1/16" 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 1" Edge Type 9 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

12 CornerMax Sleeve (Cut Protection) The CornerMax Sleeve is the latest in rigging protection from SLINGMAX Rigging Solutions. The CornerMax Sleeve is the ideal solution to protect synthetic slings from cutting when it is not practical to use a CornerMax Pad, whether due to curvature of the load edge or repetitive uses such as unloading steel coils. Independent field and laboratory testing has shown the CornerMax Sleeve to be extremely cut resistant. The CornerMax Sleeve is made with Dyneema Fiber and is proven tough. To prevent sliding, the 6" wide CornerMax Sleeve has been sewn down the middle (5") on each end of the Twin-Path Extra Sling (pictured). The true benefits of this revolutionary material far outweigh the costs and now provide for the use of synthetic slings in applications previously dominated by heavy chain, mesh and wire rope slings TWIN-PATH Coil Sling 10 times lighter than conventional steel coil gripper slings. Chain and metal mesh slings require rigger to use a fish hook to grab & pull the sling through the coil. The Twin-Path Coil Sling is so light that one underhanded toss is all you need. Also faster to make. Will not damage the load. Repairable as manufacturer can remove a damaged CornerMax sleeve & sew a new one to the sling. CORNERMAX STOCK NO. EXTERNAL SLEEVE WIDTH FASTENED OVER BOTH LEGS OF TWIN-PATH SLING CRNMXS03 5 UP TO TPXC 3,000 CRNMXS04 6 UP TO TPXC 5,000 CRNMXS08 8 UP TO TPXC 10,000 CRNMXS10 10 UP TO TPXC 20,000! WARNING CORNERMAX PAD CUT PROTECTION Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Use only if trained. Damaged or misused protection can result in damage or sling failure. Inspect before each use. Inspect for cuts, tears or damage that may prevent protection of the sling. Ensure protection is the correct size & type to protect the sling. Prevent pads & sling from slipping or sliding across load edge. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use, maintenance &/or inspection. MAXIMUM LOADING: Do NOT exceed 25,000 lbs. per inch of sling width. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

13 Synthetic Armor Pads (Abrasion Protection) CornerMax Pads (Edge Protection) Synthetic Armor Pads protect slings from abrasion damage which can be caused by contact with rough surfaces such as concrete beams and structures. They are also used to protect finished or painted loads from marring. These wear pads can be made to fit any length or width sling. They can also be made in long lengths which the customer can cut into suitable sizes on the job. Double or triple thickness provides resistance for the more severe conditions. There is no maximum width and a variety of materials are used to protect slings & to protect loads. SYNARM SL Sliding SYNARM RM Removable SYNARM EE Eye and Eye CORNERMAX PADS Exposure of a sling to load edges or corners requires protection that is not susceptible to cutting because of toughness or zero contact. As shown in the photo below, the CornerMax Pad forms a tunnel between the load edge and the pad. This geometric separation is essential in protecting the pad itself from contacting the load edge, which provides maximum protection to the sling. CORNERMAX STOCK NO. SLING WIDTH (INCHES) CORNERMAX APPROX WIDTH (INCHES) US Patent #7,744,138 CORNERMAX APPROX WEIGHT CRNMX02 1 & CRNMX CRNMX CRNMX CRNMX CRNMX CRNMX CRNMX CRNMX ! WARNING CORNERMAX PAD CUT PROTECTION Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Use only if trained. Damaged or misused protection can result in damage or sling failure. Inspect before each use. Inspect for cuts, tears or damage that may prevent protection of the sling. Ensure protection is the correct size & type to protect the sling. Prevent pads & sling from slipping or sliding across load edge. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use, maintenance &/or inspection. MAXIMUM LOADING: Do NOT exceed 25,000 lbs. per inch of sling width. 11 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

14 Shackle Pin Pads Syn-Glide SHACKLE PIN PADS Patent Pending The pin area of a shackle can damage synthetic slings. Placing synthetic slings on the pin should be avoided. Shackles have a sharp edge where the pin goes through the shackle ear. If the sling is rigged on this area, it can become severely damaged. If you must rig on the pin, protect your sling with a Shackle Pin Pad. The Shackle Pin Pad is sized for the model of shackle and protects the sling along the entire pin. SYN-GLIDE Syn-Glide Film is the only material available on the market today that reduces 70% of cover friction by allowing the cover to glide over itself or a piece of hardware. Syn-Glide is an important accessory for every rigger that works with Twin-Path Slings. Syn-Glide is designed to eliminate the bite of the Covermax cover in situations where the cover is resting on itself when the weight of a load is applied. Syn-Glide will: Decrease cost of job Eliminate large shackles & hardware Increase job-site safety Increase job speed Significantly reduce the need for sling repair! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light, sunlight & temperature above 180 F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

15 Twin-Path Adjustable Bridle TWIN-PATH ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE US Patent #5,651,572, #7,926,859 CA #2,195,393 EP # Japan # Australia # The Twin-Path Adjustable Bridle (TPXA with K-Spec core yarn, or TPA with polyester core yarn) is a two-leg bridle made with a Twin-Path sling and an adjustable bridle ring. When tension is applied to the Twin-Path Adjustable Bridle, it self-adjusts until the lifting point is over the center of gravity. This allows the two legs to be adjusted for a level lift without the need for custom slings or hardware. TWIN-PATH ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE SPECIFICATIONS STOCK NUMBERS BRIDAL CAPACITY NOMINAL SLING WIDTH RING STOCK DIAMETER ADJUSTABLE RING DIMENSIONS SHACKLE DIMENSIONS SLING WEIGHT (LBS.) MAIN HOOK AREA (WIDTH) RING AREA (LENGTH) NOMINAL SHACKLE SIZE TONNAGE (WLL) APPROX 3 FOOT BASE APPROX ADDER PER FOOT TPA 06 6, /2 1-3/16 3-1/8 2-5/8 5/8 3-1/4T TPXA 12 12, /8 4-1/8 4 7/8 6-1/2T TPXA 20 20, /8 4-1/ /4 12T TPXA 40 40, /8 5-1/4 5-1/2 1-3/4 25T TPXA 60 60, /2 2 35T TPXA 90 90, / /2 2-1/4 55T NOTE: CAPACITIES SHOWN ARE FOR ENTIRE BRIDLE ASSEMBLY WITH 45 ANGLE. DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITY METRIC CAPACITIES AVAILABLE! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light, sunlight & temperature above 180 F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. 13 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

16 Twin-Path Adjustable Bridle The Twin-Path Adjustable Bridle sling is a multi-purpose rigging tool and it s important that it is used properly. The adjustment ring has a double sling on one side and a single sling on the other side. If the lifting points are an equal distance from the center of gravity, then the Twin-Path Adjustable can be hooked-up with the double or single sling on either lifting point. If the lifting points are an equal distance on either side of the center of gravity but one is higher, then the double sling should be attached to the higher lifting point. If one of the lifting points is closer to the center of gravity, then attach the double sling to this lifting point. It will have the highest weight concentration. If the Twin-Path Adjustable is attached so that the single sling is nearest the center of gravity, it will not allow the lift to be made. Never use the Twin-Path Adjustable Bridle in situations where the sling-to-hook angle is greater than 45. Always connect above the center of gravity. If connections are made below the center of gravity, then the load may turn when lifted.! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light, sunlight & temperature above 180 F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

17 Check-Fast High Performance Roundslings Twin-Path Sparkeater Slings SINGLE-PATH EXTRA COVERMAX WITH CHECK-FAST INSPECTION US Patent #7,661,737, #7,926,859 CA #2,547,632 EP # Slingmax Single-Path Slings are the only single-path, high-performance fiber roundslings available with the Check-Fast Inspection System and Covermax Cover. The Covermax Cover is the most durable cover available for a synthetic sling. Also available in polyester with a polyester cover and polyester core yarn. SINGLE-PATH K-SPEC SLINGS STOCK NO. RATED CAPACITIES 5:1 DF VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET BASKET HITCHES APPROXIMATE WEIGHT (LBS. PER FT.) (BEARING-BEARING) NOMINAL BODY WIDTH SPXCF 500 5,000 4,000 10,000 8,660 7, SPXCF ,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14, SPXCF ,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21, SPXCF ,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28, SPXCF ,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35, SPXCF ,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42, SPXCF ,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56, SPXCF ,000 40, ,000 86,600 70, SPXCF ,000 48, , ,920 84, SPXCF ,000 56, , ,240 98, SPXCF ,000 68, , , , SPXCF ,000 80, , , , DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITY SPARKEATER US Patent #4,850,629 CN Patent #1,280,458 The Sparkeater sling (SE) is the sling to use when the job site is in a hot environment (up to 300 F or 150 C). These slings are made with high-temperature core yarns and a high temperature cover. Sparkeater slings, as with all Twin-Path slings, come with an inner red cover that provides an early warning for damage, as well as the patented Check-Fast Inspection System. TWIN-PATH STOCK NO. RATED CAPACITIES 5:1 DF VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET BASKET HITCHES APPROXIMATE WEIGHT (LBS. PER FT.) (BEARING-BEARING) TPSE ,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14, TPSE ,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21, TPSE ,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28, TPSE ,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35, TPSE ,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42, TPSE ,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56, TPSE ,000 40, ,000 86,600 70, TPSE ,000 48, , ,920 84, TPSE ,000 56, , ,240 98, TPSE ,000 68, , , , TPSE ,000 80, , , , NOTE: CAPACITIES SHOWN INCLUDE BOTH PATHS AND ARE FOR ONE COMPLETE SLING. SMALLER AND LARGER CAPACITIES AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST! WARNING 15 NOMINAL BODY WIDTH Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light, sunlight & temperature above 300 F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

18 EQUALIZER BLOCK Equalizer Block Twin-Path Field Taper The Equalizer Block is used to maintain tension on all legs of the sling during a lift. Rather than adjusting slings and hooks prior to completing a lift, the Equalizer Block automatically adjusts itself when the load is put on the device from the sling. This product was designed specifically for Twin-Path slings and is the only rolling block for synthetic roundslings. PART NO. CAPACITY (5:1 DF) MAXIMUM SLING WIDTH SUGGESTED SLING FOR 90 BASKET BLOCK WEIGHT SEB10 10 US TON 3 TPXCF SEB25 25 US TON 4 TPXCF SEB50 50 US TON 6 TPXCF SEB75 75 US TON 6 TPXCF SEB125M 125 METRIC TON 8 TPXCF ! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from contact with edges. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. TWIN-PATH FIELD TAPER The Twin-Path Field Taper is a removable, repositionable wrap that reduces the width of TPXCF slings onsite. This is a tool that can be utilized to fit a sling into smaller openings without sacrificing sling capacity. Benefits: 1. Removable and transferable from sling to sling 2. Can be installed by the customer in the field 3. Bearing points can be changed throughout the sling length 4. Much quicker installation 5. Doesn t contaminate a nuclear fuel pool 6. Easy inspection of sling after use! WARNING Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions and abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkali and temperature over 180. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

19 Twin-Path Rigging Practices Keep folded and wrinkled sling covers off bearing points Smooth folds and wrinkles out of the covers over the hook and hardware area with your hands Do not fold one path over the other path to fit sling into tight fittings Squeeze both paths together to fit sling into tight hooks and fittings Do not allow the sling to roll over itself and twist at inside the choker hitch Makes sure the body of the sling paths run smooth in the choker hitch without any twisting Do not place the identification tag on the bearing point Identification should be placed 18" - 24" away from the bearing point and facing away from the load When rigging a basket hitch do not pull slack out of the hitch with the crane When rigging a basket hitch, adjust slack out by hand, before lifting with the crane When rigging a vertical hitch with a long sling don't pull the slack side out with the crane When rigging a vertical hitch with a long sling equalize the slack side by hand When placing multiple Twin-Path slings in hardware place the slings directly on top of each other or side by side. When placing slings in narrow fittings squeeze sling to fit and maintain equal loading on the paths. When connecting two slings with a shackle, do not place a sling over the pin area without protection When connecting two slings with a shackle, use sling protection over the pin to protect the sling from cutting! WARNING Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions and abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkali and temperature over 180 F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. 17 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

20 Twin-Path Slings TWIN-PATH SLINGS... DO THE JOB 40 ton Electric Transformer 90 ton Oil Rig Thruster F-15 Level Lift with Adjustable Bridles Transporting a 500 ton Electric Generator 220 ton Cement Kiln Removing Nuclear Reactor Lid Sections WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

21 Use and Care Mechanical Considerations 1. Load both paths of Twin-Path slings equally. Do not side load. Do not load the edge of the sling. 2. Determine the weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the sling. 3. Select a sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment. 4. Slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity. Consideration shall be given to angle of lift which may affect the lifting capacity. Diameters of pins and edges also may affect the capacity of the lifting sling. 5. Slings used in a choker shall not be forced to tighten around the load by pounding with hammers or other objects. Choker hitches are the least effective way to use a sling based on capacity. Two chokers should be used to balance the load. One choker in the center of the load may create an unbalanced situation which could lead to an accident. 6. Slings used in a basket hitch must have the load balanced to prevent slippage and accidents. 7. Slings used with fittings shall be compatible with the fittings used. The lifting capacity shall be rated at the lower of the fitting or sling. Fitting openings shall be of the proper shape and size to assure that the sling will seat properly. 8. Slings in contact with edges, corners, protrusions, or abrasive surfaces shall be protected with a material of sufficient strength, thickness, and construction to prevent damage. The pin area of a shackle can cause synthetic slings to cut or tear. 9. Slings shall not be dragged on the floor or drawn across other surfaces which may damage the sling. 10. Slings shall not be twisted or tied in knots to shorten. 11. Slings can be damaged by resting loads on them or by pulling slings from under a load. 12. Do not drop objects on slings or run over them with vehicles. 13. Slings which are damaged shall not be used. 14. Sling hitches must provide control of the load. 15. Portions of the human body shall be kept from between the sling and the load and from between the sling and any attachment to lifting devices such as hooks. 16. Personnel shall stand clear of suspended loads. 17. Personnel shall not ride on the sling or suspended loads. 18. Avoid shock loading. 19. Twisting and kinking the legs of the sling shall be avoided. 20. Load applied to the hook should be centered in the bowl of the hooks. Do not point-load the hook. 21. During lifting with or without the load all personnel shall be alert for possible snagging. 22. The slings shall contain or support the load from the sides above the center of gravity so the load will not tilt when the load is lifted. 19 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

22 Use and Care Mechanical Considerations 23. Synthetic roundsling users shall be trained in the selection, inspection, cautions to personnel, effects of environment, and rigging practices. 24. Only legibly marked or labeled slings must be used. If the tag is not legible, or missing, the sling must not be used. 25. Keep labels or tags away from the load, the hook and the angle of choke. 26. Synthetic slings should be inspected before each lift. Environmental Considerations K-Spec core yarn strength retention is based on test results of components at 65 C/150 F (or less) for 6 months. K-Spec has a 100% strength retention when exposed to: age, 10% detergent solution, rot and mildew, sunlight and toluene; 99% strength retention when exposed to: acetic acid, gasoline, hydrochloric acid 1m, hydraulic fluid, kerosene, and sea water; 98% retention when exposed to: 25% ammonium hydroxide, 10% hypophosphite solution, and 40% phosphoric acid; 97% retention when exposed to 5m sodium hydroxide; 95% retention when exposed to Portland cement and sulfuric acid; and 88% retention when exposed to Clorox bleach, and nitric acid. Fiber Characteristics NYLON POLYESTER ARAMID POLY-ARYLATE (LIQUID CRYSTAL) UHMwPE K-SPEC FIBER PROPERTIES Tenacity - dry g/d Elongation at break % Moisture regain % < Specific Gravity CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Solvents Good Good Excel Excel Excel Excel Acids Dilute: Conc: Alkalis Dilute: Conc: TEMPERATURE TOLERANCE Good Fair Excel Excel Good Fair Good Fair Good Good Good Good Excel <90% Excel <30% Excel Excel Excel Excel Melt Point 425 F 490 F 900 F 625 F 300 F Excel Excel Excel Excel 320 F In use, Follow sling tag warning WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

23 Use and Care Inspections of Twin-Path Products 1. Check-Fast External Early Warning Indicator (EWI) and Tell-Tail indicators shall extend past the tag area of each sling. If your sling is equipped with Check-Fast and the EWI is not visible or both Tell-Tails are not visible, remove the sling from service. Send to manufacturer for repair evaluation. 2. If Fiber-Optic inspection is installed in the sling, inspect by allowing light to enter the fiber optics. If the fiber optics do not transmit light from end to end, remove the sling from service and contact the manufacturer for repair evaluation. 3. Slings shall be inspected for evidence of cutting or tearing of the outer cover. Slings with cuts shall be removed from service and sent back to the manufacturer for repair evaluation. Damage to the cover may indicate core damage. 4. Inspect slings for evidence of heat damage. Sparkeater slings shall not be exposed to temperatures over 149 C/300 F. K-Spec and polyester slings shall not be exposed to temperatures above 82 C/180 F. Cold temperature exposure down to - 40 C/- 40 F do not affect the strength of the products. 5. If any part of the sling shows evidence of chemical degradation or damage, remove the sling from service. Return the sling to the manufacturer for repair evaluation. 6. Slings using aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays or mists of alkalis or acids are present. 7. Twin-Path lifting slings and any fittings attached shall be the subject of frequent and regular inspections. In addition to the initial inspection by a competent person and frequent written inspections, the slings shall be visually inspected before each use. 8. Written inspections shall be performed as required and documents of such inspection by a competent person shall be kept on file in the safety department of the plant or site where used. Inspections may be done more often based on frequency of use, severity of conditions, experience of past service life. 9. Slings shall be examined throughout their length for abrasion, cuts, heat damage, fitting distortion or damage, tag legibility, and if any doubts are held by the inspector, the sling shall be removed from service. If deterioration is found, the sling must be removed from service. 10. Slings removed from service that are not repairable shall be destroyed and rendered completely unfit for future use. 11. Abrasion, heat damage or cuts to the cover may indicate a loss of strength to the core yarns, and these slings shall not be used until evaluated by the manufacturer. Test Procedures for Twin-Path Sling Products 1. Proof tests shall consist of pulling the slings to twice their rated capacity. 2. Testing of Twin-Path sling products and core yarn shall be on a testing machine which meets or exceeds the standards as described in ASME E Break testing of slings shall be as above with results documented. Pin size for break testing should be a diameter equal to half the nominal sling width, or larger. 4. Repaired fittings or slings shall be proof-tested before they are returned to service. Certifications may be provided to the fitting or sling owner. 21 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

24 RIGGING COMPARISON Sling Reference Charts TYPES OF SLINGS COMPARISON TWIN-PATH EXTRA SLINGS WIRE ROPE SLINGS HPF ROPE SLINGS ALLOY CHAIN SLINGS POLYESTER ROUNDSLINGS SYNTHETIC WEB SLINGS HMPE ROPE SLINGS WEIGHT Lightest Very Heavy Light Very Heavy 3 Times Heavier 3 Times Heavier Light FLEXIBILITY Excellent Moderate Excellent Excellent Excellent Multi-ply stiff Excellent ELONGATION Negligible Negligible Low Negligible Med to High High High REPAIRABLE Yes No No Yes No No No ABSORPTION No No No No No Yes Yes CORROSION No Yes No Yes No No No SAFETY FEATURES Yes No No No No No No UV RESISTANT Yes Yes No Yes No No Minimal ABRASION RESISTANT Best Syn. Yes No Yes No No No BUOYANCY Yes Sinks Fast Yes Sinks Fast Sinks Sinks CONDUCTIVITY No Yes No Yes No No No SPARKING No Yes No Yes No No No QUICK REFERENCE CHART OF THE MOST POPULAR SLINGMAX HEAVY-LIFT WIRE ROPE SLINGS Tri-Flex Sling PARTS OF WIRE ROPE IN BODY D/d BODY* D/d EYE* 3 5/1 1.5/1 1 Ferrule TERMINATION OF EACH EYE MINIMUM LENGTH FEATURES 6' for 7/8" component wire* Good replacement for single-strand wire rope slings Gator-Laid sling 9 5/1 1/1 3 Ferrules 6' for 3/4" component wire* 80% efficiency; parallel-laid eyes Gator-Flex grommet 9 5/1 N/A Hand tuck 5' for 1/4" component wire* Endless * Ratio based on finished body diameter * Ratio based on finished body diameter * Minimum length increases as component wire size increases INSPECTION OF SLINGMAX WIRE ROPE SLINGS 1. Follow general criteria in ASME/ANSI B30.9 Chapter 9-2 Wire Rope Slings - Selection, Use, and Maintenance 2. Retirement criteria: for Tri-Flex slings of less than 9 parts, 20 broken wires per lay length means that the sling should be removed from service. For slings of 9 parts or more, 40 Broken wires per lay length means that the sling should be removed from service. ADVANTAGES: FLEXIBILITY, LOW D/d RATIOS, GOOD LENGTH TOLERANCE Meets conditions specified by the Wire Rope Technical Board Sling Manual WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

25 Tri-Flex Slings TRI-FLEX SLINGS IN ACTION 23 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

26 Tri-Flex Wire Rope Slings Tri-Flex Wire Rope Slings provide the best combination of strength and flexibility. Because of the Tri- Flex sling construction, there is a large savings in material and machine costs in the larger sizes. This, combined with ease of use, makes Tri-Flex Wire Rope Slings the slings for smart buyers. PIN SIZE EQUALS D/d OF 1.5:1 IN THE EYE USING FINISHED DIAMETER Patent #4,043,581 BASKET HITCH EQUALS D/d OF 5:1 USING FINISHED DIAMETER COMPOSED 3 PARTS OF EIP ROPE TRI-FLEX ENGINEERING INFORMATION DESIGN FACTOR 5:1 RATED LOAD IN TONS VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET FINISHED ACTUAL DIAMETER 1/ /2.44 5/ /8.68 3/ /4.99 WEIGHT PER FT. LBS. 7/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / TRI-FLEX WIRE ROPE SLINGS provide the best combination of strength and flexibility. Because of the patented TRI-FLEX SLING construction, there is a large savings in material and machine costs in the larger sizes; this, combined with ease of use make TRI-FLEX SLINGS the only sling for smart buyers.! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

27 Tri-Flex with Cable Laid Wire Rope This wire rope sling is an extremely flexible product with great applications for general rigging purposes. It makes a fantastic choker sling, especially when setting or removing utility poles. COMPOSED 3 PARTS OF: VERTICAL (TONS) CHOKER (TONS) VERTICAL BASKET (TONS) FINISHED DIAMETER 1/ /2 3/ /4 1/ / /4 3/ /2 NOTE: Vertical rated capacity is based on 5:1 Design Factor, EIP, IWRC, or GAC. Bending radius of the sling body is 5:1 where D is the Pin or Load and d is the sling body. D/d of loops: 1/1 where D is the pin and d is the sling body! WARNING Inspect before each use. Follow OSHA, ANSI B30.9 and Manufacturer's Guidelines. Use by untrained persons is hazardous. Improper use will result in serious injury or death. Do not exceed rated capacity. This product will fail if damaged, abused, misused, overused or improperly maintained. 25 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

28 Gator-Flex Grommets GATOR-FLEX GROMMETS U.S. Patent #5,561,973 Gator-Flex Grommets are endless for heavy lifts that require short connections. These slings can be made shorter than standard multi-part slings. They are the most flexible grommets in the industry. PIN SIZE 5 x FD FINISHED DIA. GATOR-FLEX GROMMETS (D/d = 5:1) RATED CAPACITY AT 5:1 DF 9 PTS. WIRE ROPE SIZE VERTICAL TONS (2000 LBS) CHOKER BASKET VERTICAL 1 1/ /4 5/ /2 3/ /4 7/ / /4 9/ /2 5/ / /2 7/ /2 1-1/ / /2 1-3/ / / / / / WEIGHT PER FT./LBS.! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

29 Gator-Laid Wire Rope Slings GATOR-LAID WIRE ROPE SLINGS For heavy lifting work, Gator-Laid Wire Rope Slings are the most efficient and flexible wire rope slings that meet all industrial and regulatory standards. These slings have metal sleeves for the splice connection and parallel-laid wire in the eyes. It is a heavy-lift sling that can be made in short working lengths. Gator-Laid products were developed in conjunction with the offshore oil industry to provide the world's best heavy lift wire rope slings. FINISHED DIAMETER COMPONENT PARTS STANDARD EYE SIZE GATOR-LAID SLINGS TECHNICAL CHART VERTICAL RATED CAPACITY (TONS) CHOKER RATED CAPACITY (TONS) BASKET RATED CAPACITY (TONS) WEIGHT PER FOOT 1/2 1/ /8 5/ /4 3/ /8 7/ / /4 5/ /2 3/ /4 7/ / /4 9/ /2 5/ / /2 7/ /2 1-1/ / /2 1-3/ / / / / NOTE: Rated capacity is based on 5:1 Design Factor.! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. 27 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

30 Hand-Spliced Slings NO. 100 B The end of a single wire rope is turned back along the rope to form the eye, and strands are hand-tucked into the body of the rope. There are two styles available: 1: Standard Four Tuck burnt-end splice. The strands are left exposed, cut off and fused with a torch. 2: The tapered and concealed splice utilizes tension in the rope body to secure strands where they are tucked back into the rope. The center core of either fiber or wire is removed along the length of the splice. When tapered and concealed, ends of strands are tucked inward and concealed inside the rope. Standard Four tuck and tapered and concealed slings have the same rated capacity for each available diameter of wire rope. WARNING: Hand-spliced slings should not be used in lifts where the sling may rotate and cause the wire rope to unlay. LOOP DIMENSIONS RATED CAPACITIES IN TONS (2000 LBS) 6 X 19 AND 6 x 37 EIPS ROPE - FIBERCORE & IWRC BASKET HITCH DIAMETER OF ROPE MIN LENGTH (SL) OF SLING (FT-IN) W L SINGLE LEG VERTICAL CHOKER HITCH / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Rated capacities of choker hitches apply when the angle of choke is greater than 120. Rated capacities of basket hitches are based on a minimum diameter of curvature at the point of load contact of 25 times the rope diameter. The Wayne special- Wayne Printup who was a Native American Ironworker who came up with the idea of having one loop hand Tuck and the other loop Flemished eye.! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

31 Mechanical Splice Flemish Eye Slings NO. 105 B Eyes are formed using the flemish eye splice. Ends are secured by pressing a metal sleeve over the ends of the strands of the splice. Pull is directly along the centerline of rope & eye. Gives most efficient use of rope capacity & is economical. Flemish Eye Splice In the standard flemish eye mechanical splice, rope is separated into two parts 3 adjacent strands, and 3 adjacent strands and core. These two parts are then re-laid back in opposite directions to form an eye, and ends are secured with a pressed metal sleeve. DIAMETER OF ROPE MIN LENGTH (SL) OF SLING (FT-IN) LOOP DIMENSIONS W L SINGLE LEG VERTICAL Swaging Provides Positive Grip This cutaway of a metal sleeve swaged onto a splice shows how metal flows into valleys between strands to positively prevent ends from unlaying when sling is used within its rated capacity. RATED CAPACITIES IN TONS (2000 LBS) 6 X 19 AND 6 X 37 EIPS ROPE - IWRC BASKET HITCH CHOKER HITCH / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *Rated capacities of basket hitches are based on a minimum diameter of curvature at the point of load contact of 40 times the rope diameter for slings 1/4" thru 1" diameter and 25 times the rope diameter for slings 1-1/4" diameter and larger.! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. 29 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

32 Cable-Laid Slings NO. 108C These smooth and very flexible slings are made from cut lengths of cable-laid fabric that is machine formed by laying six wire ropes in a helical pattern around a core rope. Flemish eye mechanical splices, secured by pressed metal sleeves, provide centerline pull at the eyes. More flexible than same capacity single-part slings. Sling Bodies are made from 7 Individual Wire Ropes Flemish Eye Splice In the standard flemish eye mechanical splice, rope is separated into two parts 3 adjacent strands, and 3 adjacent strands and core. These two parts are then re-laid back in opposite directions to form an eye, and ends are secured with a pressed metal sleeve. Swaging Provides Positive Grip This cutaway of a metal sleeve swaged onto a splice shows how metal flows into valleys between strands to positively prevent ends from unlaying when sling is used within its rated capacity. Ideal for use as basket or choker hitches, where flexibility and ease of handling are essential and cutting or abrasion is not a critical factor. RATED CAPACITY (TONS) LENGTH 7x7x7 BODY DIA BASKET HITCH LOOP SLIP THRU THIMBLE ST HEAVY THIMBLE HT SLIP-ON THIMBLE QT VERT CHOKER A B 1/ W-2 1/4 3/8 3/ W-2 3/8 3/8 1/ W-3 1/2 1/2 5/ W-4 5/8 5/8 3/ W-4 3/4 3/4 7/ W-5 7/8 7/ W / W-6 1-1/8 1-1/ W-6 1-1/4 B A E-E ST-ST HT-HT OT-OT 7x7x19! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

33 Grommet Slings CABLE LAID GROMMET WIRE ROPE SLINGS Cable Laid Grommets have six wire ropes laid helically around a wire rope core, with ends joined either by a hand-tucked or a mechanical splice to form an endless body. Highly flexible, they resist kinks and are easy to handle. Minimum circumference of the sling is 96 times the grommet body diameter. Hand-Tucked Continuous Construction... made from one continuous wire rope Mechanical Splice 7 Parts of Wire Rope in the Sling Body NO. 21 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.) NO. 15 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.) EIP COMPONENT ROPE DIA BASKET HITCHES FINISHED SLING BODY DIA VERT CHOKER VERTICAL X 7 X 7 GALVANIZED AIRCRAFT CABLE 1/8 3/ /16 9/ /32 5/ X 6 X 9 & 7 X 6 X 37 - EIP 1/4 3/ /16 15/ /8 1-1/ /16 1-5/ /2 1-1/ / / /8 1-7/ /4 2-1/ /8 2-5/ /8 3-3/ /4 3-3/ BASKET HITCHES FINISHED SLING BODY DIA VERT CHOKER VERTICAL X 7 X 19 CONSTRUCTION 1/ / / / x 6 x 9 & 7 x 6 x 37 - EIP CONSTRUCTION 3/ / / / / / / / Rated Capacities Basket Hitch and vertical lift based on D/d ratio of 5 when d is diameter of the finished grommet. Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no smaller than 5x the body diameter. Rated capacities based on design factor of 5. Sling angles of less than 30 degrees shall not be used. 31 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

34 Grommet Slings STRAND LAID GROMMET WIRE ROPE SLINGS Strand Laid Grommets have either a wire rope body, or a body of six strands laid helically around a fiber or strand core, with either a hand tucked or a mechanical splice to form an endless sling body. Minimum circumference of the sling is 96 times the grommet body diameter. Hand-Tucked Continuous Construction... made from one continuous wire rope Mechanical Splice 7 Parts of Wire Rope in the Sling Body NO. 11 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.) SLING BODY DIA. VERT CHOKER 6 X 19 CLASS - FC EIPS BASKET HITCHES VERTICAL / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / NO. 14 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.) SLING BODY DIA. VERT CHOKER 6 X 19 & 6 X 37 CLASS - IWRC EIPS BASKET HITCHES VERTICAL / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Rated Capacities Basket Hitch and vertical lift based on D/d ratio of 5 when d is diameter of the finished grommet. Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no smaller than 5x the body diameter. Sling angles of less than 30 degrees shall not be used WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

35 2 Leg Wire Rope Bridles No. 200 Series Slings are 2-leg all-purpose bridles, designed for general lifting purposes where attachment may be made directly to the load, such as hooking into lifting eyes or placing loops over lugs. DIAMETER OF WIRE ROPE MINIMUM LENGTH (SL) OF SLING (FT - IN) ALLOY OBLONG LINKS DIAMETER RATED CAPACITIES (TONS) EIPS-IWRC / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / For approximate capacities using Fibre Core IPS: deduct 10% from IPS-IWRC strengths. For approximate capacities on Hand Braided Slings: deduct 15% from corresponding mechanically swaged strengths. For approximate capacities on Socket Attachments: add 5% to corresponding IWRC swaged strengths. 200FL 2 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Flemish Loops on bottom. 200HT 2 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Heavy Duty Thimbles on bottom. 200EH 2 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Eye Hoist Hooks Safety Latches on bottom. 200SPA 2 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Screw Pin Anchor Shackle on bottom. 200CT 2 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Crescent Thimble on bottom. 200OS 2 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Open Swage Socket on bottom. 200CS 2 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Closed Swage Socket on bottom. 200BAS 2 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Bolt Anchor Shackle on bottom. 33 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

36 3 Leg Wire Rope Bridles No. 300 Series Slings are 3-leg all-purpose bridles, generally recommended for handling unbalanced loads. DIAMETER OF WIRE ROPE MINIMUM LENGTH (SL) OF SLING (FT - IN) ALLOY OBLONG LINKS DIAMETER RATED CAPACITIES (TONS) EIPS-IWRC / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / For approximate capacities using Fibre Core IPS: deduct 10% from IPS-IWRC strengths. For approximate capacities on Hand Braided Slings: deduct 15% from corresponding mechanically swaged strengths. For approximate capacities on Socket Attachments: add 5% to corresponding IWRC swaged strengths. 300FL 3 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Flemish Loops on bottom. 300HT 3 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Heavy Duty Thimbles on bottom. 300EH 3 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Eye Hoist Hooks Safety Latches on bottom. 300SPA 3 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Screw Pin Anchor Shackle on bottom. 300CT 3 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Crescent Thimble on bottom. 300OS 3 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Open Swage Socket on bottom. 300CS 3 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Closed Swage Socket on bottom. 300BAS 3 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Bolt Anchor Shackle on bottom. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

37 4 Leg Wire Rope Bridles No. 400 Series Slings are 4-leg all-purpose bridles, used both for balanced and unbalanced loads and for heavier loads where design calls for more distribution of weight by the use of attachment at four points. DIAMETER OF WIRE ROPE MINIMUM LENGTH (SL) OF SLING (FT - IN) ALLOY OBLONG LINKS DIAMETER RATED CAPACITIES (TONS) EIPS-IWRC / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /4 8-9 CALL / CALL For approximate capacities using Fibre Core IPS: deduct 10% from IPS-IWRC strengths. For approximate capacities on Hand Braided Slings: deduct 15% from corresponding mechanically swaged strengths. For approximate capacities on Socket Attachments: add 5% to corresponding IWRC swaged strengths. 400FL 4 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Flemish Loops on bottom. 400HT 4 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Heavy Duty Thimbles on bottom. 400EH 4 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Eye Hoist Hooks Safety Latches on bottom. 400SPA 4 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Screw Pin Anchor Shackle on bottom. 400CT 4 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Crescent Thimble on bottom. 400OS 4 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Open Swage Socket on bottom. 400CS 4 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Closed Swage Socket on bottom. 400BAS 4 leg Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Bolt Anchor Shackle on bottom. 35 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

38 Wire Rope Bridle End Fittings PERTINENT DIMENSIONS FOR END FITTINGS FOR NO. 200, 300 & 400 SERIES SLINGS DIA OF WIRE ROPE STANDARD LOOP INSIDE W L HEAVY DUTY THIMBLE INSIDE W L ALLOY HOOK SIZE (TONS) IPS & EIPS CARBON SHACKLE SIZE FOR IPS FOR EIPS 1/2 THIMBLE INSIDE LOOP SIZE (TONS) W L OPEN SWAGE SOCKET W JAW OPENING CLOSED SWAGE SOCKET HOLE DIA HEAD THICKNESS 6 x 19 - WITH IWRC 1/ /8 1-5/8 1 5/16 5/16 11/16 11/16 3/4 1/2 5/16 2-1/ /16 1-7/8 1 3/8 3/8 13/16 13/16 7/8 11/16 3/ /8 2-1/8 1-1/2 7/16 7/ /16 13/16 7/8 11/16 7/16 3-1/ /4 2-3/8 2 1/2 1/2 2-1/ /16 7/8 1/ /2 2-3/4 3 5/8 5/8 2-1/4 5-1/ /16 7/8 9/16 4-1/ /2 2-3/4 5 5/8 5/8 2-1/4 5-1/2 1-3/16 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/8 5/ /4 3-1/4 5 3/4 3/4 3-1/ /16 1-1/4 1-7/16 1-1/8 3/ /4 7 7/8 7/8 3-1/ /8 1-1/2 1-11/16 1-5/16 7/ /4 4-1/ /2 10-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 1-11/16 1-1/ /2 4-1/ /4 1-1/8 4-1/ /16 1-3/4 1-1/ /8 5-1/ /4 1-1/4 4-5/8 13-1/2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-5/ x 37 - WITH IWRC 1-1/ /8 5-1/ /8 1-3/8 5-1/ /2 2-1/2 2-9/16 2-1/4 1-3/ /2 6-1/ /2 1-1/ /2 2-1/2 2-9/16 2-1/4 1-1/ /2 6-1/ /4 1-3/4 6-1/ / /16 2-1/2 1-5/ / / /2 3-1/2 3-9/ / / / /2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-9/ /2 2-1/ /2 3-3/ /16 3-1/4 2-1/ / / /4 4-1/4 4-5/ / /2 26-1/2 4-1/4 4-1/4 4-5/ / / /4 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/ / WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

39 Chain Sling Assembly GRADE 80 AND 100 CHAIN SLING ASSEMBLY BASIC TYPES OF CHAIN SLINGS Basic types of chain slings are designated throughout the industry by the following symbols: First Symbol (basic type): S - Single chain sling with master link and hook, or hook at each end. C - Choker chain sling with master link on each end; no hooks. D - Double chain sling with standard master link and hooks. T - Triple chain sling with standard master link and hooks. Q - Quadruple chain sling with master link and hooks. Second Symbol (type of master link or end link): O - Oblong master link Recommended standard for all types. P - Pear shaped master link Available on request. Third Symbol (type of hook): S - Sling hook G - Grab hook F - Foundry hook L - Latchlok hook Sling tags are coded with numerals 1 through 4 to reflect number of branches in sling. Additional coding is defined as follows: AS - Adjustable sling SB - Single Basket ES - Endless single ED - Endless double SAL - Single adjustable loop DAL - Double adjustable loop AD - Adjustable double DB - Double basket Type TOS HOW TO SELECT & ORDER THE PROPER CHAIN SLING 1. Determine the weight and configuration of the load(s) to be lifted. 2. Determine the type of chain sling required, according to weight and configuration. 3. Determine the size of the body chain according to the working load limits. Be sure to take into consideration the effect of the required angle. Working Load Limit: The working load limit is the maximum load in pounds which should ever be applied to chain, even when chain is new, and when load is uniformly applied in direct tension to a straight length of chain. 4. Determine the reach required to give the desired angle. The reach is measured from the upper bearing surface of the master link to the bearing surface of the lower attachment. If chain slings are to be used in pairs & are to be matched for reach, please indicate when ordering. 5. Be sure to specify type, size and reach when ordering chain slings. For specifications on additional hooks, attachments and accessories, refer to the following pages. Note: Angle to the load on multiple leg slings will be 60 or greater as long as the distance between lifting eyes of load is NOT greater than reach shown on Identification Tag. REACH AS REQUIRED ANGLE LOAD MASTER OBLONG LINK SLING HOOK 37 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

40 Alloy Chain Slings A higher strength heat treated alloy steel chain, Grade 80 Alloy chain is primarily used as a sling component for overhead lifting, but can be used in rigging and tie down applications where a lighter weight high strength chain is desirable. Recommended for overhead lifting by NACM, ANSI, & OSHA. Grade 80 Alloy chain slings and attachments are manufactured from special analysis alloy steel, engineered for a superior combination of strength, lightness & durability. All Grade 80 chain and attachments are black finish &/or color coded orange for easy, permanent identification. The chain is embossed with the grade & trace code. GRADE 80 ALLOY SINGLE CHAIN SLINGS Before shipment, all Grade 80 chain slings undergo a succession of demanding quality control checks. Every sling is proof tested, registered and guaranteed for one year to be free from defects in materials and workmanship. A durable metal tag attached to the sling permanently identifies the grade, type, working load limit (at a specific angle of lift) and registration number of the sling. Chain slings are used primarily for overhead lifting and are generally used in conjunction with a crane or some type of lifting device. Standard sling configurations consist of chain branches which are affixed on one end to a master link or ring with some type of attachment, usually a hook, affixed to the opposite end. GRADE 80 ALLOY CHAIN AND ATTACHMENTS CONVERSION TABLE CHAIN SIZE FRACTION DECIMAL METRIC (MM) HOOK SIZE DESIGNATION AND MARKINGS SLING CRADLE GRAB FLAT GRAB FOUNDRY LATCHLOK 7/ HA22 10M 10M 9/ HA220 HA9/32 HA1 HA498 9/32 3/ HA250 HA3/8 HA3 HA499 3/8 1/ HA280 HA1/2 HA5 HA500 1/2 5/ HA290 HA5/8 HA6 HA501 5/8 3/ HA300 HA3/4 HA7 HA502 3/4 7/ HA320 HA7/8 HA8 HA HA330 HA1 HA9 HA / HA350 HA1-1/4 HA11 HA505 GRADE 80 ALLOY CHAIN SIZES AND WORKING LOAD LIMITS CHAIN SIZE (MM) PRODUCT CODE SINGLE 90 WORKING LOAD LIMITS DOUBLE TRIPLE & QUAD NOMINAL DIMENSIONS INSIDE LENGTH INSIDE WIDTH APPROX. NO. LINKS PER FT APPROX. WEIGHT PER 100 FT 7/ ,100 3,600 3,000 2,100 5,450 4,450 3, / ,500 6,100 4,900 3,500 9,100 7,400 5, / ,100 12,300 10,000 7,100 18,400 15,100 10, / ,000 20,800 17,000 12,000 31,200 25,500 18, / ,100 31,300 25,600 18,100 47,000 38,400 27, / ,300 49,000 40,000 28,300 73,500 60,000 42, / ,200 59,200 48,400 34,200 88,900 72,500 51, ,700 82,600 67,400 47, , ,200 71, / , , ,200 72, , , , ,570.9 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

41 Alloy Chain Slings The life & strength of Alloy chain slings depends on proper inspection, maintenance and use. For additional info, refer to ANSI B30.9 & OSHA CARE Chain requires careful storage & regular maintenance. Store chains on an A frame in a clean, dry place. To avoid corrosion, oil chains before prolonged storage. Do not heat Alloy chain; this will alter its thermal treatment Do not plate or change surface finish of chain. Contact Hanes for special requirements. USE To protect both operators and materials, observe these precautions when using chain slings: Before use, inspect chain and attachments following the instructions under Inspection below. Do not exceed working load limit. Any of the factors listed here can reduce the load the chain will hold: Acceleration in rate of load to application can produce dangerous overloading. Variation in the angle of the load to the sling as the angle decreases, the working load of the sling will increase. Twisting, knotting or kinking subjects links to unusual loading, decreasing the working load of the sling. Use for purposes other than those for which slings are intended can reduce the working load of the sling. Free chain of all twists, knots and kinks. Center load in hook(s); hook latches must not support load. Avoid sudden jerks when lifting and lowering. Balance all loads; avoid tipping of loads. Use pads around sharp corners. Do not drop load on chains. Match the size & working load limit of attachments such as hooks or rings to the size & WLL of the chain. For overhead lifting, use only alloy chain and attachments (grade 80 or 100). INSPECTION It is important both to inspect chain slings regularly and to keep a record of all chain inspections. Follow this guide for such an inspection system. Before inspecting, clean chains with a non-acid/ non-causic solvent so that marks, nicks, wear and other defects are visible. Inspect each link for these conditions: Twists or bends. Nicks or gouges. Excessive wear at bearing points. Stretch. CARE, USE AND INSPECTION Distorted or damaged master links, coupling links or attachments, especially spread in throat opening of hooks. Mark plainly with paint each link or attachment showing any of the conditions listed here to indicate rejection; remove from service until properly repaired. WEAR ALLOWANCES OF ALLOY CHAIN Measure cross section at link ends to determine wear. If chain is worn to less than the minimum allowable thickness, remove from service. USE OF CHAIN UNDER HEAT CONDITIONS When the chain itself is heated to temperatures shown here, working load limits should be reduced as indicated. 1 While chain is at temperature shown in first column. 2 When chain is used at room temperature after having been heated to temperatures shown in first column. CERTIFICATE OF TEST AND IDENTIFICATION The identification tag found on the master coupling link of each chain sling contains this information: 39 MM INCHES MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR (INCHES) MINIMUM THICKNESS ALLOWABLE AT LINK ENDS (INCHES)* 5.5 7/32 2/64 (.031) 12/64 (.189) 7.0 9/32 2/64 (.031) 16/64 (.239) /8 3/64 (.047) 21/64 (.342) /2 4/64 (.062) 28/64 (.443) /8 5/64 (.078) 35/64 (.546) /4 6/64 (.094) 42/64 (.687) /8 8/64 (.125) 48/64 (.750) /64 (.140) 53/64 (.887) /4 10/64 (.156) 70/64 (1.09) TEMPERATURE OF CHAIN REDUCTION IN WORKING LOAD LIMIT 1 WHILE HEATED Grade Size Reach Type Working load limit (at a specific angle of lift) Serial number PERMANENT REDUCTION IN WORKING LOAD LIMIT F 25% 5% 600 F 30% 15% 700 F 40% 20% 800 F 50% 25% 900 F 60% 30% 1000 F 70% 35% WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

42 Alloy Chain Sling Specifications REACH SINGLE CHAIN SLINGS TYPE SOG GRAB HOOK TYPE SOG CLEVLOCK GRAB HOOK TYPE SOF FOUNDRY HOOK TYPE SOS SLING HOOK TYPE SOL LATCHLOK HOOK TYPE SOO OBLONG REACH DOUBLE CHAIN SLINGS SINGLE BASKET TYPE DOS CLEVLOK SLING HOOK TYPE DOG CLEVLOK GRAB HOOK TYPE DOF FOUNDRY HOOK TYPE DOS TYPE DOG GRAB HOOK REACH TRIPLE & QUAD CHAIN SLINGS TYPE TOS TYPE OOS DOUBLE BASKET STYLE A ADJUSTABLE CHAIN SLINGS STYLE B REACH TYPE ASOSA TYPE ADOSA TYPE SAL A TYPE ASOAB TYPE ADOSB TYPE SAL B WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

43 Chain Slings - Single Types S & C GRADE 80 SINGLE ALLOY CHAIN SLING TYPE S & C WORKING CHAIN SIZE (MM) WORKING LOAD LIMIT * MASTER LINK NUMBER OBLONG MASTER LINK DIAMETER MATERIAL A DIMENSIONS INSIDE WIDTH B INSIDE LENGTH C 7/ ,100 HA40 13/32 1-1/ /32 7 3,500 HA50 1/2 2-1/2 5 5 APPROX WT TYPE SOS 5' REACH 3/8 10 7,100 HA75 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 10 1/ ,000 HA / / ,100 HA / / ,300 HA /4 4-3/8 8-3/4 38 7/ ,200 HA /2 5-1/4 10-1/ ,700 HA / / ,300 HA B A C REACH SOS SLING HOOK SOG GRAB HOOK SOF FOUNDRY HOOK SOL LATCHLOK SOO OBLONG GRADE 100 SINGLE ALLOY CHAIN SLING TYPE S & C WORKING CHAIN SIZE (MM) WORKING LOAD LIMIT * MASTER LINK NUMBER OBLONG MASTER LINK DIAMETER MATERIAL A DIMENSIONS INSIDE WIDTH B INSIDE LENGTH C 7/ ,700 HA40 13/32 1-1/ /32 7 4,300 HA50 1/2 2-1/2 5 5 APPROX WT 3/8 10 8,800 HA75 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 10 1/ ,000 HA / / ,600 HA / / ,300 HA /4 4-3/8 8-3/4 38 7/ ,700 HA /2 5-1/4 10-1/2 34 TYPE SOS 5' REACH ,700 HA / ! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. 41 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

44 Chain Slings - Grade 80 Alloy DOUBLE CHAIN SLING TYPE D B A C REACH DOS SLING HOOKS DOG GRAB HOOKS DOF FOUNDRY HOOKS DOL LATCHLOK HOOKS CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT * (MM) MASTER LINK NUMBER OBLONG MASTER LINK DIAMETER MATERIAL A DIMENSIONS INSIDE WIDTH B INSIDE LENGTH C 7/ ,600 3,000 2,100 HA40 13/32 1-1/ /32 7 6,100 4,900 3,500 HA50 1/2 2-1/2 5 9 APPROX WT TYPE DOS 5' REACH 3/ ,300 10,000 7,100 HA75 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 18 1/ ,800 17,000 12,000 HA / / ,300 25,600 18,100 HA /4 4-3/8 8-3/4 49 3/ ,000 40,000 28,300 HA /2 5-1/4 10-1/2 71 7/ ,200 48,400 34,200 HA / ,600 67,400 47,700 HA / , ,200 72,300 HA / TRIPLE & QUAD CHAIN SLING TYPE T & Q Safety note: A quad branch chain sling usually does not sustain loads with even distribution to its four branches, especially when loads are of rigid structure. Therefore, maximum working load limits are set at the same values as for triple branch chain slings of equal quality and size and used with branches at the same angle of inclination. REACH A B C TOS SLING HOOKS REACH A B C QOS SLING HOOKS CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT * (MM) MASTER LINK NUMBER OBLONG MASTER LINK DIAMETER MATERIAL A DIMENSIONS INSIDE WIDTH B INSIDE LENGTH C TYPE TOS 5' REACH APPROX WT TYPE QOS 5' REACH 7/ ,450 4,450 3,150 HA50-SA 1/2 2-1/ /32 7 9,100 7,400 5,200 HA75-SA 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/ / ,400 15,100 10,600 HA100-SA 1 3-1/ / ,200 25,500 18,000 HA125-SA 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/ / ,000 38,400 27,100 HA150-SA 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/ / ,500 60,000 42,400 HA175-SA 1-3/ / ,900 72,500 51,300 HA200-SA , ,200 71,500 HA225-SA 2-1/ / , , ,400 HA275-SA 2-3/ WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

45 Chain Slings - Grade 100 Alloy DOUBLE CHAIN SLING TYPE D B A C REACH DOS SLING HOOKS DOG GRAB HOOKS DOF FOUNDRY HOOKS DOL LATCHLOK HOOKS CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT * (MM) MASTER LINK NUMBER OBLONG MASTER LINK DIAMETER MATERIAL A DIMENSIONS INSIDE WIDTH B INSIDE LENGTH C 7/ ,700 3,800 2, /32 1-1/ /32 7 7,400 6,100 4, /2 2-1/2 5 9 APPROX WT TYPE DOS 5' REACH 3/ ,200 12,400 8, /4 2-3/4 5-1/2 18 1/ ,000 21,200 15, / / ,100 32,000 22, /4 4-3/8 8-3/4 49 3/ ,100 49,900 35, /2 5-1/4 10-1/2 71 TRIPLE & QUAD CHAIN SLING TYPE T & Q Safety note: A quad branch chain sling usually does not sustain loads with even distribution to its four branches, especially when loads are of rigid structure. Therefore, maximum working load limits are set at the same values as for triple branch chain slings of equal quality and size and used with branches at the same angle of inclination. REACH A B C TOS SLING HOOKS REACH A B C QOS SLING HOOKS CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT * (MM) MASTER LINK NUMBER OBLONG MASTER LINK DIAMETER MATERIAL A DIMENSIONS INSIDE WIDTH B INSIDE LENGTH C TYPE TOS 5' REACH APPROX WT TYPE QOS 5' REACH 7/ ,000 5,700 4,000 HA50-SA 1/2 2-1/ / ,200 9,100 6,400 HA75-SA 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/ / ,900 18,700 13,200 HA100-SA 1 3-1/ / ,000 31,800 22,500 HA125-SA 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/ / ,700 47,900 33,900 HA150-SA 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/ / ,700 74,900 53,000 HA175-SA 1-3/ WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

46 STYLE A STYLE B ADJUSTABLE CHAIN SLINGS Chain Slings Adjustable Chain Saddle Rings 12" of chain Grab Hooks can be added to a single, double, triple, or quad chain sling to make one or all of the legs adjustable. The Style A Adjustable Sling features grab hooks attached directly to the mechanical couplers at the master link to keep them out of the way. The Style B Adjustable Sling adds approximately 12 of chain between the master link and the grab hook adjusters to allow for ease of use. CHAIN SADDLE RINGS United States Patent #4,241,575 Canadian Patent #1,086,510 British Patent #2,029,370 Chain Saddle Rings give a chain bridle length adjustment capabilities in each leg. They aid the rigger in placing the lifting point over the center of gravity so the load will lift in a level manner. Chain Saddle Rings allow for many configurations, making them more versitile than any standard chain sling. DOUBLE SLING SINGLE BRANCH SYSTEM CHAIN SIZE INCHES SLING 90 DEGREE LOADING /32 4,300 7,400 6,100 4, /8 8,800 15,200 12,400 8, /2 15,000 26,000 21,200 15, /8 22,600 39,100 32,000 22, /4 35,300 61,100 49,900 35, /8 42,700 74,000 60,400 42, ,700 82,600 67,400 47, /4 72, , ,200 72, /2 80, , ,100 80,000 Design Factor is 4:1. Rated loads are in pounds. TRIPLE AND QUADRUPLE SLING CHAIN SIZE INCHES /32 11,200 9,100 6,400 3/8 22,800 18,600 13,200 1/2 39,000 31,800 22,500 5/8 58,700 47,900 33,900 3/4 91,700 74,900 53,000 7/8 110,900 90,600 64, , ,200 71, /4 187, , , /2! WARNING Inspect before each use. Follow OSHA, ANSI B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Use by untrained persons is hazardous. Improper use will result in serious injury or death. Do not exceed rated capacity. This product will fail if damaged, abused, misused or improperly maintained. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

47 Wire Mesh Slings LIKE A GIANT HAND... STRONG, GENTLE GRIP SAFE, SURE BALANCE MAKES BEST FOR FAST, SAFE, EASY LIFTS Safer than wire rope, gentle as canvas, flexible as manila... that s only a part of the story of the Gripper Sling the ultimate in versatile materials handling tools. Like a giant hand, Gripper Slings grasp and hold the load in a strong, gentle grip when used in a choke hitch... safely and gently cradle it on a broad, flat surface in a basket hitch. Whatever the size or shape of the load you handle rounds, flats, hexes or squares--gripper Slings can reduce load damage in production or shipping, provide greater safety for load and operator, cut rigging and unhitching time and eliminate the need for two-legged slings. Here s how NO LOAD DAMAGE The unique woven wire construction of Gripper Slings consists of a series of smooth, spiral wires joined together across the body of the sling. This gives the sling complete flexibility, enabling it to bend easily around even irregularly shaped loads and eliminating the danger of gouging or marring edges of the load members. For turned or ground surfaces, PVS or Neoprene-covered slings assure extremely delicate handling. SAFE The wide bearing surface of the Gripper Sling provides better load balance and gripping power... less crushing effect when handling hollow tubing or similar parts. Its instant gripping action means there s no slipping of shifting when load is applied. All metal construction means there s no core to rot, nothing to tear suddenly. Gripper Slings will not whip, kink or tangle, and there are no loose strands to snag load or operator. As for rigging and hitching, a single man can easily do the job. STRONG Thousands of spiral wire loops in a transverse construction give Gripper Slings exceptionally long life. Should a single wire break, the slack is absorbed by the rest of the sling. Gripper Slings are pretested and guaranteed to meet load specifications. Standard lengths and widths with capacities up to 100,000 lbs. are available. Special sizes and corrosion resistant alloys available on request.! WARNING GRIPPER WOVEN WIRE 45 SLINGS Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

48 Wire Mesh Specifications HOW TO SELECT PROPER SLING WIDTH First, determine the hitch you will use for the gauge selected. Then read down the column under the selected hitch and gauge to the load weight you wish to lift. Then read across to the first column at left to find sling width required. Example: You wish to use a G-43 sling in a choke hitch to lift 6,400 pounds. Sling width required is 8". EFFECT OF ANGLE ON RATED CAPACITIES IN BASKET HITCH G-35 HEAVY DUTY G-43 MED. DUTY G-59 LIGHT DUTY NOMINAL WIDTH OF SLING CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET 30 VERT. 60 HORZ. 45 VERT. 45 HORZ. 60 VERT. 30 HORZ. 2 1,600 3,200 2,700 2,000 1, ,000 6,000 5,100 3,800 2, ,400 8,800 7,480 5,600 4, ,600 13,200 11,225 8,400 6, ,800 17,600 15,000 11,250 8, ,000 22,000 18,700 14,000 11, ,200 26,400 22,440 16,800 13, ,400 30,800 26,180 19,600 15, ,600 35,200 29,920 22,400 17, ,800 39,600 33,660 25,200 19, ,000 44,000 37,400 28,000 22, ,450 2,900 2,320 1,740 1, ,175 4,350 3,700 2,700 2, ,900 5,800 4,900 3,670 2, ,800 9,600 8,150 6,100 4, ,400 12,800 10,880 8,100 6, ,000 16,000 13,600 10,200 8, ,600 19,200 16,300 12,000 9, ,200 22,400 19,000 14,000 11, ,800 25,600 21,700 16,200 12, ,500 27,000 22,900 17,000 13, ,000 30,000 25,500 19,000 15, ,800 1,600 1, ,400 2,800 2,400 2,000 1, ,000 4,000 3,500 2,800 2, ,000 6,000 5,200 4,200 3, ,000 8,000 6,900 5,700 4, ,000 10,000 8,600 7,100 5, ,000 12,000 10,400 8,500 6, ,000 14,000 12,100 9,900 7, ,000 16,000 13,900 11,300 8, ,000 18,000 15,600 12,700 9, ,000 20,000 17,300 14,100 10,000! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

49 Nylon Web Slings BASIC SLING TYPES Type 1 TC Slings Slings with a triangle on one end and a slotted triangle (the choker) on the other end. Choice of lightweight aluminum or durable steel fittings. HITCHES Type 2 TT Slings Slings with a triangle at both ends. Used in vertical and basket hitches only. Choice of lightweight aluminum or durable steel fittings. Type 3 EE Slings Slings with an eye on both ends. Choice of straight or tapered eyes (tapered eye are standard on 2" and larger webwidths). Type 4 EE Slings Same basic type as Type 3 but eyes are twisted to a right angle to the sling body. (Tapered eye are standard on 2" & larger web-widths). Type 5 EN Slings Endless slings, sometimes also referred to as grommet slings. The most versatile sling. Type 6 RE Slings Return eye sling, also referred to as reversed eye sling. Sling body is formed by 2 parts of webbing sewn side by side using either a cordura tube or web in the finished width.! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light, sunlight & temperature above 194 F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. 47 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

50 Nylon Web Sling Capacities Resistant to Alkalies. Untreated approx. 6% stretch; treated approx. 10% stretch at rated capacity. Temperature limits are listed on Warning Labels. Contains red warning yarns. Subject to damage of edges. Type 1 Sling TYPE 1 SLINGS CHOKER & BASKET HITCH TRIANGLE & CHOKER FITTINGS TYPE 2 SLINGS BASKET & VERTICAL HITCHES ONLY TWO TRIANGLE FITTINGS WEB WIDTH TC1-802 TC1-803 TC1-804 TC1-805 TC1-806 TC1-808 TC1-810 TC1-812 TC1-816 TC1-818 TC1-820 TC1-824 TC2-802 TC2-803 TC2-804 TC2-805 TC2-806 TC2-808 TC2-810 TC2-812 TC2-816 TC2-818 TC2-820 TC2-824 TT1-802 TT1-803 TT1-804 TT1-805 TT1-806 TT1-808 TT1-810 TT1-812 TT1-816 TT1-818 TT1-820 TT1-824 TT2-802 TT2-803 TT2-804 TT2-805 TT2-806 TT2-808 TT2-810 TT2-812 TT2-816 TT2-818 TT2-820 TT2-824 Ratings based on straight pin diameter one-half the sling width. CODE RATED CAPACITIES NUMBER VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET SINGLE PLY SLINGS 3,200 4,800 6,400 8,000 9,600 12,800 16,000 19,200 25,500 28,700 32,000 38,400 TWO PLY SLINGS 6,400 8,600 11,500 14,000 16,800 22,400 28,000 33,600 44,800 50,400 56,000 67,200 SINGLE PLY SLINGS 3,200 4,800 6,400 8,000 9,600 12,800 16,000 19,200 25,500 28,700 32,000 38,400 TWO PLY SLINGS 6,400 8,600 11,500 14,000 16,800 22,400 28,000 33,600 44,800 50,400 56,000 67,200 2,400 3,600 4,800 6,000 7,200 9,600 12,000 14,400 19,200 21,000 24,000 28,800 4,800 6,500 8,600 10,500 12,600 16,800 21,000 25,200 33,600 37,800 42,000 50,400 6,400 9,600 12,800 16,000 19,200 25,600 32,000 38,400 51,000 57,400 64,000 76,800 12,800 17,200 23,000 28,000 33,600 44,800 56,000 67,200 89, , , ,400 6,400 9,600 12,800 16,000 19,200 25,600 32,000 38,400 51,000 57,400 64,000 76,800 12,800 17,200 23,000 28,000 33,600 44,800 56,000 67,200 89, , , ,400 Type 2 Sling! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light, sunlight & temperature above 194 F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

51 Nylon Web Sling Capacities Ratings based on straight pin diameter one-half the sling width. Type 3 Flat Eye Sling TYPE 3 & 4 SLINGS FLAT OR TWISTED EYES VERTICAL, CHOKER, BASKET HITCHES TYPE 5 SLINGS VERTICAL, CHOKER, BASKET HITCHES ENDLESS OR GROMMET TYPE WEB WIDTH CODE NUMBER EE1-801 EE1-802 EE1-803 EE1-804 EE1-805 EE1-806 EE1-808 EE1-810 EE1-812 EE2-801 EE2-802 EE2-803 EE2-804 EE2-805 EE2-806 EE2-808 EE2-810 EE2-812 EE3-801 EE3-802 EE3-803 EE3-804 EE3-805 EE3-806 EE3-808 EE3-810 EE3-812 EE4-801 EE4-802 EE4-803 EE4-804 EE4-805 EE4-806 EE4-808 EE4-810 EE4-812 EN1-801 EN1-802 EN1-803 EN1-804 EN1-805 EN1-806 EN2-801 EN2-802 EN2-803 EN2-804 EN2-805 EN2-806 RATED CAPACITIES VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET SINGLE PLY SLINGS 1,600 3,200 4,800 6,400 8,000 9,600 12,800 16,000 19,200 TWO PLY SLINGS 3,200 6,400 8,600 11,500 13,600 16,300 19,200 22,400 26,900 THREE PLY SLINGS 4,100 8,300 12,500 16,000 19,200 23,000 30,700 36,800 44,000 FOUR PLY SLINGS 5,000 10,000 14,900 19,800 24,800 29,800 39,700 49,600 59,500 SINGLE PLY SLINGS 3,200 6,400 8,600 11,500 13,600 16,300 TWO PLY SLINGS 6,200 12,200 16,300 20,700 24,500 28,600 1,200 2,400 3,600 4,800 6,000 7,200 9,600 12,000 14,400 2,400 4,800 6,500 8,600 10,200 12,200 14,400 16,800 20,100 3,100 6,200 9,300 12,000 14,400 17,200 23,000 27,600 33,000 3,800 7,500 11,100 14,800 18,600 22,300 29,700 37,200 44,600 2,500 5,000 6,900 9,200 10,900 13,000 4,900 9,800 13,000 16,500 19,600 23,000 3,200 6,400 9,600 12,800 16,000 19,200 25,600 32,000 38,400 6,400 12,800 17,200 23,000 27,200 32,600 38,400 44,800 53,800 8,200 16,600 25,000 32,000 38,400 46,000 61,400 73,600 88,000 10,000 20,000 29,800 39,600 49,600 59,600 79,400 99, ,000 6,400 12,800 17,200 23,000 27,200 32,600 12,400 24,400 32,600 41,400 49,000 57,200 Type 4 Twisted Eye Sling! WARNING Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light, sunlight & temperature above 194 F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance. 49 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

52 Wide Lift Nylon Slings WIDE LIFT SLINGS Attached Eye Wide-Lift For Light, Bulky Loads that require wider bearing areas and some balance attributes. Eyes are made from separate material WLA1 is 1 ply WLA2 is 2 ply both sewn to sling body. Body is single ply for both 1 and 2 ply eyes. 1 PLY EYE 2 PLY EYE BODY WIDTH VERTICAL BASKET HITCH CAPACITY CODE ATTACHED EYE WIDE-LIFT WLA1-806 WLA1-808 WLA1-810 WLA1-812 WLA1-816 WLA1-820 WLA1-824 WLA2-806 WLA2-808 WLA2-810 WLA2-812 WLA2-816 WLA2-820 WLA ,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 18,000 18,000 18,000 EYE LENGH EYE MAT L. WIDTH Continuous Eye Wide-Lift for Heavy Loads - Constructed from one endless sling with the two body lengths butted and joined side by side. Stiffener webbing is used at the base of the eyes to deter the body webbing from folding down the middle. 1 PLY 2 PLY BODY WIDTH CODE VERTICAL BASKET HITCH CAPACITY EYE LENGTH EYE MATL WIDTH CONTINUOUS EYE WIDE-LIFT 6 WL , /2 8 WL , WL , /2 12 WL , WL , /4 20 WL , /2 24 WL , WL , /2 8 WL , WL , WL , WL , WL , WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

53 Reversed Eye Slings Polyester Roundslings REVERSED EYE (RE) SLINGS - TYPE 6 Reversed Eye Sling is a modified endless sling. Cordura wear pads offer added protection on the body and eyes of the sling. This extra Cordura webbing offers superior abrasion resistance and sling life. CODE VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET SLING WIDTH SLING THICKNESS EYE LENGTH HEAVY DUTY WEB RE ,500 3,600 9, / PLY RE ,700 6,200 15, /16 15 RE ,000 8,800 22, /16 15 RE ,500 5,200 13, /2 9 2 PLY RE ,000 10,400 26, /2 15 RE ,000 16,000 40, / PLY RE ,400 13,100 32, /16 15 RE ,500 20,400 51, / PLY RE ,000 27,200 68, /8 15 SINGLE PATH - ENDLESS POLYESTER ROUND SLINGS A flexible solution to your lifting needs. Rotation of lift points extends service life of sling. Length measure from Bearing Point to Bearing Point. Two same color polyester tubular jackets. The economical choice! RATED CAPACITY APPROX. MEASUREMENTS ITEM NO. COLOR VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET MIN. LGTH. (FT) WT. (LBS/FT) BODY DIA. RELAXED LOAD SP260 Purple 2,600 2,100 5, /2.2 5/8 1-1/8 SP530 Green 5,300 4,200 10, /2.3 7/8 1-1/2 SP840 Yellow 8,400 6,700 16, /8 1-7/8 SP1060 Tan 10,600 8,500 21, /8 2-1/8 SP1320 Red 13,200 10,600 26, /8 2-1/4 SP1680 White 16,800 13,400 33, /8 2-1/2 SP2120 Blue 21,200 17,000 42, /4 3 SP3100 Grey 31,000 24,800 62, /4 3-3/4 SP5300 Brown 53,000 42, , /4 4-5/8 SP6600 Olive 66,000 52, , /8 5-1/4 SP9000 Black 90,000 72, , /8 6 WARNING! DO NOT exceed rated capacities. When slings are used at angles of less than 90 from horizontal ratings must be reduced. 51 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

54 5.2 - MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS Synthetic Web Slings Use only if trained. Determine weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the sling Select the proper sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment Slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity. Consideration should be given to the angle of lift (sling-toload angle), which affects rated capacity Slings with fittings which are used in a choker hitch shall be of sufficient length to assure that the choking action is on the webbing, and never on the other fitting Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the load balanced to prevent slippage The opening in fittings shall be the proper shape and size to insure that the fitting will seat properly in the hook or other attachments Slings shall always be protected from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusion, or abrasive surfaces Slings shall not be dragged on the floor or over an abrasive surface Slings shall not be twisted or tied into knots, or joined by knotting Slings shall not be pulled from under loads when the load is resting on the sling Do not drop slings equipped with metal fittings Slings that appear to be damaged shall not be used unless inspected and accepted as usable under Section The sling shall be hitched in a manner providing control of the load Portions of the human body should be kept from between the sling and the load, and from between the sling and the crane hook or hoist hook Personnel should stand clear of the suspended load Personnel shall not ride the sling Shock loading should be avoided Twisting the legs (branches) shall be avoided Load applied to the hook should be centered in the base (bowl) of hook to prevent point loading on the hook During lifting, with or without the load, personnel shall be alert for possible snagging The slings' legs (branches) should contain or support the load from the sides above the center of gravity when using a basket hitch Slings shall be long enough so that the rated load (rated capacity) is adequate when the angle of the legs (branches) is taken into consideration. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

55 Synthetic Web Slings ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS Slings should be stored in a cool, dry and dark place, and should not be exposed to sunlight or ultraviolet light, to prevent mechanical or chemical damage when not in use Chemically active environments can affect the strength of synthetic web slings in varying degrees ranging from none to total degradation. The sling manufacturer should be consulted before slings are used in chemically active environments. a. ACIDS 1. Nylon is subject to degradation in acids, ranging from none to total degradation. 2. Polyester is resistant to many acids, but is subject to degradation, ranging from none to moderate in some acids. 3. Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following: i Type of Acid ii Exposure to conditions iii Concentration iv Temperature b. ALKALIS 1. Polyester is subject to degradation in alkalis, ranging from none to total degradation. 2. Nylon is resistant to many alkalis, but is subject to degradation ranging from none to moderate in some alkalis. 3. Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following: i Type of Alkali ii Exposure to conditions iii Concentration iv Temperature Nylon and polyester slings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 194 F (90 C), however, they may be used in temperatures as low as -40 F (-40 C) Slings incorporating aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of alkalis and/or acids are present Environments in which synthetic webbing slings are continuously exposed to ultra-violet light can affect the strength of synthetic webbing slings in varying degrees ranging from slight to total degradation. a. Factors which affect the degree of strength loss are: 1. Length of time of continuous exposure 2. Sling construction and design 3. Other environmental factors such as weather conditions and geographic location. b. Suggested procedures to minimize the effects of ultra-violet light 1. Store slings in a cool, dry and dark place when not being used for prolonged periods of time 2. Inspect slings weekly or more often depending on frequency of sling use c. Visual indications of ultra-violet degradation are: 1. Bleaching out of sling color 2. Increased stiffness of sling material 3. Surface abrasion in areas not normally in contact with the load. d. Proof-Testing Slings used in environments where they are subject to continuous exposure to ultra-violet light should be proof-tested to two times rated capacity annually, or more frequently depending on severity of exposure. 53 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

56 5.4 - INSPECTION Synthetic Web Slings TYPE OF INSPECTION a. INITIAL INSPECTION Before any new or repaired sling is placed in service, it shall be inspected to insure that the correct sling is being used, as well as to determine that the sling meets the requirements of this specification. b. FREQUENT INSPECTION This inspection should be made by the person handling the sling each time the sling is used. c. PERIODIC INSPECTION This inspection shall be conducted by designated personnel. Frequency of inspection should be based on: 1. Frequency of sling use 2. Severity of service conditions 3. Experience gained on the service life of slings used in similar applications 4. Periodic inspections should be conducted at least monthly POSSIBLE DEFECTS A sling shall be removed from service if any defects such as the following are visible: a. Acid or alkali burns b. Melting, charring, or weld spatter of any part of the sling c. Holes, tears, cuts, snags or embedded particles d. Broken or worn stitching in load bearing splices e. Excessive abrasive wear f. Knots in any part of the sling g. Distortion and excessive pitting or corrosion or broken fittings h. Other apparent defects which cause doubt as to the strength of the sling i. If sling rated capacity or sling material identification is missing or not readable INSPECTION RECORDS Written inspection records, utilizing the identification for each sling as established by the user, should be kept on file for all slings. These records should show a description of the new sling and its condition on each subsequent inspection REPAIR OF WEB SLINGS Slings shall be repaired only by a sling manufacturer. When repaired by other than the original manufacturer, the sling shall be permanently marked to identify the repair agent All repaired slings shall be proof-tested to two (2) times its newly assigned rated capacity, before being put back into service. Certification of proof-test should be provided Temporary repairs of either webbing, fittings, or stitching shall not be permitted. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

57 Polyester Ratchet Assembly 1" RATCHET STRAP WITH 800 RATCHET AND VINYL COATED S HOOKS Breaking Strength: 1,200 lbs. WLL: 1000 lbs. TIE " x 15' 2" RATCHET STRAP WITH FLAT HOOK Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs. WLL: 3,335 lbs. TIE " x 27' 2" RATCHET STRAP WITH WIRE HOOK Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs. WLL: 3,335 lbs. TIE " x 27' 4" WINCH STRAPS WITH FLAT HOOK Breaking Strength: 15,000 lbs WLL: 5,400 lbs. 427FH 4" x 27' 430FH 4" x 30' 55 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

58 Polyester Ratchet Assembly TRUCKER TIE DOWN AND LASHING EQUIPMENT RATCHET STRAPS Designed to handle most types of flatbed tie-down requirements. All straps have an 18" fixed end as standard, except for straps with and chain anchors which have a fixed end of 30". Special length fixed ends and alternate end hardware available through Hanes Supply. Labeled to meet CVSA guidelines, DOT regulations and WSTDA recommended standards. Custom fabricated to meet your requirements. Many hook/fitting options available to choose from. Bulk purchasing at special pricing also available. 2" RATCHET STRAPS W/804 WIDE HANDLE AND 2004 WEBBING 10,000 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH STRAP LENGTH (FT) END HARDWARE WLL TIE Flat Hook 3,335 lbs kgs Chain Anchor 3,335 lbs kgs. 27 TIE Wire Hook 3,335 lbs kgs. 3" RATCHET STRAPS W/806 LONG HANDLE AND 3004 WEBBING STRAP LENGTH (FT) STRAP LENGTH (FT) END HARDWARE Flat Hook END HARDWARE Chain Anchor 3704 Grab Hook 15,000 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH 16,200 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH 4" RATCHET STRAPS W/808 LONG HANDLE AND 4004 WEBBING STRAP LENGTH (FT) STRAP LENGTH (FT) END HARDWARE Flat Hook END HARDWARE 1016 Wire Hook WLL 5,000 LBS 2270 KGS WLL 5,400 LBS 2450 KGS 5,400 LBS 2450 KGS WLL 5,000 LBS 2270 KGS WLL 6,600 LBS 2995 KGS 15,000 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH 20,000 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

59 Load Binders! LOAD BINDER WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer s Guidelines. Use only if trained. Failure to use this load binder properly may result in serious injury or even death. Do not operate load binder while standing on the load. Move handle with caution. It may whip Keep body clear. Keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle. You must be familiar with state and federal regulations regarding size and number of chain systems required for securing loads on trucks. Always consider the safety of nearby workers as well as your self when using load binder. While under tension, load binder must not bear against any object. Do not throw these instructions away. Keep them close at hand & share them with any others who use this load binder. RATCHET TYPE LEVER SNUBBING TYPE LEVER RELEASING TYPE WARNING LEVER TYPE LEVER WALKING TYPE Mechanical Advantage Lever Type Binder = 25:1 Ratchet Type Binder = 50:1 Example: 100 pounds of effort applied to the binder results in the following force on the binder. Lever Type: 2500 (100 lbs. x 25) lbs. of force Ratchet Type: 5000 (100 lbs. x 50) lbs. of force INSTRUCTIONS - LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDERS Hook load binder to chain so you can operate it while standing on the ground. Position load binder so its handle can be pulled downward to tighten chain (see photo). Be aware of ice, snow, rain, oil, etc. that can affect your footing. Make certain your footing is secure. The Crosby Group LLC specifically recommends AGAINST the use of a handle extender (cheater pipe). If sufficient leverage cannot be obtained using the lever type load binder by itself, a ratchet type binder should be used. If the above recommendation is disregarded and a cheater pipe is used, it must closely fit the handle and must slide down the handle until the handle projections are contacted. The pipe should be secured to the handle, for example, by a pin, so that the pipe cannot fly off the handle if you lose control and let go. The increased leverage, by using a cheater pipe, can cause deformation and failure of the chain and load binder. During and after tightening chain, check load binder handle position. Be sure it is in the locked position and that its bottom side touches the chain link. Chain tension may decrease due to load shifting during transport. To be sure the load binder remains in proper position: Secure handle to chain by wrapping the loose end of chain around the handle and the tight chain, or tie handle to chain with soft wire. When releasing load binder, remember there is a great deal of energy in the stretched chain. This will cause the load binder handle to move very quickly with great force when it is unlatched. Move handle with caution. It may whip - Keep body clear. Never use a cheater pipe or handle extender to release handle. Use a steel bar and pry under the handle and stay out of the path of handle as it moves upward. If you release the handle by hand, use an open hand under the handle and push upward. Do not close your hand around the handle. Always keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle. INSTRUCTIONS - RATCHET LOAD BINDERS Position ratchet binder so it can be operated from the ground. Make sure your footing is secure. MAINTENANCE OF ALL LOAD BINDERS Routinely check load binders for wear, bending, cracks, nicks, or gouges. If visual wear bending or cracks are present -Do not use load binder. Routinely lubricate pivot and swivel points of Lever Binders, and pawl part and screw threads of Ratchet Binders to extend product life and reduce friction wear. 57 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

60 Load Binders STANDARD LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDERS L-150 Forged Steel Quenched & Tempered. Binder toggles away from the load. MODEL STOCK NO. STD. PKG. MIN-MAX CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT PROOF LOAD ULTIMATE LOAD WEIGHT EACH HANDLE LENGTH /16-3/ A /8-1/ C /2-5/ TAKE UP L-130 MIDGET LOAD BINDER Forged handle, hooks and swivel link. Steel swivels and clevis. Meets or exceeds requirements of US DOT FMCSA Part 393 Subpart I. MODEL L-130 STOCK NO MIN-MAX CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT ULTIMATE LOAD WEIGHT EACH TAKE UP W /16-1/ /8" LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDER Provides more control in binding and releasing without extra tools. Handle closes down away from load with more leverage. Hooks are heat treated steel. Functionally superior to any other on the road. Handles are drop forged from special bar quality steel. Single welded links as in binder chain for better reliability. More take-up for binding greater loads. Smaller handle slot with riveted nose to prevent spreading at the critical loading point. Meets DOT and CVSA requirements. CHAIN SIZE CHAIN GRADE WORKING LOAD LIMIT * PRODUCT CODE HANDLE LENGTH TAKE-UP WEIGHT 3/8 30, 43, 70, 80 7, /8 8-1/4 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

61 Load Binders STANDARD RATCHET TYPE LOAD BINDER Upgrade for use with Grade 7 Transport Chain - applies to R-7 only. Utilizes standard Crosby A-323 Alloy Eye Grab Hooks. New design one piece forged handle. Continuous take-up feature, gets the last half of chain. One piece assembly, no bolts or nuts to loosen. L-140 All load bearing or holding parts forged. Easy operating positive ratchet. Meets or exceeds requirements of US DOT FMCSA Part 393 Subpart I. MODEL STOCK NO. MIN-MAX CHAIN SIZE WLL PROOF LOAD WEIGHT EACH HANDLE LENGTH BARREL LENGTH R-7** /16-3/ R-A** /8-1/ R-C*** /2-5/ NOTE: Binders shown with Proof Load Pounds have been individually Proof Tested to these values shown, prior to shipment. *Ultimate Load is 3 times the Working Load Limit. **Matches the Working Load Limit of Grade 100 chain for both sizes. ***Matches the Working Load Limit of Grade 100 chain for 1/2" size. FORGED RATCHET TYPE LOAD BINDER Handle is designed loose using self-locking, one-way bolts allowing easy removal of unwanted debris such as mud, snow or ice Proof tested to 50% of minimum breaking strength Gears are permanently welded to the barrel Durable powder coat finish Design factor 4:1 (except & 48387, which are 3:1) STOCK NO. MIN-MAX CHAIN SIZE WLL WEIGHT EACH HANDLE LENGTH BARREL SIZE DIAM. X LENGTH TAKE UP /16-3/ /2 x /8-1/ /2 x /8-1/ /2 x 10 8 TAKE UP CLEVIS ASSEMBLY Hook on each end Meets all Department of Transportation (D.O.T.) requirements and is required in most states by the D.O.T. Chain won't degrade in ultra-violet light, as compared to nylon straps Available in 12, 14, 16, 18, 24 or 25ft as well as custom lengths Design factor 4:1 CHAIN SIZE SHORT LINK WLL PRODUCT CODE L (FT) WEIGHT 1/ / / / L 59 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

62 Chain Specifications CARBON CHAIN SPECIFICATIONS GRADE 30 PROOF COIL CHAIN Low carbon steel utility chain with a wide range of general purpose uses. Self-colored finish. Links embossed every 10" with date code and grade appearing alternately. Also available in Hot Galvanized or Bright Zinc finish. CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT NOMINAL INSIDE LINK DIMENSIONS WEIGHT PER 100 FT INCHES DECIMAL * LENGTH WIDTH 3/ / , / , / , / , / , / , / , GRADE 43 HIGH TEST CHAIN Made from a selected analysis carbon steel to provide higher tensile strength and working load limits, as well as better resistance to wear. Bright (polished) finish. Links embossed every 10" with date code and grade appearing alternately. Also available in Hot Galvanized or Bright Zinc finish. GRADE 70 TRANSPORT (BINDING) CHAIN Significantly higher tensile strength for all load binding and tie down applications, which permits you to hold a given load with the next smaller size chain than Grade 43. This increased strengthto-weight ratio means lower costs and a lighter chain, for easier storage and handling. Gold finish. Links embossed every 10" with date code and grade appearing alternately , ,069 1/ , / , / , / , / , / , / , / , , ,050 1/ , / , / , / , / , *WARNING! DO NOT EXCEED WORKING LOAD LIMIT. BINDER CHAIN ASSEMBLIES AVAILABLE IN GRADE 43, 70 & 80 AND A VARIETY OF SIZES AND LENGTHS See page 61 for additional Binding Chain information. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

63 Transport Chain (Binding Chain) GRADE 70 TRANSPORT (BINDING) CHAIN Do not use for overhead lifting High-carbon steel, heat treated Zinc plated with gold chromate finish Meets ASTM & NACM standards Meets FMCSA & CVSA requirements Thermal heat treated using advanced technology Heat treated for superior wear and toughness 100% proof tested Permanent identification on chain Full weld trim Chart Note: ** Standard Link Grade 70 Chain Design Factor 4:1 CHAIN SIZE NOMINAL CHAIN DIMENSIONS PER FOOT APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF LINKS PER DRUM FULL DRUM HALF DRUM PER PAIL WLL PRODUCT WEIGHT PRODUCT LENGTH PRODUCT LENGTH PRODUCT LENGTH A B C CODE CODE (FT) CODE (FT) CODE (FT) 1/4 3, /16 4, /16** 4, /8 6, /8** 6, /2 11, BINDING CHAIN SPECIFICATIONS This chart indicates the minimum number of chains required to secure loads in the forward direction (0.8g deceleration)* per federal Motor Carriers Safety Administration, DOT Regulations; per 49CFR, Part Paragraph *Refer to 49CFR, Parts 392 and 393, for North American Standard for Protection Against Falling & Shifting Cargo for complete regulations. CHAIN GRADE GRADE 30 PROOF COIL GRADE 43 HIGH TEST GRADE 70 TRANSPORT MIN # OF CHAINS REQUIRED TO SECURE LOADS IN FORWARD DIRECTION BY WEIGHT OF THE ARTICLE IN LBS (kn) WORKING SIZE LOAD LIMIT 5,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000 50,000 (kn) (22) (44) (67) (89) (111) (133) (156) (178) (200) (222) 5/16 1, /8 2, /16 3, /8 5, /4 3, /16 4, /8 6, /32 2, GRADE 80 ALLOY 9/32 3, /16 4, /8 7, GRADE 100 ALLOY 3/8 8, WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

64 CM Lever Hoists LEVER HOIST MODEL COMPARISON SERIES 602/603 Mini Ratchet Hoist The most compact and comfortable ratchet lever hoist in the market. Performs just like larger lever hoist models. THE BANDIT Ratchet Lever Hoist One of the most compact and durable ratchet lever hoists in the industry. Its lightweight and portable design, easy free-chaining feature and 360 rotating handle make a versatile hoist. SERIES 653 Lever Operated Hoist Features a short handle and minimal lever pull effort. High quality, rugged steel for close quarter pulling, stretching, and hoisting applications. Ideal for a wide array of applications in construction, industrial and plant operations. PULLER SERIES 640 Heavy-duty design for pulling, lifting, dragging, and stretching construction and industrial applications. Built for ease of use, ease of maintenance and long life. SHORT HANDLE PULLER Same heavy-duty design as the Puller in a smaller size for lighter loads and tighter spaces. SERIES 602/ 603 BANDIT SERIES 653 SERIES 640 SHORT HAND CAPACITY (TON) CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING 1/ / / / / FEATURES Load Limiter Optional Optional Optional Metal Housing Aluminum Housing 3 3 Free Chaining Weston Brake Standard Lifts (ft) 5, 10 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 20 Zinc-Plated Chain Self-Colored Chain 3 3 Metric Rated Warranty Lifetime Lifetime 5 Years Lifetime Lifetime WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

65 CM Hand Chain Hoists SERIES 622 The CM Series 622 Hand Chain Hoist features a simple, efficient and economical design. Its compact design, low headroom and lightweight steel construction makes this hoist easy to install, even in confined spaces. CYCLONE The CM Cyclone Hand Chain Hoist features superior engineering, efficiency and durability and is considered one of the most popular and reliable hand chain hoists ever designed. SERIES 622 CYCLONE CAPACITY (TON) CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING 1/ / / * 6* FEATURES Load Limiter 3 Metal Housing 3 Aluminum Housing 3 Weston Brake 3 3 Standard Lifts (ft) 10, 15, Low Headroom Option 3 Zinc Plate Hand Chain 622 CYCLONE Zinc Plate Load Chain Self-Colored Hand Chain 3 3 Self-Colored Load Chain 3 3 Configurator Quoted 3 Domestic Hoist 3 Warranty 1 Year Lifetime Metric Ton Rated WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

66 360º Hoists TORNADO 360 Redefining lever-operated hoists, the CM Tornado 360 features the revolutionary Sidewinder lever handle that allows for efficient operation in both lifting and pulling applications. Ergonomically designed for increased safety, the patent-pending CM Tornado 360 lets the operator work up to 12 times faster and with as much as 30% less pull force than with conventional ratchet lever tools. HURRICANE 360 The CM Hurricane 360º features a full cycle of flexibility for a wide range of lifting and pulling applications. A unique hand chain hoist by any comparison in the market, the CM Hurricane 360º provides maximum versatility and safety on any job site. The patented hand chain cover rotates a full 360 degrees to allow loads to be lifted, pulled, or positioned from virtually any angle. TORNADO 360 HURRICANE 360 TORNADO 360 HURRICANE 360 CAPACITY (TON) CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING 1/4 1/ / / FEATURES Load Limiter Optional 3 Metal Housing 3 Aluminum Housing 3 Free Chaining 3 Weston Brake 3 3 Standard Lifts (ft) 5, 10, 15, 20 10, 15, 20 Low Headroom Option Standard Chain Gold Chromate Zinc Plated Configurator Quoted 3 Domestic Hoist Warranty Lifetime Lifetime Metric Ton Rated 3 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

67 CM Lodestar CAPACITIES 1/8 to 3 Ton LIFT 10 feet standard VOLTAGES Available on 3-phase, 460 volt and 230 volt models For versatility and ultimate control, choose the CM Lodestar electric chain hoist equipped with an under-the-cover Variable Frequency Drive. KEY BENEFITS 3-STEP INFINITELY VARIABLE CONTROL STANDARD Provides acceleration and deceleration for full load control and precise positioning. SOFT STARTS Increase the life of gear train components, load chain, hooks and brake components. ELECTRONIC REVERSING Eliminates the need for magnetic contactor and speed relay controls. MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM SPEED SETTINGS With the ability to choose intermediate speeds during operation without timely programming or upgrades. 115 VOLT INTERFACE CARD STANDARD Allows for integration into existing bridge and crane systems without upgrades or modifications to the hoist VFD controls. STANDARD FEATURES 6:1 SPEED RATIO FAULT HISTORY PHASE LOSS PROTECTION VFD PROGRAMMABLE To customer s exact voltage requirements. SPECIFICATIONS MOTOR THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION ADJUSTABLE RAMP TIME AND SPEEDS 3 second ramp time between minimum and maximum speed setting. 3-STEP ROBUST NEMA 4X CONTROL STATION RATED CAPACITY STANDARD LIFT SPEED (FPM) PRODUCT CODE (TONS) LIFT (FT) MINIMUM MAXIMUM MOTOR HP MODEL REEVING / /4 A NH 2710NH 1/ /4 B NH 2729NH /2 C NH 2736NH /2 F NH 2731NH 1/ J NH 3636NH JJ NH 3643NH L NH 3626NH LL NH 3645NH R NH 3633NH RR NH 3647NH RT NH 9534NH RRT NH 9540NH 65 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

68 Harrington Lever Hoists LB LEVER MANUAL HOISTS Harrington's LB lever hoists combine easy operation with a compact, low headroom design that easily handles real-world demands. These hoists can be used horizontally, vertically, inverted or at any other load angle and have the strength to get the job done. Capacities 3/4 Ton through 9 Ton Compact design makes it a perfect fit for use in tight quarters Steel body is more durable yet lighter in weight than die cast aluminum models Revolutionary freewheeling offers one handed operation 360 degree handle rotation and pivot & swivel top hook for easy rigging CAP (TONS) PRODUCT CODE HEAD- ROOM C STANDARD LIFT (FT) PULL TO LIFT LOAD LOAD CHAIN DIA (MM) x CHAIN FALL LINES NET WEIGHT SHIPPING WEIGHT APPROX 13 WEIGHT FOR ADD L 1' OF LIFT 3/4 LB X LB /2 LB X LB /4 LB X LB X LB X LB X LX LEVER MANUAL HOISTS Harrington's LX lever pullers are ultra lightweight and compact yet extremely durable. Known as the perfect toolbox hoists, these little hoists have all the power you need to get the job done. Revolutionary 1/2 Ton model is the only 1/2 Ton toolbox sized puller in the industry. Capacities 1/4 Ton and 1/2 Ton Compact, low headroom design makes it a perfect tool for use in tight quarters Low pulling force required for ease of use Effortless to transport, install & store Free-chain adjusting mechanism for quick adjustments Rugged die-cast aluminum body with steel frame CAP (TONS) PRODUCT CODE HEAD- ROOM C STANDARD LIFT (FT) PULL TO LIFT LOAD LOAD CHAIN DIA (MM) x CHAIN FALL LINES NET WEIGHT SHIPPING WEIGHT APPROX WEIGHT FOR ADD L 1' OF LIFT 1/4 LX X /2 LX X WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

69 Harrington Hand Chain Hoists CF HAND CHAIN HOISTS Harrington's CF hand chain hoists were designed for portability and durability. These hoists are the economical and practical choice for efficient, trouble-free service. The CF model is a long-lasting construction grade hoist that offers the best value in a hand chain hoist. Capacities 1/2 Ton through 5 Ton Rugged die-cast aluminum body provides exceptional strength Pre-lubricated sealed ball bearings for long life and low maintenance Weston-style load brakes for positive braking action Designed with fewer parts to simplify maintenance CAP (TONS) PRODUCT CODE HEAD- ROOM C STANDARD LIFT (FT) PULL TO LIFT LOAD OVERHAUL RATIO CB HAND CHAIN HOISTS LOAD CHAIN DIA (MM) x CHAIN FALL LINES Harrington's CB hand chain hoists combine heavy duty construction with top-of-the-line internal components for the most demanding industrial applications. These hoists are built to withstand rugged, day-in, day-out use and they are easily maintained and repairable making them the perfect hoist for a long-lasting fleet of industrial products. Capacities 1/2 Ton through 100 Ton All-steel construction for extreme durability Low headroom and lightweight design for ease of use Slip clutch prevents lifting damaging loads beyond rated capacity Limited number of parts simplifies and reduces maintenance 67 NET WEIGHT SHIPPING WEIGHT APPROX WEIGHT FOR ADD L 1' OF LIFT 1/2 CF x CF x /2 CF x CF x CF x CF x CAP (TONS) PRODUCT CODE HEAD- ROOM STANDARD LIFT (FT) PULL TO LIFT LOAD OVERHAUL RATIO LOAD CHAIN DIA (MM) x CHAIN FALL LINES NET WEIGHT SHIPPING WEIGHT APPROX WEIGHT FOR ADD L 1' OF LIFT 1/2 CB x CB x /2 CB x CB x /2 CB x CB x CB x CB x CB x CB x CB x x x CB x x x 2 40 CB x x CB x x x CB x x x CB x x x WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

70 Harrington Electric Chain Hoists SNER ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS Harrington's SNER electric chain hoists are built for extreme duty applications that require single phase power. A hoist with a 60 minute, H4 duty rated motor is revolutionary and unmatched in a single phase offering. Maintenance friendly features include a unique chain guide, hinged control panel, sealed housing and durable load sheave. For beam travel requirements couple with SMR motorized, PT manual push and GT manual geared trolleys. SNER, SNERM, SNERP, SNERG capacities 1/4 Ton through 3 Ton 60 minute, H4 rated, fan cooled motor for the most demanding applications Pull-rotor electric brake is self-adjusting and virtually maintenance-free Ability to accommodate very long lifts Compact, low headroom design Completely sealed body suitable for harsh indoor or outdoor environments - IP55 rated CAP (TONS) PRODUCT CODE HEADROOM C STD LIFT (FT) PUSH BUTTON CORD L (FT) LIFTING SPEED (FT/MIN) 14 OUTPUT (Hp) LIFTING MOTOR 1 PHASE 60 Hz LOAD CHAIN RATED CURRENT DIA (MM) X CHAIN FALL LINES NET WEIGHT WEIGHT FOR ADD L 1' OF (AMPS) 1/4 SNER003S x /2 SNER005L x /2 SNER005S x SNER010L x SNER010S x SNER020L x SNER030C x HARRINGTON ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS Easy Access Suspension Dual Speed VFD Pendant Controls Unique Chain Guide Harrington electric hoists can be customized to various specifications. Standard Count Hour Meter The Guardian Smart Brake Technology Notched Nook & Latch System WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

71 Cordage Information Select the Correct Size A rope too small may fail quickly, one too large will prove expensive. Don't work any rope above one-fifth of its breaking strength. Avoid Overloads Safe working load ranges for any new rope is between 1/5 and 1/12 of its minimum tensile. Make enough allowances for safety if your rope is old or worn. Ignoring this safety factor causes early rope replacement and is dangerous to men and materials. Keep Away from Chemicals Acids & Alkalis are injurious to rope. If exposed, wash thoroughly and inspect before using. Watch for battery and building cleaning acids, caustic soda and paint. Keep rats away. Stop Unnecessary Wear Outer and inner rope fibers contribute equally to the strength of your rope. If worn out, the rope is naturally weakened. Eliminate rubbing, dragging or working over rough surfaces. Protect its surface with chafing gear, such as canvas wrapped and tied around the rope. Pad corners of sharp objects when lifting, and avoid strain on sharp bends. Remove kinks if they form. To Uncoil Rope A new coil of rope should be placed flat on its side with the "tag" inside end down. Remove the outside lashings and unfasten the inside bands. Leave burlap around the coil to keep rope clean. Reach down through the eye of coil and pull out the inside end, where tag is attached, through the eye of the coil. Store it Properly Keep in dry, cool place with good air circulation. Use wooden grating on concrete or steel floors, and keep away from steam pipes and metal walls. Protect from prolonged exposure to sunlight. Store only clean, dry rope. Use Right Sheaves Block sizes or sheaves should be eight times the diameter of the rope. For power transmission or for use with continuous load, sheaves should be at least forty times the diameter of the rope. Small sheaves cause added friction and rope wear. Keep sheaves smooth. Watch Rope Condition Inspect rope frequently, whether working or in storage. Occasionally reverse your rope, end-to-end, to distribute the wear more evenly. Use worn rope only where strength failure will not cause injury or damage. *All ropes will last longer if given proper care and handling, storage and use. These are the more important points to keep in mind to assure greatest service and safety. 69 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

72 ROPE CONSTRUCTION SELECTION GUIDE* Cordage Information CHARACTERISTICS SOLID BRAID HOLLOW BRAID DOUBLE BRAID DIAMOND BRAID TWISTED No. of Strands or Carriers 9, 12 or 18 8, 12 or 16 16, 24 or 32 8 or 16 3 Spliceable No Yes Yes No Yes Strength to Weight Flexibility Flattens Under Load No Yes No Yes No Rotates Under Load No No No No Yes Mechanical Elongation Cost Per Size Working Load (as a % of Tensile) 15-20% 15-20% 15-20% 15-20% 8-14% Abrasion Resistance WARNING: This guide is designed for general reference only. The construction comparisons assume using the same rope fiber and size. Expert advice should be sought when choosing a rope where protection of life or property is involved. Top View Top View Top View Top View Top View Solid or Single Braid This construction leaves a void in the center and utilizes strand counts of eight, 12 or 16. The hollow is instrumental in making it easy to splice. Hollow braids are nonrotating and are an extremely efficient way to utilize fiber. Plaited or Hollow Rope Eight-strand Square Braid is comprised of eight individual strands, which are woven together as four pairs. Its major advantages are non-rotation & high energy absorption. Double Braid This is really two separate ropes in one: the core, which is a single braid, is over-braided with a sleeve. This construction allows the rope to be used for more applications; the same or dissimilar fibers can be engineered into a rope suited to any of many specific applications. This construction entirely shields one of the two elements in the rope from abrasion. Three-Strand or Twisted The simplest type of rope is formed by twisting fiber into a strand, and then twisting three strands into rope. Its conversion efficiency is relatively low since this construction technique is the hardest on fiber. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

73 Cordage Information ROPE FIBER SELECTION GUIDE: FIBER PROPERTIES - TYPICAL VALUES STRENGTH: Breaking Tenacity Dry (grams/denier) Wet Strength vs. Dry Strength Shock-load Absorption Ability WEIGHT: Specific Gravity Floats ELONGATION: Percent of Break Creep (ext. under sustained load) EFFECTS OF MOISTURE: Water Absorp. of Indiv. Fibers Dielectric Properties DEGRADATION: Resistance to UV Sunlight Resistance to Rot Mildew Storage Requirements THERMAL PROPERTIES: Melts at RESISTANCE 3 : Resistance to Acids Resistance to Alkalis Resistance to Oils & Gas MANILA SISAL COTTON NYLON POLYESTER Up to 120% Poor 1.38 No 10-12% Very Low Up to 100% Very Poor Good Poor Dry Only Does Not Melt Chars at 350 Poor Poor Poor Up to 120% Poor 1.38 No 10-12% Very Low Up to 100% Very Poor Good Poor Dry Only Does Not Melt Chars at 350 Poor Poor Fair Up to 120% Very Poor 1.54 No 5-12% Very Low Up to 100% Very Poor Good Poor Dry Only % Excellent 1.14 No 18-25% Moderate 2-8% Poor Good Excellent Wet or Dry % Good 1.38 No 12-15% Low <1% Good Excellent Excellent Wet or Dry Does Not Melt Chars at Poor Fair Poor Fair Very Good Very Good Good Fair Very Good STRENGTH: Breaking Tenacity Dry (grams/denier) Wet Strength vs. Dry Strength Shock-load Absorption Ability WEIGHT: Specific Gravity Floats ELONGATION: Percent of Break Creep (ext. under sustained load) EFFECTS OF MOISTURE: Water Absorp. of Indiv. Fibers Dielectric Properties DEGRADATION: Resistance to UV Sunlight Resistance to Rot Mildew Storage Requirements POLYPROPYLENE POLYETHENE KEVLAR 1 SPECTRA % Very Good 0.91 Yes 15-25% High None Excellent Poor* Excellent Wet or Dry % Fair 0.95 Yes 15-25% High None Excellent Fair* Excellent Wet or Dry THERMAL PROPERTIES: Melts at RESISTANCE 3 : Resistance to Acids Resistance to Alkalis Resistance to Oils & Gas Excellent Excellent Very Good Excellent Excellent Very Good * Black is best 1 - Based on Dupont Kevlar Data 2 - Based on Allied/Signa; Spectra Data - Type Resistance is relative to the length of exposure, percent of concentration & temperature % Poor 1.44 No % Very Low % Poor Fair Excellent Wet or Dry % Fair 0.97 Yes 3.5% Moderate None Excellent Fair Excellent Wet or Dry 800 Begins to Decompose 297 Fair Fair Very Good Excellent Excellent Very Good 71 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

74 Twisted Ropes Four stage construction High strength and elasticity Medium-Soft Lay Color: Natural White NYLON ROPE DIAMETER SIZE NO NOMINAL DIA DEC EQUIV. STANDARD TENSILE MINIMUM TENSILE UNITS -SPOOL- (FT) RWL 5:1-12:1 APPROX. DENSITY (LBS/100 ) 1/4 3/ ,650 1, / ,550 2, /8 1-1/ ,750 3, /2 1-1/ ,400 5, , / ,000 9, , /4 2-1/ ,200 12, ,560-1, /8 2-3/ ,000 18, ,600-1, ,000 22, ,520-1, /8 3-1/ ,000 28, ,760-2, /4 3-3/ ,500 33, ,760-2, /2 4-1/ ,000 47, ,560-3, / ,000 58, ,700-4, ,000 83, ,600-6, / , , ,600-9, /2 7-1/ , , ,200-10, / , , ,200-12, , , ,000-15, , , ,800-27, POLYESTER ROPE Continuous multifilament yarn Good abrasion resistance Low stretch Color: Natural White Excellent UV resistance DIAMETER SIZE NO NOMINAL DIA DEC EQUIV. STANDARD TENSILE MINIMUM TENSILE UNITS -SPOOL- (FT) RWL 5:1-12:1 APPROX. DENSITY (LBS/100 ) 3/8 1-1/ ,750 3, /16 1-1/ ,000 4, /2 1-1/ ,400 5, , / ,550 8, , /4 2-1/ ,500 11, , /8 2-3/ ,000 15, ,050-1, ,000 19, ,960-1, /8 3-1/ ,550 24, ,960-2, /4 3-3/ ,200 29, ,960-2, /2 4-1/ ,800 42, ,440-3, / ,500 50, ,000-4, ,000 72, ,400-6, / ,500 90, ,100-7, /2 7-1/ , , ,000-9, / , , ,600-10, , , ,400-13, WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

75 Twisted & Solid Braid Ropes Traditional three-strand rope Subject to rot Holds knots well Color: Tan Absorbs water NOMINAL DIAMETER UNITS -SPOOL- (FT) MANILA TENSILE STRENGTH RWL APPROX. WT. PER COIL 3/ / / / / / , / , / , / , / , / , / , / , / , / , / , , , , / , / , , SOLID BRAID ROPES Solid braid ropes are constructed of various bundles of fiber interlocked together in a circular braiding pattern PROLINE MULTIFILAMENT POLY Inexpensive Flexible Floats Holds knots well Color: Natural White DIAMETER SIZE NO NOMINAL DIA DEC EQUIV. STANDARD TENSILE MINIMUM TENSILE UNITS -REEL- (FT) RWL 5:1-12:1 APPROX. DENSITY (LBS/100 ) 1/ / / / ,400 1, / ,200 1, WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

76 NYLON Color: Natural White Good general purpose cord Good UV resistance Works well in pulleys Strong DIAMETER SIZE NO NOMINAL DIA DEC EQUIV. STANDARD TENSILE Solid & Double Braid Ropes MINIMUM TENSILE UNITS -REEL- (FT) RWL 5:1-12:1 DOUBLE BRAID ROPES Double braid ropes are actually two ropes in one and are sometimes called braid on braid ropes. The jacket is braided over a braided core. NYLON Gold Braid Brand Spliceable Resists abrasion & snagging Color: White & Gold Excellent shock absorbing elasticity Torque-free APPROX. DENSITY (LBS/100 ) 3/ /64 3-1/ / / / / ,300 1, / ,950 1, / ,750 2, / ,200 3, DIAMETER SIZE NO NOMINAL DIA DEC EQUIV. STANDARD TENSILE MINIMUM TENSILE UNITS -REEL- (FT) RWL 5:1-12:1 APPROX. DENSITY (LBS/100 ) 1/4 3/ ,850 1, / ,850 2, /8 1-1/ ,100 3, /2 1-1/ ,275 6, , / ,300 10, , /4 2-1/ ,300 14, ,940-1, /8 2-3/ ,100 19, ,980-1, ,900 26, ,200-2, Rhino Flex Brand Good dielectric properties Resistant to ultraviolet degradation POLYESTER Low stretch, high stretch Torque-free Color: White w/gold Tracer DIAMETER SIZE NO NOMINAL DIA DEC EQUIV. STANDARD TENSILE MINIMUM TENSILE UNITS -REEL- (FT) RWL 5:1-12:1 APPROX. DENSITY (LBS/100 ) 1/4 3/ ,500 2, /8 1-1/ ,085 5, , /2 1-1/ ,900 8, , / ,000 13, ,700-1, /4 2-1/ ,000 18, ,780-1, /8 2-3/ ,000 25, ,040-2, ,200 33, ,696-2, /8 3-1/ ,400 41, ,352-3, /4 3-3/ ,000 48, ,720-4, /2 4-1/ ,000 68, ,680-5, / ,000 79, ,840-6, WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

77 Rope Specifications ROPE SPECIFICATIONS THREE STRAND AND EIGHT STRAND STANDARD LAY ROPES POLYPRO NYLON POLYESTER MANILA DIA. CIR. LBS. PER 100' FEET PER LB. BRK. STGTH. LBS. PER 100' FEET PER LB. BRK. STGTH. LBS. PER 100' FEET PER LB BRK. STGTH. (LBS.) LBS. PER 100' FEET PER LB. BRK. STGTH. 3/16 5/ , /4 3/ , , , / , , , ,000 3/8 1-1/ , , , ,350 7/16 1-1/ , , , ,750 1/2 1-1/ , , , ,650 5/ , , , ,400 3/4 2-1/ , , , ,400 7/8 2-3/ , , , , , , , , /8 3-1/ , , , , /4 3-3/ , , , , / , , , /2 4-1/ , , , , / , , , , /4 5-1/ , , , , , , , , /8 6-1/ , , , , / , , , , /2 7-1/ , , , , / , , , , /8 8-1/ , , , , , , , , / , , , , / , , , , , , , , WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

78 Yale Rope ULTREX PLUS ROPE Ultrex Plus is a double braid of Ultra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene, treated with Maxijacket coating for enhanced toughness. Sleeved with high tenacity polyester, Ultrex Plus is spliceable utilizing conventional high modulus splice techniques, or the new Yale tuck splice, which shortens the bury portion and minimizes the length of the larger diameter associated with a bury type splice. All strengths shown are for spliced line. DIAMETER AVERAGE SPLICED BREAK STRENGTH* MINIMUM SPLICED BREAK STRENGTH* MAXIMUM** WORK LOAD 5:1 WEIGHT (LBS/100FT) 1/4 6,000 5,400 1, /16 9,500 8,550 1, /8 12,700 11,430 2, /16 15,300 13,770 3, /2 22,000 19,800 4, /16 27,800 25,020 5, /8 33,000 29,700 6, /4 45,000 40,500 9, /8 60,000 54,000 12, ,000 67,500 15, /8 98,000 88,200 19, /4 120, ,000 24, /16 148, ,200 29, /2 172, ,800 34, /8 184, ,600 36, /4 230, ,000 46, , ,500 57, *Knots and abrupt bends significantly reduce the strength of all ropes and lowers maximum working load. **Working load is based on static or moderately dynamic lifting/pulling operations. Instantaneous changes in load up or down, in excess of 10% of the rope's rated working load constitutes hazardous shock load and would void normal working load recommendation. Consult Yale Cordage for guidelines for working loads and safe use of rope. PE-12 ROPE PE-12 has been recently re-engineered boosting its strengths significantly. Using the same high tenacity fiber we use in our value packed Portland Braid, this high tenacity polyester single braid offers a single end per carrier construction which keeps the rope from flattening out in service and self centers in sheaves beautifully. PE-12 comes with the same tough grades of Maxijacket urethane we use on our more expensive products. PE-12 is easy to splice and field repairs are easily accomplished. It is available in unlimited lengths and brilliant colors for easy identification. PE-12 is torque free and is undamaged when rigging with swivels. DIAMETER AVERAGE SPLICED BREAK STRENGTH* MINIMUM SPLICED BREAK STRENGTH* MAXIMUM** WORK LOAD 5:1 WEIGHT (LBS/100FT) 5/16 3,900 3, /8 5,900 5,310 1, /16 9,800 8,820 1, /2 12,500 11,250 2, /16 15,800 14,220 3, /8 18,500 16,650 3, /4 23,250 20,925 4, /8 34,350 30,915 6, ,600 37,440 8, *Knots and abrupt bends significantly reduce the strength of all ropes and lowers maximum working load. **Working load is based on static or moderately dynamic lifting/pulling operations. Instantaneous changes in load up or down, in excess of 10% of the rope's rated working load constitutes hazardous shock load and would void normal working load recommendation. Consult Yale Cordage for guidelines for working loads and safe use of rope. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

79 Yale Rope HY-DEE BRAIT ROPE Hy-Dee is an 8-strand bi-polymer rope with extraordinary dielectric properties. The rope is nubby which provides excellent grip, and treated with a proprietary chemical mixture Yale calls Aralube-dielectric. This treatment is the key to Hy-Dee Brait's wet dielectric performance and allows us to make the highest dielectric strength rope commercially available. Easy to splice with a tucking procedure or by the quick splice method illustrated. Hy-Dee Brait meets ASTM which calls for a maximum leakage of 250 micro amperes at any time during the wet test. Elec trodes are 1 foot apart, shielded and the test is conducted at 50KV-AC. This product is 100% lot tested for dielectric conformance. DIAMETER AVERAGE SPLICED BREAK STRENGTH* MINIMUM SPLICED BREAK STRENGTH* MAXIMUM** WORK LOAD 5:1 WEIGHT (LBS/100FT) 3/8 3,200 2, /16 4,900 4, /2 5,600 5, /16 7,000 6, /8 8,500 7,650 1, /4 11,000 9,900 1, *Knots and abrupt bends significantly reduce the strength of all ropes and lowers maximum working load. **Working load is based on static or moderately dynamic lifting/pulling operations. Instantaneous changes in load up or down, in excess of 10% of the rope's rated working load constitutes hazardous shock load and would void normal working load recommendation. Consult Yale Cordage for guidelines for working loads and safe use of rope. UNITREX XS ROPE Unitrex XS Max Wear is Uniline's high tech cousin, which is a parallel cored rope of Honeywell's Spectra, wrapped with a Neoprene tape and over braided with a tough jacket of high tenacity polyester. The result is a synthetic cable, somewhat stiffer than your usual rope, which is much like wire in its stretch characteristics. Unlike wire it is much lighter and easily handled. Due to its tough ness we are comfortable assigning it a higher working load rating which is 25% of its break ing strength. Unitrex XS Max Wear has high strength retention in service which is supported by field studies and our long standing track record with Uniline polyester. Unitrex's tough rubber layer protects its high modulus Spectra core and the outer jacket is saturated with Urethane making it the toughest UHMPE rope you can buy. All Yale's parallel core ropes are torque free, with bonded cores preventing contamination of the internal strength member. DIAMETER AVERAGE SPLICED BREAK STRENGTH* 77 MINIMUM SPLICED BREAK STRENGTH* MAXIMUM** WORK LOAD 5:1 WEIGHT (LBS/100FT) ,000 18,000 5, ,000 23,400 6, ,000 30,600 8, ,500 38,250 10, ,500 45,450 12, ,500 66,150 18, ,000 90,000 25, , ,500 31, , ,200 39, , ,500 48, , ,600 66, , ,000 77, , ,000 90, , , , *Knots and abrupt bends significantly reduce the strength of all ropes and lowers maximum working load. **Working load is based on static or moderately dynamic lifting/pulling operations. Instantaneous changes in load up or down, in excess of 10% of the rope's rated working load constitutes hazardous shock load and would void normal working load recommendation. Consult Yale Cordage for guidelines for working loads and safe use of rope. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

80 Amsteel Rope AMSTEEL Highly abrasion resistant Nonrotational Samthane coated Highly flex-fatigue resistant Made with Dyneema and lnnegra fiber Lightweight Wire rope replacement SIZE DIAMETER SIZE CIRC. WEIGHT PER 100 FT. SAMSON AVG. STRENGTH* SAMSON MBS* 1/4 3/ ,400 6,700 5/ ,500 9,500 3/8 1-1/ ,500 14,000 7/16 1-1/ ,000 16,200 1/2 1-1/ ,500 24,800 9/16 1-3/ ,000 30,600 5/ ,700 36,600 3/4 2-1/ ,000 46,800 13/16 2-1/ ,000 54,900 7/8 2-3/ ,000 66, ,000 81, /16 3-1/ ,000 90, /8 3-1/ ,000 99, /4 3-3/ , , / , , /2 4-1/ , ,000 AMSTEEL BLUE Made with 100% Dyneema fiber Samthane coated Maximum strength-to weight ratio Highly flex-fatigue resistant Highly abrasion resistant Nonrotational 117th the weight of wire Same elongation as wire Wire rope replacement SIZE DIAMETER SIZE CIRC. WEIGHT PER 100 FT. SAMSON AVG. STRENGTH* SAMSON MBS* 7/64 5/ ,600 1,400 1/8 3/ ,500 2,300 5/32 15/ ,000 3,600 1/4 3/ ,600 7,700 5/ ,700 12,300 3/8 1-1/ ,600 17,600 7/16 1-1/ ,900 21,500 1/2 1-1/ ,000 30,600 9/16 1-3/ ,500 36,500 5/ ,800 47,500 3/4 2-1/ ,400 58,000 7/8 2-3/ ,800 81, ,000 98, /16 3-1/ , , /8 3-1/ , , /4 3-3/ , , / , , /8 4-1/ , , /2 4-1/ , ,000 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

81 Samson Rope TENEX (826) ROPE Tenex is a 12-strand single braid that offers high strength with low stretch and outstanding abrasion resistance. It is Samthane coated to provide abrasion resistance, enhance wear life, snag resistance, and increase ease of splicing. It is a viable alternative to using double braids when easy field splicing and economy are major considerations. APPLICATIONS Lifting Sling / Utility Other Fishing Line Prusiks and Tails Pulling / Stringing Line Purse Seine Line FEATURES AND BENEFITS Available in long lengths Excellent snag resistance Easy to inspect Firm construction Easy to splice High strength per diameter Economical High strength-to-weight ratio Excellent abrasion resistance Samthane coated DIAMETER CIRCUMFERENCE WEIGHT (LBS/100FT) AVERAGE STRENGTH MINIMUM STRENGTH 3/16 9/ ,800 1,600 1/4 3/ ,200 2,900 5/ ,700 4,200 3/8 1-1/ ,800 5,200 7/16 1-1/ ,000 8,100 1/2 1-1/2 8 11,800 10,600 9/16 1-3/ ,000 13,500 5/ ,100 15,400 3/4 2-1/ ,400 20,200 7/8 2-3/ ,600 29, ,700 38, /8 3-1/ ,000 45, /4 3-3/ ,200 51, / ,500 62, /2 4-1/ ,700 73, / ,000 84, /4 5-1/ ,000 98, /2 7-1/ , ,000 Specifications are for spliced strengths. 79 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

82 HAND LINE Rope Selection Utility structures, linemen, and Samson ropes are a natural fit. Our strong, durable hand lines stand up to rigorous bending through blocks, yet are still easy on the hands. Excellent grip helps prevent slips, and allows for quick and efficient lifts. Available in an economical 3-strand or non-rotational 12-strand constructions, these ropes bring the quality and dependability Samson is known for to the worksite. HAND LINE PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION FIBER (CORE/COVER) DURA-PLEX - Coated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend DURA-PLEX - Uncoated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend PRO-MASTER (WHITE) 3-Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin-Polyester Blend PRO-SET-3 3-Strand Nylon QUIK-SPLICE 12-Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin SSR Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin-Polyester Blend SSR Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin-Polyester Blend STABLE BRAID - Coated Double Braid Polyester / Polyester STABLE BRAID - Uncoated Double Braid Polyester / Polyester STABLE BRAID BLACK Double Braid Polyester / Polyester ULTRA BLUE-3 3-Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin PULLING & STRINGING LINE The athletes of the utility industry - strong enough to tackle the heaviest loads, yet light enough to be dependably handled by man or machine. Long and strong, they also withstand miles of use and abuse and keep on working to get the job done. The right rope makes quick work of handling conductors, whether they're aerial or underground. Whether it's the economy of traditional fibers like polyester or the high performance of Dyneema, Samson sets the standard in pulling and stringing lines for the utility industry. PULLING/ STRINGING LINE PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION FIBER (CORE/COVER) AMSTEEL 12-Strand Dyneema AMSTEEL II - Coated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema - MFP Blend / Polyester AMSTEEL II PLUS - Coated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema / Polyester AMSTEEL II PLUS - Uncoated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema / Polyester AMSTEEL -BLUE 12-Strand Dyneema DURA-PLEX - Coated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend DURA-PLEX - Uncoated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend ML Strand Dyneema QUIK-SPLICE 12-Strand Ultra Blue Polyolefin STABLE BRAID - Coated Double Braid Polyester / Polyester STABLE BRAID - Uncoated Double Braid Polyester / Polyester STABLE BRAID BLACK Double Braid Polyester / Polyester TENEX 12-Strand Polyester WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

83 Rope Selection WINCH LINE Lifting or shifting dead weight loads calls for lines that have the strength to perform, and the resistance to bend fatigue needed to get the work to be done. Firm constructions that work well on winch drums, enhance lifting capacity, and have the durability for long-lasting performance all typify Samson s range of winch lines. Available in single braid or double-braid constructions, and in several different fibers that allow you to regulate the length, diameter and strength of the winch line to suit your application. PULLING/ STRINGING LINE PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION FIBER (CORE/COVER) AMSTEEL 12-Strand Dyneema AMSTEEL II - Coated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema - MFP Blend / Polyester AMSTEEL II - Uncoated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema - MFP Blend / Polyester AMSTEEL II PLUS - Coated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema / Polyester AMSTEEL II PLUS - Uncoated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema / Polyester AMSTEEL -BLUE 12-Strand Dyneema ML Strand Dyneema NYSTRON - Coated Double Braid Nylon / Polyester NYSTRON - Uncoated Double Braid Nylon / Polyester QUANTUM Strand Dyneema -Polyester Blend STABLE BRAID - Coated Double Braid Polyester / Polyester STABLE BRAID - Uncoated Double Braid Polyester / Polyester STABLE BRAID BLACK Double Braid Polyester / Polyester TURBO-RC Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema / Dyneema VALIDATOR II Core Dependent Double Braid Vectran / Polyester ROPE SELECTION SELECT THE RIGHT ROPE FOR THE JOB Selecting a rope involves evaluating a combination of factors. Some of these factors are straight forward like comparing rope specifications. Others are not easily quantified, like color preference or how a rope feels in your hand. Cutting corners, reducing sizes, or strengths on an initial purchase creates unnecessary replacements, potentially dangerous conditions, and increases long-term costs. Fiber and construction being equal, a larger rope outlasts a smaller rope because of the greater surface wear distribution. Similarly, a stronger rope outlasts a weaker one because it will be used at a lower percentage of its break strength with less chance of being overstressed. The following areas should be considered in your rope selection. STRENGTH When given a choice between ropes, select the strongest of any given size. A load of 200 pounds represents 2% of the strength of a rope with a breaking strength of 10,000 pounds. The same load represents 4% of the strength of a rope that has a breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. The weaker rope is having to work harder and as a result will have to be retired sooner. Braided ropes are stronger than twisted ropes of the same size and fiber type. Note carefully the quoted breaking strengths of the various Samson products. These are average breaking strengths. Published breaking strengths are determined by standard cordage testing and do not cover conditions such as sustained loads or shock loading. These strengths are attained under laboratory conditions. Remember also, that this is a breaking strength-not a recommended working load. ELONGATION It is well accepted that ropes with lower elongation under load will give you better load control-a big help at complicated job sites. However, ropes with lower elongation that are shock loaded, like a lowering line, can fail without warning even though it appears to be in good shape. Low elongating ropes should be selected with the highest possible strength. Both twisted ropes and braided ropes are suitable for rigging. Twisted rope has lower strength and more stretch. Braided rope has higher strength and lower stretch. 81 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

84 Rope Selection SHOCK LOADING Working loads as described herein are not applicable when rope has been subjected to shock loading. Whenever a load is picked up, stopped, moved, or swung there is an increased force caused by the dynamic nature of the movement. The force increases as these actions occur more rapidly or suddenly, which is known as shock loading. Examples of applications where shock loading occurs include ropes used as a tow line, picking up a load on a slack line, or using rope to stop a falling object. In extreme cases, the force put on the rope may be two, three, or more times the normal load involved. Shock-loading effects are greater on a low elongation rope such as polyester than on a high-elongation rope such as nylon, and greater on a short rope than on a long one. For example, the shock load on a winch line that occurs when a 5,000-lb object is lifted vertically with a sudden jerk may weigh 30,000 lb under the dynamic force. If the winch line is rated in the 30,000-lb break-strength range, it is very likely to break. Where shock loads, sustained loads, or where life, limb, or valuable property is involved, it is recommended that an increased working load factor be used. It is recommended that a lower working load factor be selected with only expert knowledge of conditions and professional estimates of risk; if the rope has been inspected and found to be in good condition; and if the rope has not been subject to shock loads, excessive use, elevated temperatures, or extended periods under load. For dynamic loading applications that involve severe exposure conditions, or for recommendations on special applications, consult the manufacturer. FIRMNESS Select ropes that are firm and round and hold their shape during use. Soft or mushy ropes will snag easily and abrade quickly causing accelerated strength loss. Because the fibers are in a straighter line, which improves strength but compromises durability, loose or mushy rope will almost always have higher break strengths than a similar rope that is firm and holds its shape. CONSTRUCTION AND ABRASION It is important to choose the right rope construction for your application, because it affects resistance to normal wear and abrasion. Braided ropes have a round, smooth construction that tends to flatten out somewhat on a bearing surface. This distributes the wear over a much greater area, as opposed to the crowns of a 3-strand or, to a lesser degree, on an 8-strand rope. ASSIGNED WORKING LOAD FACTORS Assigned working load factors vary in accordance with the different safety practices and policies of utilities and industrial users. However, our recommendation, and one that is fairly well accepted in the industry, is a minimum 5:1 working load factor. Thus, your maximum workload should be approximately 1/5th, or 20%, of the quoted breaking strength. This factor provides greater safety and extends the service life of the winch line. Assume that you have seven identical ropes, each with a 30,000-lb breaking strength and you work these ropes daily with each rope lifting a different load, as shown in Table 5. Table 5 shows that the higher the working load factor, the greater the service life and the lower the replacement factor. Therefore, the working load factor directly reflects the economy of the purchase. TABLE 5. Working loads for seven ropes with breaking strengths of 30,000 lb. BREAKING STRENGTH WORKING LOAD* WORKING LOAD FACTOR NUMBER OF LIFTS 1 30,000 LB 5,000 LB 6:1 1, ,000 LB 6,000 LB 5: ,000 LB 7,500 LB 4: ,000 LB 10,000 LB 3: ,000 LB 15,500 LB 2: ,000 LB 20,000 LB 1.5: ,000 LB 28,000 LB 1.1:1 5 *Relative values only. The higher the working load factor the greater the service life, and, of course, the lower the replacement factor. Thus, a working load factor also directly reflects an economy factor; if you always lifting the same weight, then the stronger the rope, the higher the working load factor, and the longer the rope will last. IMPORTANT NOTE: It is important to note that many industries are subject to state and federal regulation on workload limits that supersede the manufacturer's recommendation. It is the responsibility of the rope user to be aware of and adhere to those laws and regulations. ROPE HANDLING AND USAGE DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES Based on rope industry practices, dielectric property testing is conducted on clean, new rope samples and holds true only under such ideal conditions. Dirt, grease, other foreign matter, and moisture (including humidity) will alter the nonconductivity/ conductivity of any synthetic rope or material. No rope manufacturer can attest to a rope's dielectric properties under actual operating conditions. REMOVING ROPE FROM A REEL OR COIL Synthetic-fiber ropes are normally shipped on reels for maximum protection while in transit. The rope should be removed from the reel by pulling it off the top while the reel is free to rotate. This can be accomplished by passing a pipe through the center of the reel and jacking it up until the reel is free from the deck. Rope should never be taken from a reel lying on its side. If the rope is supplied on a coil, it should always be uncoiled from the inside so that the first turn comes off the bottom in a counter clockwise direction. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

85 Winch Lines and Operations ROPE STORAGE: COILING, FLAKING, AND BAGGING Great care must be taken in the stowage and proper coiling of 3-strand ropes to prevent the natural built-in twist of the line from developing kinks and heckles. Braided ropes on the other hand have no built-in twist and are far more resistant to kinking. Even if kinks do develop, they cannot develop further into heckles. ends of the winch line so that it can be reversed in the event of damage to one end; however, this is not always possible, depending upon the method of attachment to the winch drum and whether or not a closed thimble is spliced into the eye. If an eye is not used at the drum end, then this end should be tightly whipped with a strong twine. Hockled Rope Three-strand and braided ropes should be coiled in a clockwise direction (or in the direction of the lay of the rope) and uncoiled in a counterclockwise direction to avoid kinks. An alternate and perhaps better method is to flake out the line in a figure eight. This avoids putting twist in the line in either direction and lessens the risk of kinking. Figure 8 WINCH LINES AND WINCHING OPERATIONS Coiling - Twisting Rope SHARP CUTTING EDGES Samson winch lines should not be exposed to sharp edges and surfaces such as metal burrs on winch drums, sheaves, shackles, thimbles, wire slings, etc. Our winch lines are made from synthetic fibers and, as such, can be cut or damaged by sharp edges. When installing winch lines on old truck units, great care must be exercised to assure that the rope is not coming in contact with hardware that has been scored and chewed by previously used wire lines. Sheaves, shackles, thimbles, etc., should be replaced in most cases. Other metal surfaces should be carefully examined and dressed if necessary. ATTACHING LINE TO A WINCH DRUM There are various methods of attaching a winch line to a winch drum: using a wedge or plug and set-screw in the main body of the drum, or using a U bolt through the side of the flange. Another method involves welding a round plug to the winch drum. The soft eye at the end of the winch line is placed over the plug and held in place with a flat keeper. The attachment method should not have a sharp edge that will cut the line under load. If possible, it is advisable to have an eye splice in both TABLE 6. EFFECT OF ROPE DIAMETER ON DRUM CAPACITY. ROPE DIAMETER FEET ON DRUM 1/2" 510' 5/8" 325' 3/4" 225' 7/8" 165' 1" 125' 1-1/8" 100' (values based on a 2' drum) ROPE CAPACITY OF A WINCH DRUM The formula for rope capacity on a winch drum is: Length to be A( B 2 C 2 ) stored (feet) = 15.3 (rope dia.) 2 (Where A, B, C, and rope diameter are expressed in inches and length [L ] is expressed in feet.) 83 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

86 Winch Lines and Operations WINDING ROPE ON THE WINCH DRUM The first layer (wrap) around the winch drum should be put on closely and tightly. The initial winding tension (load) should be approximately 50 pounds. This will prevent subsequent wraps from slipping down between turns when tension is applied. Samson winch lines tend to self-level. Important: Samson recommends at least four wraps* always be left on winch drum. *IMPORTANT NOTE: Due to their low coefficient of friction AmSteel and AmSteel -Blue *4 wraps on a drum lines must be worked with at least eight wraps on the drum at all times. LEVEL WINDING Using the appropriate amount of tension, wind the rope evenly, without spaces across the drum of the winch. The next level should wind over the previous layer of rope and follow the valley between turns on the previous level. This pattern is followed for all layers of rope, with each layer of turns slightly offset from the layer below. CROSS WINDING When the rope is placed under load it can dive, or push into, the previously wrapped level below it. To avoid diving, cross winding is recommended. When cross winding, start with two layers of level wound rope using the appropriate back tension. At the end of the second layer, pull the rope quickly across the drum, allow it to wind one full turn at the side of the drum, then quickly pull it back to the opposite side of the drum. This will force the rope to cross in the middle and form a barrier that will prevent the rope from diving into the lower layers of the drum when placed under load. Follow the cross-wound layer with two layers of level wound turns, then form another cross. Repeat this pattern until the length of rope is fully spooled onto the winch. First Cross Second Cross Level Layer DANGER TO PERSONNEL Persons should be warned against the serious danger of standing in line with a rope under tension. Should the rope separate, it may recoil with considerable force. In all cases where any such risks are present, or where there is any question about the load involved or the condition of use, the working load should be substantially reduced and the rope properly inspected before every use. AVOID KINKING AND HOCKLING The continuous use of 3-strand and 4-strand lines on one side of a winch or windlass is a common abuse that can render a line useless in a short time. Repeated hauling of a line over a winch in a counterclockwise direction will extend the lay of the rope and simultaneously shorten the twist of each strand. As this action continues, kinks (or heckles) will develop. Once heckles appear, they cannot be removed and the rope is permanently damaged. If, on the other hand, the line is continuously hauled over a winch in a clockwise direction, the rope lay is shortened and the rope becomes stiff and readily kinks. To avoid detrimental conditions, the direction of turns over the winch should be alternated regularly. Clockwise turns are recommended for the initial use of a new line. If this practice is observed, the original rope balance will be maintained and the lines will have a much longer useful life. Excessive turns can cause kinking in any rope but heckles can occur only in the basic twisted ropes (3-strand, 4-strand, and wire rope). Braided and plaited ropes cannot be heckled; their inter-locking strand construction prevents the unlaying. Strands run in both directions creating a torque-free balance thus eliminating any inherent tendency toward twist or rotation. Swivels can be used safely but are seldom necessary. One word of caution here: when marrying a braided line to a twisted line (and also to wire rope) the twisted line can impart its twist to the braided line if the ropes are married without a swivel in between. A braided or plaited rope, being torque-free, can have twist induced by constant working on winches. If a twist develops, it can easily be removed by counter-rotating when the rope is relaxed. EYE SPLICING The standard eye splice cannot be pulled out under tension; however, it can be pulled out by hand when the winch line is in a relaxed state. To prevent such tampering, it is recommended that lock stitching or tight seizing be applied to the base or throat of the splice. Lock stitching may also prove advantageous on some splices to prevent no-load opening due to mishandling. The material required is one fid length of nylon whipping twine approximately the same size diameter as the strands in the rope you are lock stitching. The strands cut from the rope you are lock stitching may also be used, but whipping twine is preferable. You may download lock-stitch instructions from our website SamsonRope.com or call customer service to receive them by mail. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

87 Winch Lines and Operations Eye splices at the end of winch lines (if not put in at the factory) should be done in strict accordance with the steps and procedures outlined in Samson splicing instructions. These splicing methods can be easily learned and executed by line crews and shop personnel. Assistance in splicing instruction is available through the Samson Technical Representative in your area. Splicing Training Kits, manuals, and tools can be ordered through your local Samson Distributor or direct from the factory. Instructions are also available on-line at SamsonRope.com. KNOTS AND WINCH LINES Splicing is, by far, the strongest and most efficient means of attachment. Knots should never be tied in a winch line if it can be in any way avoided because knots can reduce the strength of any rope (or wire) by as much as 50%. Also, avoid sharp bends in the line where possible because this will also greatly reduce strength. BOOM-SHEAVE RECOMMENDATIONS To assure maximum efficiency and safety, the boom-sheave diameter should be no less than eight times the rope's diameter. The sheave's groove diameter should be no less than 10% greater than the rope diameter, and the groove should be round in shape, not V shaped. 8-inch Diameter Sheave 1-inch Diameter Rope 8:1 Ratio Groove Diameter Rope Diameter 10% greater than rope diameter TWISTED / PLAITED 10 times rope diameter BRAIDED 8 times rope diameter BENDING RADIUS Any sharp bend in a rope under load decreases its strength substantially and may cause premature damage or failure. In sizing the radius of bills, fairleads and chocks for best performance the following guidelines are offered: Where a rope bends more than 10 degrees around bills or chocks or, for that matter, is bending across any surface, the diameter of that surface should not be less than 3 times the diameter of the rope. Stated another way, the diameter of the surface should be at least three times the rope diameter. A 4-to-1 ratio (or larger) would be better yet because the durability of the rope increases substantially as the diameter of the surface over which it is worked increases. 85 On a cleat when the rope does not bend radially around, the barrel of the cleat can be one half the rope circumference (minimum). The ratio of the length of an eye splice to the diameter of the object over which the eye is to be placed (for example, bollard, bill, cleat, etc.) should be a minimum 3-to-1 relationship and preferably 5-to-1. In other words, if you have a bollard 2 feet in diameter the eye splice should be 6 or 10 feet in length. By using this ratio the angle of the 2 legs of the eye splice at its throat will not be so severe as to cause a parting or tearing action at this point (thimbles are normally designed with a 3-to-1 ratio). Surface diameter should be at least three times the rope diameter. Bollards with undersized horns This angle is more than 10 minimum 6 ft ABRASION PROTECTION OF LINE With their outer jacket of polyester, Stable Braid, AmSteel II, Validator SKB, and Progen II have a relatively high degree of resistance to abrasion and melting. However, all synthetics are subject to melting if subjected to enough friction and heat; therefore, such practices as surging on a gypsy-head winch, hard rendering around poles, or over cross-arms, etc., should be avoided whenever possible. USE OF SLINGS WITH WINCH LINES The winch line itself should not be used as a choker to pick up a pole or other objects. The hook attached on the end of the winch line can cut deeply into the rope itself. We recommend a separate line, sling or strap be used as the choker and not the winch line itself. TEMPERATURE Friction can be your best friend or worst enemy if it is not managed properly. Friction takes place anytime two surfaces come in contact. Mild friction, sometimes referred to as grip is a good characteristic, especially in winching applications. However, by definition, friction creates heat, the greater the friction, the greater the heat buildup. Heat is an enemy to synthetic fiber and elevated temperatures can drastically reduce the strength and/or cause rope melt-through. High temperatures can be achieved when checking ropes on a cable or running over stuck or non-rolling sheaves or rollers. Each rope's construction and fiber type will yield a different coefficient of friction (resistance to slipping) in a new and used state. It is important to understand the operational demands, and take into account the size, rope construction, and fiber type to minimize heat buildup. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

88 Winch Lines and Operations Never let ropes under tension rub together or move relative to one another. Enough heat to melt the fibers can buildup and cause the rope to fail quickly: as if it had been cut with a knife. Always be aware of areas of heat buildup and take steps to minimize it; under no circumstances let any rope come in contact with an exhaust muffler or any other hot object. The strength of a used rope can be determined by testing, but the rope is destroyed in the process so the ability to determine the retirement point before it fails in service is essential. That ability is based on a combination of education in rope use and construction along with good judgment and experience. Remember, you almost always get what you pay for in the form of performance and reliability. TABLE 7. The critical and melting temperatures for synthetic fibers. FIBER TYPE CRITICAL TEMP. MELTING TEMP. DYNEEMA 150 F 300 F POLYPROPYLENE 250 F 330 F NYLON 325 F F POLYESTER 350 F 480 F TECHNORA 450 F 900 F* *while the term melting does not apply to this fiber, it does undergo extreme degradation in these temperatures, and they char. STRENGTH DEGRADATION FROM ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT Prolonged exposure of synthetic ropes to ultraviolet (UV) radiation of sunlight causes varying degrees of strength degradation. Polyester fibers are the least affected by UV exposure, and the resulting strength degradation of exposed fibers is negligible. Nylon is more susceptible to strength loss due to ultraviolet rays, but with both polyester and nylon, the degree of susceptibility to UV damage is dependent on the type of fiber and the various UV inhibitors with which the fiber manufacturer treats them (i.e., Samthane coaling). Polyolefin and PBO fibers are severely affected by ultraviolet exposure, especially in their natural, undyed, and/or uncovered states. HARMFUL CHEMICALS Certain chemicals break down synthetic fibers. Sulfuric acids, alkalis, and chlorinate hydrocarbons over 160 F are to be avoided, while strong cleaning agents or bleaches may be harmful. If you are unsure about the effect of a specific chemical, contact our customer service department for more information. AVOID SHOCK LOADING Shock loading of any line, synthetic, manila, or wire, produces a drastically different set of physical properties and results as compared with normal loading. Shock loading is a jerking or snatching of a line, or a very sudden change in tension such as from a relaxed state or low load to one of high load. A sudden drop off a platform as short a distance as four inches actually doubles the rope's load. Similarly, an over wrap falling off the winch drum can result in a 50% shock load. This results in accelerated wear of the rope. FATIGUE Synthetic fibers have memory: they remember and retain the effects of being overloaded and shock loaded. This why winch line procedures are so important to reducing the danger of shock loading, which prolongs the life of the rope and reduces premature down grading. If there is reason to believe that a line has been shock loaded above its recommended working load, it should be logged. If a number of these instances occur, the line should be inspected and rotated. END-FOR-ENDING It is recommended that every winch line be rotated end-for-end on a periodic basis. This will vary high stress and wear points and extend useful life. The recommended end-for-ending period is six months, at which time visual inspection and washing can also be done. ROPE INSPECTION AND RETIREMENT One of the most frequently asked questions is: When should I retire my rope? The most obvious answer is before it breaks. But, without a thorough understanding of how to inspect it and without knowing the load history, you are left making an educated guess. Unfortunately, there are no definitive rules nor are there industry guidelines to establish when a rope should be retired because there are so many variables that affect rope strength. Factors like load history, bending radius, abrasion, chemical exposure or some combination of those factors, make retirement decisions difficult. Inspecting your rope should be a continuous process of observation before, during, and after each use. In synthetic fiber ropes, the amount of strength loss due to abrasion and/or flexing is directly related to the amount of broken fiber in the rope's cross section. After each use, look and feel along every inch of the rope length inspecting for damage as listed below. VISUAL INSPECTION The load-bearing capacity of double braid ropes such as Stable Braid is divided equally between the inner core and the outer cover. If upon inspection, there are cut strands or significant abrasion damage the rope must be retired because the strength of the entire rope is decreased. Core-dependent double braids such as AmSteel II have 100% of their load-bearing capacity handled by the core alone. For these ropes, the jacket can sustain damage without compromising the strength of the load-bearing member. Inspection of core-dependent double braids can be misleading because it is difficult to see the core. In the case of 12-strand single braids such as AmSteel and Am- Steel -Blue, each of the 12-strands carries approximately 8.33%, or 1/12th, of the load. If upon inspection, there are cut strands or significant abrasion damage to the rope, the rope must be retired or the areas of damage removed and the rope repaired with the appropriate splice. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

89 Davit Cranes and Winches When it comes to equipment for heavy-duty lifting and positioning, Thern has the experience you are looking for. Large or small, heavy or light, Thern has designed and manufactured standard and custom cranes and winches for countless customer applications around the world. DAVIT CRANES MAX CAPACITY MAX LIFT MODELS HANES NO LBS UP TO 240 FT 5PT10-M1 WIN40515 PORTABLE POWER WINCHES MAX CAPACITY 2000 LBS 2000 LBS 2000 LBS LINE SPEED 8-19 fpm 8-19 fpm fpm TRAVEL DISTANCE ft ft 90 ft HP MODELS 4WP2T8 4WP2T HANES NO. WIN40506 WIN40505 WIN20300 WORM GEAR HAND WINCHES MAX CAPACITY 750 LBS 1000 LBS 2000 LBS GEAR RATIO 20:1 15:1 24:1 APROX. WEIGHT 12 LBS 15 LBS 32 LBS MODELS HANES NO. WIN20200 WIN20000 WIN20100 SPUR GEAR HAND WINCHES MAX CAPACITY 500 LBS 1000 LBS 2000 LBS 2000 LBS 4000 LBS GEAR RATIO 3:1 15:1 4:1 25:1 APROX. WEIGHT 8 LBS 17 LBS 28 LBS 23 LBS 83 LBS MODELS M401 M4022PB M4312PB M4312 M452 HANES NO. WIN20001 WIN40041 WIN20650 WIN20600 WIN WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

90 Hydraulics Enerpac Hydraulic Cylinders are available in hundreds of different configurations. Whatever the industrial application lifting, pushing, pulling, bending, holding whatever the force capacity, stroke length, or size restrictions single- or double-acting, solid or hollow plunger, you can be sure that Enerpac has the cylinder to suit your high force application. Enerpac jacking cylinders fully comply to ASME B30.1 (except RD-Series). Enerpac Hydraulic Pumps are available in over 1,000 different configurations. Whatever your high pressure pump needs are speed, control, intermittent or heavy-duty performance you can be sure that Enerpac has the pump to suit the application. Featuring Hand, Battery, Electric, Air and Gasoline powered models, with multiple reservoir and valve configurations, Enerpac offers the most comprehensive high pressure pump line available. Enerpac's Bolting Solutions cater to the complete bolting work-flow, ensuring joint integrity in a variety of applications throughout industry: Joint Assembly, Controlled Tightening and Joint Separation. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

91 Hydraulics From inflatable jacks, torque wrenches, hydraulic pumps, cylinders and valves to clamping components and hydraulic accessories, Power Team brand high-force tools and equipment are used wherever strong, concentrated force is required on construction sites, in power plants, on rail lines, in shipyards, in mining operations and more. Powerteam Cylinders are used for mechanical load holding over an extended period of time. Available in low-profile, lightweight or tonnage models see charts on pages to help you select a cylinder for your application. Need a pump for your application? Use the chart on page 88 to help you select the right Powerteam Pump for your specific needs. Start-Up Kits cover a range of lifting, shifting, and positioning needs. 10 Ton kit ranges from 1-3/4" to 9-3/4", and the 25 ton kit ranges from 2-5/16" to 10-3/4". Both include strokes ranging from approximately 1/2" to 6" respectively. All of these cylinders are single-acting spring return. HYDRAULIC TOOLS TORQUE WRENCH LOW CLEARANCE TORQUE WRENCH 89 HYDRAULIC FLANGE HYDRAULIC PRY BAR WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

92 SPX Pump Selection Generally Recommended Marginal Check Requirements Not recommended for most applications Hand Pumps* Electric/ Hydraulic Pumps Air/ Hydrolic Pumps Gas/ Hydrolic Pumps PRESSURE STAGE 10,000 PSI MAXIMUM WORKING PRESSURE CYLINDER CAPACITY (TONS) P12 Single P55 Single P19/ P19L P59F P59(L) P157 P159 P300 Low High Low High Low High Low High P460 Low High PE10 Low High PE17 Low High PE18 Low High PE21 Low High PED25 Low High PE30 Low High PE46 Low High PE55 PE60 PQ60 PQ120 PE400 PA6 PA9 PA17 PA46 PA55 PG30 PG55 PG120 PG400 Low High Low High Low High Low High Single Single Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High Some Power Team pumps are available in special configurations not listed in this catalog. Power Team can "Assemble to order" pumps with special seals, voltages, valves, relief valve settings, etc. For your special requirements please consult your local distributor or the Power Team factory. *Hand Pumps= Number of strokes required to move piston 1". Air, Electric and Gasoline Engine/Hydraulic pumps= Number of seconds required to move piston 1" WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

93 SPX Cylinder Selection Hydraulic Circuit Example TONS Stroke Height Order No. 9/16 1-5/8 RLS50 TONS Stroke Height Order No. 12-1/ /16 C1512C TONS Stroke Height Order No /16 RH306D /8 C51C 3-1/4 6-1/2 C53C 5-1/4 8-1/2 C55C 5-1/4 10-1/2 C55CBT 7-1/4 10-3/4 C57C 9-1/4 12-3/4 C59C 7/16 1-3/4 RLS /8 C101C 1-1/2 3-1/2 RSS /8 4-3/4 C102C 2-1/2 5-1/4 RH /8 6-3/4 C104C 6-1/8 9-3/4 C106C 6-1/8 11-1/2 C106CBT 6-1/ /16 RD /16 RH /8 11-3/4 C108C /16 RD /8 13-3/4 C1010C 10-1/8 15-1/2 C1010CBT 12-1/8 15-3/4 C1012C 14-1/8 17-3/4 C1014C 5/16 2-3/16 RH /8 4-13/16 RH /8 4-13/16 RH121T 3 7-1/4 RH /8 C151C 2-1/8 5-7/8 C152C 4-1/8 7-7/8 C154C 6-1/ /16 C156C 8-1/ /16 C158C 10-1/ /16 C1510C / /16 C1514C /16 C1516C /8 RT /16 2 RLS /4 3-3/4 RSS /8 RH /8 6-3/8 RA /16 RH /8 8-3/8 RA /8 RH /8 10-3/8 RA /2 C251C 2 6-1/2 C252C 4 8-1/2 C254C 6-1/4 10-3/4 C256C 6-1/4 13-3/8 C256CBT 6-1/4 12-3/8 RD /4 12-3/4 C258C 10-1/4 14-3/4 C2510C 12-1/4 16-3/4 C2512C 14-1/8 18-3/4 C2514C 14-1/8 21-3/8 C2514CBT 14-1/8 20-3/8 RD2514 1/2 2-5/16 RLS /8 7-3/8 RA /16 4-5/8 RSS /2 6-1/4 RH /2 8-7/16 RT /16 RH /8 9-3/8 RA /8 11-1/8 RHA /4 RH /8 11-3/8 RA /8 17-1/4 RH3010 5/8 2-5/8 RLS500S 2-3/8 5 RSS /8 RH /16 RT /16 R552C 2 6-3/8 R552L 2 6-7/8 C552C 2-1/8 6-3/4 RA /8 8-3/4 RA /4 9-1/8 C554C /16 R556C /8 R556L 6-1/8 10-3/4 RA /8 12-1/2 RA556L 6-1/4 11-1/8 C556C 6-1/ /32 RD /16 R5510C /8 R5510L /8 RA /4 15-1/8 C5510C 13-1/ /32 RD /4 18-1/8 C5513C 18-1/8 25-7/8 RD /4 RH /2 RHA604D 5 9-1/2 RH /2 RH /8 18-1/16 RH /8 3-1/8 RLS750S 91 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

94 SPX Cylinder Selection Hydraulic Circuit Example 1 Cylinder 4 Guage 8 Quick Coupling 11 2 Pump 5 Hose 10 Load-Lowering Valve T-Gauge Adapter TONS 75 Stroke Height Order No. 6-1/8 12-3/8 C756C 13-1/8 19-3/8 C7513C /8 20-3/8 RD /8 3-3/8 RLS1000S 1-1/2 5-11/16 RSS1002D 1-1/2 6-1/2 RH /2 R1002C /64 R1002D 2 7-1/4 R1002L 2 8-5/8 C1002C 2-1/8 7-3/4 RA /4 5-1/2 RSS RH /8 15-1/8 RT /2 R1006C /64 R1006D /4 R1006L /8 RH /4 11-3/4 RA /4 13-3/8 RA1006L 6-5/8 13-1/4 C1006C 6-5/ /32 RD /2 R10010C /64 R10010D /4 R10010L 10-1/ /16 RH /4 16-7/8 C10010C 13-1/8 20-9/32 RD /8 28-9/32 RD /16 4 RLS1500S 2 6-3/8 R1502C 2 7-7/16 R1502D TONS Stroke Height Order No /8 R1502L /8 RH /8 R1506C /16 R1506D /8 R1506L 6-5/8 14-7/8 RD /4 RH /8 R15010C /16 R15010D /8 R15010L 13-1/8 21-3/8 RD / /32 RD /2 R2002C 2 8-9/64 R2002D 2 9-1/2 R2002L /2 R2006C /64 R2006D /2 R2006L 6-5/8 16 RD /16 RH /2 R20010C /64 R20010D /2 R20010L 13-1/8 22-1/2 RD /8 28-1/2 RD /16 RSS /2 R2802C /64 R2802D 2 9-3/4 R2802L /2 R2806C /64 R2806D /4 R2806L TONS Stroke Height Order No /2 R28010C /64 R28010D /4 R28010L /32 RD /32 RD /8 R3552C /2 R3552L /8 R3552D /8 R3556C /2 R3556L /32 R3556D /8 R35510C /2 R35510L /32 R35510D /8 RD /8 RD /8 R4302C /16 R4302D /8 R4306C /16 R4306D /16 R43010C /64 R43010D /32 RD /32 RD /2 R5652C /8 R5652L /32 R5652D /2 R5656C /8 R5656L /32 R5656D /2 R56510C /8 R56510L /32 R56510D WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

95 Dynamometers The MSI-7200 Dyna-Link is a versatile digital force measurement and load-indicating instrument for inside and outside use. Ask about remote display options. The MSI-3360 Challenger II Digital Crane Scale is an instrument for light-duty overhead industrial weighing. MSI-7200 DYNA-LINK MSI-3360 CHALLENGER DYNA-LINK SPECIFICATIONS 500 LB. TO 250 TON RANGE CHALLENGER SPECIFICATIONS 250 LB. TO 15,000 LB. RANGE PORTA-WEIGH PLUS SPECIFICATIONS 500 LB. TO 250 TON RANGE TRANS-WEIGH SPECIFICATIONS 500 LB. TO 250 TON RANGE MSI-4300 PORTA-WEIGH PLUS The MSI-4300 Porta-Weigh Plus Overhead Crane Scale has served duty in aerospace, chemical, marine, mining, petroleum, and steel industry applications for heavy-duty use. Ask about the MSI-4260 Porta-Weigh for Intrinsically Safe and High Heat applications. MSI-6260 TRANS-WEIGH The MSI-6260 Trans-Weigh Radio Telemetry Crane Scale provides trouble-free data transmission from crane hook to digital indicator.! WARNING Do not use this product unless properly trained. Inspect and use according to OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturers Instructions. 93 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

96 Dynamometers The DYNAFOR LLX1 devices are electronic load indicators to measure tensile forces (N) and determine hanging loads (Lbs). Precision: +/- 0.2 % Available models from 1000 lbs to lbs. Option: mobile display using the Zigbee technology (2.4 GHz) Model LLX1 CMU (T) PRECISION +/- (KG) AFFICHAGE MINIMUM (KG) INCRÉMENT (KG) POIDS (KG) DYNAFOR LLXh devices are load indicators to measure tensile forces (N) and determine hanging loads (Lbs). One Dynafor LLXh unit consists of a sensor and a remotely installed display (2.4 GHz connection). Optional PC connection via USB interface. Precision: 0.2 % Available models from 30,000 lbs to 500,000 lbs. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

97 Hilman Rollers GUIDELINES FOR SELECTING THE PROPER MODEL 1. How much does the load weigh? 2. How many contact points does the load have? The Hilman rollers are rated in metric tons. Divide the number of contact points into the total load to determine the capacity of individual rollers. Determine if the load is equally distributed or unbalanced. If unbalanced, some rollers may carry more load and some less. 3. What is the rolling surface and its condition? The rolling surface should be hard and level, and free of debris. Where the surface is not hard such as asphalt or dirt, a track or steel plate can be used as the rolling surface. If the surface is not level, there must be a hold-back system on the load to brake and control it. If the floor is composed of a delicate surface, then specify Nyton rollers which are coated to soften the roller contact. 4. Are there turns involved or is it a straight line move? If there are turns, rollers with swivels or swivels with a locking top are suggested. If no turns, then a rigid style top is fine. Rollers are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 to 3,000 tons. Riggers kits which consist of four rollers, steering handles and various tops are available if moving loads with rollers is a common task. The kit comes complete with a locking steel box. A riggers set is the same as a kit without the steel box. HILMAN DELUXE KITS Steel or Nyton Chain Move and position all types of heavy equipment 14 gauge steel carrying case Raised base prevents corrosion and provides forklift loading Two full-length steering handles knock-down for storage Hilman Rollers provide maximum turning options 95 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

98 Windmill Lifting Brackets Engineered Lifting Technologies, Inc., a subsidiary of the Hanes Supply Group, has received patent protection of its proprietary tower erection system. The system consists of all the necessary brackets, rigging & hardware required for the installation of towers. The patent is all-inclusive, consisting of lightweight tower lifting brackets, tipping brackets, rigging and hardware. Exclusive Two-Point Top Bracket Pick The Safest and Fastest Solution Each Bracket Weighs Only 92 lbs. Alternatives are often over 300 lbs. Small size and weight offers superior ergonomics. Reduces required manpower to install and reduces crane time Can be installed by one worker. Adjustable Eccentric Inserts Replaceable inserts easily and quickly adjust to variances in hole tolerances on-the-fly. Two-Point Top Pick Eliminates the dangers inherent with using wire rope blocks to balance a four-point pick. Reduced number of brackets Only four needed for entire lift. Exceeds ANSI/ASME Requirements Zinc Dichromate plated body for outstanding corrosion protection. Nickel plated inserts. No load bearing welds. Tighter bolt clearance holes. Designed to be Used with Slingmax Twin-Path slings offer the patented Check-Fast system for inspection. Two individual paths offer superior safety in the event of a rip or tear. Other Windmill Industry Equipment Available... HUB BRACKET NACELLE BEAM ADJUSTABLE STAGING HOOK WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

99 Lifting Beams LIFTING BEAMS The Difference Lifter vs Spreader Lifting beams are used when available headroom is not sufficient for top rigging. Lifting beams must be designed structurally larger than spreader beams to adequately handle load stress. Spreader beams with top rigging are smaller because most load stress is absorbed by the rigging. This differentiation is critical in order to properly specify the equipment required. Make sure you know the difference. Practical Tips for Using Overhead Lifting Attachments INSPECTION The lifter should be visually inspected by or under the direction of an appointed person on a daily or weekly schedule depending on the nature of the lifter and the severity of the service. Defects to look for include but are not limited to: 1. Structural deformation. 2. Cracks in the structural frame, welds, hoist hook attachment points, mechanically operating lifter. 3. Malfunctions during operation of mechanically operating lifter. 4. Loose covers, fasteners and stops. 5. Faulty operation of automatic hold and release mechanisms. 6. Wear of hoist hooking points, load supporting clevises, pins, slings, linkages and mechanical parts. 7. Missing nameplates and markings. OPERATING PRACTICES 1. The operator should watch carefully that the lifter is performing properly during the lifting procedure. 2. The operator should be familiar with the standard crane directing hand signals. 3. The operator should respond to signals from an appointed person only. However, stop signals from anyone shall be obeyed. 4. The operator should notify a designated person when he considers a load to be unsafe. 5. The operator should observe the lifter before using. A defect observed shall be examined by a qualified person to determine if it is a hazard. HANDLING THE LOAD 1. The lifter should not be loaded in excess of its rated load. 2. The combined weight of the lifter and load should not exceed the rated load of the crane or hoist. 3. The lifter should be applied to the load in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended operating procedures. 4. Lifter ropes and chains should not be kinked, and multiple part lines shall not be twisted about each other. 5. The lifter should not touch obstructions during load movement. 6. The operator or other personnel should not ride suspended loads or enter restricted spaces adjacent to them. 7. The load or lifter should not be slid on the floor or other surface. 8. The lifter should not be used for loads for which it is not designed. 9. If suspended loads are moved manually, they should be pushed, not pulled. 10. A preliminary lift of a few inches should be made to establish that the load is stable. 11. All loads should be accelerated and decelerated smoothly. LIFTING ATTACHMENTS COMPLY TO ASME STANDARDS 97 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

100 Lifting Attachments Hanes Supply, Inc., is an industry leader in the development and manufacturing of below-thehook lifting devices for cranes and hoists. We have a product line to provide the customer with an ergonomic and economical solution to various application needs. We custom manufacture products to suit almost any application requirement where there is not a standard solution available. It is the diversity along with our commitment to quality that is responsible for our worldwide reputation for best possible service, competitive product and customer satisfaction. All of our products meet OSHA & ASME standards. Some of the products currently offered are Pallet Lifters, C-hooks, Narrow Aisle Coil Lifters, Telescoping Lifters, Lifting Beams, Lifting Tongs and accessories. The most versatile spreader beam system on the market! ASB Adjustable Spreader BEAM Easier cutting! Easier drilling! Better design! Easier to transport! Tube Steel ends do not need to Does not lose capacity be cut square for proper operation. at maximum spreader length. Square profile makes cutting and Capacities up to 100 Ton & 40 foot. drilling faster and easier. Brackets always fit and align due Tube steel can be drilled in multiple locations for quick transitions from to more consistent nature of tube steel over pipe. one length to another with a single system. The bracket itself serves as the drilling template. Brackets are stamped with size and grade of tube steel needed for the system. No need to ship long beams just buy new steel locally at the next jobsite. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

101 Man Baskets/ Personnel Crane Baskets Personnel Crane or Man Baskets are used to suspend workers from either a crane or forklift. They are designed to ASME BTH-1, and are OSHA compliant. Manufactured and tested in accordance with code of Federal Regulations and ASME B Crane Baskets are designed, fabricated, tested and certified to exceed the above standards in order to meet the demands for a long life of rugged job site use. High Profile and Low profile options are available. In addition to offering a wide variety of standard models, custom models can be fabricated to best suit your needs. All Baskets are proof tested to 125% of their WLL and can have your company s name included on it at no extra charge. Standard Equipment Four Leg Bridle w/master link & four bolt type shackles Anchors for safety lanyard and / or tagline Quick attach/detach test weight assembly In-Swing, self-closing, self-latching door Grab Rail around full interior perimeter Full 4 kick plate Full 42 height expanded metal to reduce wind affect Slip resistant checkered plate floor Fork Lift Tubes for easy movement at the job site Painted safety yellow Optional Equipment Solid Bail, optional for restricted headroom Emergency Ramp Rubber Bumper around bottom and top perimeter Casters System allow rolling fully loaded Expanded Metal removable or fixed overhead protection Test Weight is available as steel concrete form for you to fill with concrete on the jobsite in order to provide a more economical solution 99 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

102 Wire Rope Clips CROSBY CLIP WARNINGS & APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS D D 60 NOTE: D= TREAD DIAMETER! G-450 (Red-U-Bolt) WARNING Failure to read, understand, and follow these instructions may cause death or serious injury. Read and understand these instructions before using clips. Match the same size clip to the same size wire rope. Prepare wire rope end termination only as instructed. Do not use with plastic coated wire rope. Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and retighten nuts to recommended torque (See Table 1 ). Efficiency ratings for wire rope end terminations are based upon the minimum breaking force of wire rope. The efficiency rating of a properly prepared loop or thimble-eye termination for clip sizes 1/8" through 7/8" is 80%, and for sizes 1" through 3-1/2" is 90%. The number of clips shown (see Table 1) is based upon using RRL or ALL wire rope, 6 x 19 or 6 x 37 Class, FC or IWRC; IPS or XIP, XXIP. If Seale construction or similar large outer wire type construction in the 6 x 19 Class is to be used for sizes 1 inch and larger, add one additional clip. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. The number of clips shown also applies to rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 8 x 19 Class, IPS, XIP, XXIP sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller; and to rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 19 x 7 Class, IPS, XIP, XXIP sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller. For other classes of wire rope not mentioned above, we recommend contacting Crosby Engineering to ensure the desired efficiency rating. The style of wire rope termination used for any application is the obligation of the user. For OSHA (Construction) applications, see OSHA Refer to Table I following these instructions. Turn back specified amount of rope from thimble or loop. Apply first clip one base width from dead end of rope. Apply U-Bolt over dead end of wire rope live end rests in saddle. Tighten nuts evenly, alternate from one nut to the other until reaching the recommended torque. 2. When two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible. Tighten nuts evenly, alternating until reaching the recommended torque. When more than two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible, turn nuts on second clip firmly, but do not tighten. 3. When three or more clips are required, space additional clips equally between first two take up rope slack tighten nuts on each U-Bolt evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching recommended torque. FIGURE 4 4. If a pulley (sheave) is used in place of a thimble, add one additional Fist Grip. Fist Grip spacing should be as shown. (See Figure 4) 5. WIRE ROPE SPLICING PROCEDURES: The preferred method of splicing two wire ropes together is to use inter-locking turnback eyes with thimbles, TURNBACK using the recommended number of clips on each eye. An alternate FIGURE 5 method is to use twice the number of clips as used LIVE END DEAD END for a turnback termination. LOAD The rope ends are placed parallel to each other, LOAD overlapping by twice the DEAD END LIVE END turnback amount shown FIGURE 6 in the application instructions. The minimum number of clips should be installed on each dead end (See Figure 6). Spacing, installation torque, and other instructions still apply. 6. IMPORTANT Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and use torque wrench to retighten nuts to recommended torque. In accordance with good rigging and maintenance practices, the wire rope end termination should be inspected periodically for wear, abuse, and general adequacy. CLIP SIZE MINIMUM NO. OF CLIPS TABLE I AMOUNT OF ROPE TO TURN BACK IN INCHES *TORQUE IN FT. 1/ / / / / /4 15 5/ /4 30 3/ /2 45 7/ / /2 65 9/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip. If a greater number of clips are used than shown in the table, the amount of turnback should be increased proportionately.*the tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE CLIP BASE WIDTH 1 CLIP BASE WIDTH

103 Wire Rope Clips E CROSBY CLIPS Sizes 1/8" through 3" have forged bases Look for the Red-U-Bolt, your assurance of Crosby Clips. A Entire clip hot dip galvanized to resist corrosive and rusting action. F G Only genuine Crosby clips have a red U-BOLT for instant recognition. D C B All clips are individually bagged or tagged with proper application instructions and warning information. Clip sizes up through 1-1/2" have rolled threads. G-450 H Crosby clips all sizes 1/4" and larger meet Federal Specification FF-C-450 TYPE 1 CLASS 1.! SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION ROPE SIZE G-450 STOCK NO. GALV. STD. PKG. QTY. WT PER DIMENSIONS A B C D E F G H 1/ *3/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Bulk / Bulk Bulk / Bulk / Bulk / Bulk Bulk / Bulk *Electro-plated U-Bolt and Nuts 2-3/4" and 3-1/2" are made of cast steel. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

104 Master Link MASTER LINK Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Individually proof tested at 2 times Working Load Limit with certification. Proof test certification shipped with each link. Sizes from 1/2" to 2" are drop forged. SIZE *Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Applications with wire rope and synthetic sling generally require a design factor of 5. **Proof Test Load equals or exceeds the requirement of ASTM A952(8.1) and ASME B30.9. Welded Master Link. MASTER LINK ASSEMBLY Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Individually proof tested at 2 times Working Load Limit with certification. Proof test certification shipped with each link. SIZE A-342 STOCK NO. A-342 STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH WEIGHT EACH WLL BASED ON 5:1 DESIGN FACTOR WLL * PROOF LOAD ** PROOF LOAD ** DIMENSIONS DEFORMATION A B C INDICATOR 1/2W / /4W /8W W /4W /2W / / / / / / / / / / DIMENSIONS A B C D E F G DEFORMA- TION INDICATOR 3/4W /8W W /4W /2W / / / *** *Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. The maximum individual sublink working load limit is 75% of the assembly working load limit except for 2-1/2" and 2-3/4", which are 100% of assembly working load limit. Applications with wire rope and synthetic sling generally require a design factor of 5. **Proof Test Load equals or exceeds the requirement of ASTM A952(8.1) and ASME B30.9. ***Sublink only. C A-342 B A A-345 B D E F C A G WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

105 Shackle Application Instructions Round Pin Shackles can be used in tie down towing, suspension or lifting applications where the load is strictly applied in-line. Round pin shackles should never be used in rigging applications to gather, multiple sling legs, or where side loading conditions may occur. Screw Pin Shackles are used in Pick and Place* applications. For permanent or long-term installations, Crosby recommends the use of bolt type shackles. If you choose to disregard Crosby's recommendation, the screw pin shall be secured from rotation or loosening (next page). Screw pin shackles can be used for applications involving side-loading circumstances. Reduced working load limits are required for side-loading applications. While in service, do not allow the screw pin to be rotated by a live line, such as a chocker application. *Pick and Place application: Pick (move) a load and place as required. Tighten screw pin before each pick. Bolt-Type Shackles can be used in any application where round pin or screw pin shackles are used. In addition, they are recommended for permanent or long term installations and where the load may slide on the shackle pin causing the pin to rotate. The bolt-type shackle's secondary securement system, utilizing a nut and cotter, eliminates the requirement to tighten pin before each lift or movement of load. 103 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

106 Shackle Application Instructions RIGGING PRACTICE SHACKLES Screw pin shall be fully engaged. If designed for a cotter pin, it shall be used and maintained. Applied load should be centered in the bow to prevent side loading. Multiple sling legs should not be applied to the pin. If side loaded, the rated load shall be reduced according to Table 1 on the next page. SCREW PIN SHACKLES PIN SECURITY MOUSE SCREW PIN WHEN USED IN LONG-TERM OR HIGH-VIBRATION APPLICATIONS. Mouse or Mousing (screw pin shackle) is a secondary securement method used to secure screw pin from rotation or loosening. Annealed iron wire is looped through hole in collar of pin and around adjacent leg of shackle body with wire ends securely twisted together. SHACKLES WIRE ROPE SLINGS AND CONNECTIONS TO FITTINGS USE A THIMBLE TO PROTECT SLING AND TO INCREASE D/d NEVER PLACE EYE OVER FITTING SMALLER DIAMETER OR WIDTH THAN THE ROPE'S DIAMETER WIRE ROPE SLINGS AND CONNECTIONS TO FITTINGS NEVER PLACE A SLING EYE OVER A FITTING WITH A DIAMETER OR WIDTH GREATER THAN ONE HALF THE NATURAL LENGTH OF THE EYE ROUND PIN Do not side load, do not use as a collector ring, always use cotter pin. SCREW PIN Use when picking and placing a load, tighten pin prior to each lift. CONNECTION OF SLINGS TO SHACKLES BOLT TYPE Use in permanent or longterm installations, always use nut and cotter. SYNTHETIC SLINGS RATED LOAD FOLDING, BUNCHING OR PINCHING OF SYN- THETIC SLINGS, WHICH OCCURS WHEN USED WITH SHACKLES, HOOK OR OTHER APPLICA- TIONS. WILL REDUCE THE RATED LOAD. BUNCHING PINCHING ASME B30.9 CHOKER HITCH FORMED WITH SHACKLES WITH CHOKER HOOK Diameter of shackle must be greater than wire rope diameter if no thimble in eye. BOLT TYPE SHACKLES Use Bolt-Type Shackle when a permanent or long-term connection Use a screw pin shackle when it will be a temporary connection. Shackle must be large enough to avoid pinching of synthetic slings. PLACE PIN IN EYE OF SLING CORRECT! CROSBY SHACKLES POINT LOADING POINT LOADING OF CROSBY SHACKLE BOWS IS ACCEPT- ABLE POINT LOADING OF CROSBY SHACKLE PINS IS ACCEPT- ABLE AS LOAD IS REASON- ABLY CENTERED ON THE PIN Although point loading is acceptable, a pad eye width of 80% or more of shackle spread is best practice. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

107 Shackle Application Instructions SIDE LOADED RATING REDUCTION TABLE 3/16" - 3" (120 METRIC TONS) Angle loads must be applied in the plane of the bow. TABLE I SIDE LOADING REDUCTION CHART FOR SCREW PIN & BOLT TYPE SHACKLES ONLY+ ANGLE OF SIDE LOAD FROM VERTICAL IN-LINE SHACKLE ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD LIMIT 0-5 In-Line* 100% of rated working load limit 45 from In-Line* 70% of rated working load limit 90 from In-Line* 50% of rated working load limit + In-Line load is applied perpendicular to pin. * DO NOT SIDE LOAD ROUND PIN SHACKLE For shackles larger than 125 metric tons, where the angle of the side load is greater than 5 degrees, contact Crosby Engineering. INCLUDED ANGLE - SHACKLES Never exceed 120 included angle. Use Bolt Type and Screw Pin Shackles ONLY. Shackles symmetrically loaded with two leg slings having a maximum included angle of 120 can be utilized to full Working Load Limit. For shackles larger than 125 metric tons, the maximum included angle is 90 degrees for full working load limit. Contact Crosby Engineering if included angle is greater than 90 degrees. 105 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

108 SCREW PIN Working load limit permanently shown on every shackle. Forged Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pins. Capacities 1/3 through 55 tons. Look for the red pin...the mark of genuine Crosby quality. Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated standards such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification available when requested at the time of order. Hot dip galvanized or self-colored. Fatigue rated. NOM. WORKING STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH SIZE LOAD LIMIT* (TONS) G-209 GALV. S-209 S.C. G-213 GALV. S-213 S.C. G-209 S-209 G-213 S-213 3/16 1/ /4 1/ /16 3/ / /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ /8 6-1/ / /8 9-1/ / /8 13-1/ / / / NOM. SIZE G-209 S-209 Screw pin anchor shackles meet the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D Type IVA, Grade A, Class 2. WORKING LOAD LIMIT* Forged Shackles ROUND PIN G-213 S-213 Round pin anchor shackles meet the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D Type IVA, Grade A, Class 1. DIMENSIONS TOLERANCE +/- A B C D E F G H L M N P C A 3/16 1/ /4 1/ /16 3/ / /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ /8 6-1/ / /8 9-1/ / /8 13-1/ / / / *NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. Furnished in screw pin only. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

109 Bolt-Type Shackles BOLT-TYPE ANCHOR SHACKLE G-2130 S-2130 Working Load Limit is permanently shown on every shackle. Forged quenched and tempered, with alloy pins. Capacities 1/3 through 150 metric tons. Look for the red pin... the mark of genuine Crosby quality. Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Charges for proof testing and certification available when requested at time of order. Hot dip galvanized or self colored. Fatigue rated. Shackles 25t and larger are RFID EQUIPPED. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B Approved for use at -40 F to 400 F. Bolt Type Anchor shackles with thin head bolt nut with cotter pin, meets the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D Type IVA, Grade A, Class 3. NOM. WORKING LOAD STOCK NO WEIGHT DIMENSIONS TOLERANCE +/- SIZE LIMIT* G-2130 EACH (TONS) GALV. S-2130 A B C D E F H L M N C A 3/16 1/3 ŧ /4 1/ /16 3/ / /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ /8 6-1/ / /8 9-1/ / /8 13-1/ / / / /2 120ŧ ŧ *NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. Individually Proof Tested with certification ŧ Furnished in Anchor style only and furnished with Round Head Bolts with welded handles 107 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

110 BOLT-TYPE CHAIN SHACKLE Bolt-Type Shackles G-2150 S-2150 Working Load Limit is permanently shown on every shackle. Forged quenched and tempered, with alloy pins. Capacities 1/2 through 85 metric tons. Look for the red pin... the mark of genuine Crosby quality. Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Charges for proof testing and certification available when requested at time of order. Hot dip galvanized or self colored. Fatigue rated. Shackles 25t and larger are RFID EQUIPPED. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B Approved for use at -40 F to 400 F. Bolt Type Chain shackles with thin hex head bolt nut with cotter pin, meets the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D Type IVB, Grade A, Class 3. NOM. SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (TONS) STOCK NO WEIGHT EACH DIMENSIONS TOLERANCE +/- G-2150 GALV. A-2150 S.C. A B D F G K M P R G A 1/4 1/ /16 3/ / /16 1-1/ / /8 3-1/ /4 4-3/ /8 6-1/ / /8 9-1/ / /8 13-1/ / / / *NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. Individually Proof Tested with certification WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

111 Alloy Bolt-Type Shackles BOLT-TYPE ANCHOR SHACKLE NOM. SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (TONS) G-2140 GALV. STOCK NO. S-2140 S.C. WEIGHT EACH 1-1/ / / / / ** G-2140 S-2140 Working Load Limit is permanently shown on every shackle. Alloy bows, alloy bolts. Quenched and tempered. Sizes 200 tons and larger are individually proof tested. Forged Alloy Steel 30 through 175 metric tons. Cast Alloy Steel 200 through 400 metric tons. Pins are galvanized and painted red. Sizes 1-1/2 and larger are RFID EQUIPPED. Approved use at -40 F to 400 F. NOM. SIZE WORKING LOAD LIM- IT* (TONS) DIMENSIONS TOLERANCE +/- A B C D +/-.02 E F G H J K L M N A E 1-1/ / / / / ** *NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit on 200 through 400 metric tons. For sizes 30 thru 175 metric tons, Minimum Ultimate Load is 5.4 times the Working Load Limit. **Cast Alloy Steel. Furnished with Round Head Bolts with welded handle. 109 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

112 Wide Body Shackles WIDE BODY SLING SAVER SHACKLES INCREASE SLING LIFE G-2160 Patented Greatly improves wearability of wire rope slings. Increase in shackle bow radius provides minimum 58% gain in sling bearing surface & eliminates need for a thimble. Increases usable sling strength minimum of 15%. Pin is non-rotating, with weld on handles for easier use. All ratings are in metric tons, embossed on side of bow. Sizes 400 tons and larger are tested to 1.33 times WLL. Standard 2160 shackles 400 tons and larger are individually proof tested with Crosby certification. Shackles requiring ABS, DNV, Lloyds and other certifications are available upon special request and must be specified at time of order. Weighs no more than conventionally designed shackles. All sizes quenched and tempered for maximum strength. Forged alloy steel from 7 tons through 1,550 metric tons. Cast alloy steel from 400 tons through 1,550 metric tons. All bows are furnished Dimetcoted. All pins are Dimetcoted then painted red. Conventional Shackle "Wide body" Shackle WLL (T)* G-2160 STOCK NO. S-2160 STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH A B +/-.25 C DIMENSIONS D +/-.02 E G H J K M N P R *7t-300t Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. 400t-1550t Prof Load is 1.33 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 4.5 times Working Load Limit. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

113 Easy-Loc CROSBY ALLOY EASY-LOC SHACKLES Quenched and tempered. RFID EQUIPPED Approved for use at -40 F to 400 F All sizes are individually proof tested to 2.0 times the Working Load Limit Furnished with Round Head bolts with an eyebolt for handling G-2140E NOMINAL SHACKLE SIZE WLL (TONS)* STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH *Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit. A B C DIMENSIONS TOLERANCE +/- D +/-.02 E F G H J K L M N A E 4-3/ CROSBY WIDE BODY EASY-LOC SHACKLES Quenched and tempered. RFID EQUIPPED Approved for use at -40 F to 400 F All sizes are individually proof tested to 2.0 times the Working Load Limit G-2160E Patented WLL (TONS)* STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH *Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit. A B +/-.25 C 111 DIMENSIONS D +/-.02 E G H J K M N P R WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

114 Sling Saver Web Sling Shackles SLING SAVER S-281 Web Sling Shackle is designed to connect Synthetic Web Slings and Synthetic Round Slings to eyebolts, pad eyes, and lifting logs. All Alloy Construction. Design Factor of 5 to 1. Each shackle has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it. Incorporates same ear spread and pin dimensions as conventional Crosby Shackles. Allows easy connection to pad eyes, eye bolts, and lifting lugs. Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an increased area for load distribution, thus: Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to standard anchor and chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved. Allowing better load distribution on internal fibers. Crosby products meet or exceed all the requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties & material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Look for the Red Pin... The mark of genuine Crosby Quality. S-281 WEB SLING SHACKLE ROUND WEB SLINGS* WORKING DIMENSIONS SLING SIZE (NO) WEBBING WIDTH EYE WIDTH PLY LOAD LIMIT (TONS) S-281 STOCK NO WEIGHT EACH A C D E K M N 1 & / / / & / *NOTE: Designed for use with Type III, (Eye & Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply web slings. For 3" and larger webbing width, tapered eye is required. NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements for minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Roundslings by the Web Sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2001). WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

115 Sling Saver Web Sling Shackles S-252 BOLT TYPE SLING SHACKLE All Alloy Construction. Design Factor of 5 to 1. Shackles available in size 3-1/4 to 50 tons. Each shackle has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with a WLL and the name Crosby forged into it. Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an increased area for load distribution, thus: Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to standard anchor & chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved. Allowing better load distribution on internal fibers. Crosby products meet or exceed all the requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load & temperature requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties & material traceability, not addressed by ASME B Shackles available in both a Screw Pin & Bolt, Nut & cotter pin configuration. Bolt (Pin) has a larger diameter that provides better load distribution. Look for the Red Pin... The mark of Genuine Crosby Quality. S-252 BOLT TYPE SLING SHACKLE S-253 SCREW PIN SLING SHACKLE 113 S-253 SCREW PIN SLING SHACKLE SLING ROUND DIMENSIONS EYE WIDTH SLING SIZE (NO) WLL (TONS)* S-252 STOCK NO WEIGHT EACH A B C D E F G H J K L M 1 1 & 2 3-1/ & 4 6-1/ & 6 8-3/ & / & / & *NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit. SLING EYE WIDTH ROUND SLING SIZE (NO) WLL (TONS)* S-252 STOCK NO WEIGHT EACH DIMENSIONS A B C D E G K L M N P R 1 1 & 2 3-1/ & 4 6-1/ & 6 8-3/ & / & / & *NOTE: Designed for use with Type III, (Eye & Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply web slings. For 3" and larger webbing width, tapered eye is required. NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements for minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Roundslings by the Web Sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2001). WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

116 Van Beest Green Pin Standard Shackles BOW SHACKLES WITH SCREW COLLAR PIN Material: bow and pin high tensile steel, Grade 6, quenched and tempered Safety Factor: MBL equals 6 x WLL Standard: EN and meets performance requirements of US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 Type IVA Class 2, Grade A from 2T and upward these shackles comply with ASME B30.26 G-4161 Finish: Hot dipped galvanized Temperature range: -40ºC up to + 200º C Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTC a,* DNV b,* DNV 2.22, CE * For shackles WLL 2 T G-4161 BOW SHACKLE WITH SCREW PIN WLL DIAMETER BOW DIAMETER PIN DIAMETER EYE WIDTH EYE WIDTH INSIDE LENGTH INSIDE WIDTH BOW LENGTH LENGTH BOLT WIDTH WEIGHT EACH TON A B C D E F G H I J LBS /16 1/4 1/2 3/16 3/8 7/8 5/8 1-13/32 1-5/32 1-1/ /4 5/16 21/32 9/32 15/32 1-5/32 25/ /32 1-1/2 1-11/ /16 3/8 25/32 11/32 17/32 1-1/4 7/8 2-7/ /32 1-9/ /8 7/16 7/8 13/32 21/32 1-7/16 1-1/32 2-1/2 2-1/8 1-13/ /16 1/2 1-1/32 7/16 3/4 1-11/16 1-5/ / / /2 5/8 1-11/32 1/2 7/ /4 3-1/2 2-7/8 2-9/ /8 3/4 1-9/16 5/8 1-1/ / / /32 3-1/2 2-15/ /4 7/8 1-13/16 3/4 1-7/ /32 4-1/16 3-1/ / /16 7/8 1-13/32 3-9/32 2-9/ / /16 4-1/ /8 2-5/16 31/ /16 3-3/4 2-11/ / / / /8 1-1/4 2-19/32 1-3/ /32 4-1/4 2-15/16 7-9/32 6-1/32 5-5/ /4 1-3/8 2-27/32 1-1/ /32 3-9/ / / / /8 1-1/2 3-5/32 1-3/8 2-1/4 5-1/4 3-5/8 8-15/16 7-5/16 6-3/ /2 1-5/8 3-15/32 1-1/2 2-3/8 5-3/4 3-29/ / / / / / / / /16 9-9/16 8-1/ /4 4-3/8 1-31/32 3-9/32 7-3/4 5-7/ / /32 9-3/ /4 2-9/16 5-1/8 2-1/4 3-3/4 8-3/4 6-5/ / / / /2 2-3/4 5-23/32 2-9/16 4-1/8 10-1/4 7-3/ / / / WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

117 Van Beest Green Pin Standard Shackles BOW SHACKLES WITH SAFETY BOLT Material: bow and pin high tensile steel, Grade 6, quenched and tempered Safety Factor: MBL equals 6 x WLL Standard: EN and meets performance requirements of US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 Type IVA Class 3, Grade A from 2 T and upward these shackles comply with ASME B30.26 G-4163 Finish: Hot dipped galvanized Temperature range: -40ºC up to +200º C Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTC a,* DNV b,* DNV 2.22, CE * For shackles WLL 2 T G-4163 BOW SHACKLE WITH SAFETY BOLT WLL DIAMETER BOW DIAMETER PIN DIAMETER EYE WIDTH EYE WIDTH INSIDE LENGTH INSIDE WIDTH BOW LENGTH LENGTH BOLT WIDTH THICKNESS NUT WEIGHT EACH TON A B C D E F G H I J K LBS 0.5 1/4 5/16 21/32 9/32 15/32 1-5/32 25/ / / /32 5/ /16 3/8 25/32 11/32 17/32 1-1/4 7/8 2-7/ /32 1-9/16 3/ /8 7/16 7/8 13/32 21/32 1-7/16 1-1/32 2-1/2 2-3/8 1-13/16 5/ /16 1/2 1-1/32 7/16 3/4 1-11/16 1-5/ /32 2-5/8 2 7/ /2 5/8 1-11/32 1/2 7/ /4 3-1/2 3-7/32 2-9/32 1/ /8 3/4 1-9/16 5/8 1-1/ / / / / /16 21/ /4 7/8 1-13/16 3/4 1-7/ /32 4-1/2 3-1/2 3/ / /16 7/8 1-13/32 3-9/32 2-9/ /32 5-1/8 4-1/32 7/ /8 2-5/16 31/ /16 3-3/4 2-11/ / / /32 31/ /8 1-1/4 2-19/32 1-3/ /32 4-1/4 2-15/16 7-9/ /32 5-5/32 1-1/ /4 1-3/8 2-27/32 1-1/ /32 3-9/ / /32 1-3/ /8 1-1/2 3-5/32 1-3/8 2-1/4 5-1/4 3-5/8 8-15/16 7-3/4 6-3/8 1-5/ /2 1-5/8 3-15/32 1-1/2 2-3/8 5-3/4 3-29/ / /16 6-7/8 3/ / / / / / / /16 8-1/2 29/ /4 4-3/8 1-31/32 3-9/32 7-3/4 5-7/ / /32 9-3/8 1-1/ /4 2-9/16 5-1/8 2-1/4 3-3/4 8-3/4 6-5/ / / /32 1-5/ /2 2-3/4 5-23/32 2-9/16 4-1/8 10-1/4 7-3/ / /32 1-1/ /4 6-3/8 2-7/ / / / / /8 1-17/ WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

118 Van Beest Green Pin Wide Mouth Shackle BOW SHACKLES WITH SAFETY BOLT Material: bow and pin alloy steel, Grade 8, quenched and tempered Safety Factor: MBL equals 6 x WLL Finish: Hot dipped galvanized G-4263 Temperature Range: -20 C up to 200 C Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTC a, CE G-4263 WIDE MOUTH BOW SHACKLE WITH SAFETY BOLT DIAMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER WIDTH WIDTH LENGTH WIDTH LENGTH THICKNESS WEIGHT WLL BOW PIN EYE EYE INSIDE INSIDE BOW LENGTH BOLT WIDTH NUT EACH TON A B C D E F G H I J K LBS / /16 7/8 2-15/ / / /16 6-3/16 5-3/16 7/ /8 2-5/16 31/ /16 5-5/16 4-1/8 8-1/32 7-7/32 6-3/32 31/ /8 1-1/4 2-19/32 1-3/32 3-7/ / / /32 8-1/ /32 1-1/ /4 1-3/8 2-27/32 1-1/4 3-17/32 6-3/8 4-31/32 9-3/4 8-13/ /32 1-3/ /8 1-1/2 3-1/8 1-3/8 3-15/16 7-3/32 5-1/ / /32 8-9/32 1-5/ /2 1-5/8 3-15/32 1-1/2 4-3/16 8-1/2 6-1/4 12-9/16 9-3/4 9-1/4 3/ / / / /4 6-7/8 14-9/ / /16 29/ /4 4-21/ /32 5-3/4 10-3/4 8-5/ / / /32 1-1/ /2 2-3/4 5-23/32 2-9/16 6-1/2 12-3/8 8-3/8 19-3/ / /2 1-1/ /4 3-1/4 6-15/32 3-9/32 7-1/ / / / / WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

119 Van Beest Green Pin Sling Shackles BOW SHACKLES WITH SAFETY BOLT Material: bow and pin alloy steel, Grade 8, quenched and tempered Safety Factor: MBL equals 5 x WLL Finish: shackle bow painted silver, pin painted green Temperature range: -20ºC up to +200º C Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTC b,*lros,* MPI b,* US b, CE * For shackles WLL 75 T P-6033 P-6033 SLING BOW SHACKLE WITH SAFETY BOLT WLL DIAMETER BODY DIAMETER PIN DIAMETER EYE WIDTH EYE WIDTH INSIDE LENGTH INSIDE WIDTH BOW LENGTH LENGTH BOLT WIDTH THICKNESS NUT BEARING SURFACE WEIGHT EACH TON A B C D E F G H I J K L LBS 7 7/8 7/8 1-13/16 3/4 1-9/ / / /32 4-5/16 3/4 1-5/ /8 1-1/8 2-3/ /4 4-3/4 3-1/4 7-3/4 5-15/16 5-3/4 15/16 2-1/ /8 1-3/8 2-23/32 1-3/16 2-1/8 5-13/16 4-1/ /32 6-7/8 7-3/32 1-5/ / / / /32 1-3/8 2-23/32 6-1/2 4-31/ /32 8-5/16 7-7/8 1-11/32 3-1/ / / /32 3-5/ /32 5-1/2 13-1/ /32 9-1/4 1-1/2 3-13/ /8 2-1/4 4-17/32 2-5/ /32 9-7/16 6-5/ / / /8 1-25/ / /16 2-3/4 4-29/32 2-1/8 4-11/ /32 7-9/ /8 12-7/ /32 2-1/8 4-23/ /32 3-5/32 6-1/ / / / / / / / / / /16 3-3/4 7-1/16 3-1/2 5-25/ / / / /8 17-3/ / / /32 4-1/8 7-27/ /16 6-7/ / / /8 18-1/ / /32 8-1/ / / / /32 7-1/ / / / / /8 2-3/8 9-7/ /16 5-9/ / / / / / / / /32 2-3/4 10-7/ /16 6-5/ / /32 9-3/ / / / / /32 3-5/ / /16 7-3/ /32 6-5/ / / / / / / / / /32 7-7/ / / /8 29-3/ / / / / / / /8 8-15/ / / / / /4 50-9/ / / / / /32 9-1/ /32 7-7/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /2 33-1/ / / / / / / /4 10-5/8 19-9/32 9-7/ / /2 24-3/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

120 LONG REACH SHACKLES CM Long Reach Shackle As one of the only manufacturers of long-reach shackles, we designed these shackles for use in construction applications where a longer reach is needed to attach to pick points. Screw Pin Design factor of 5:1 Meets the requirements of ASME B30.26 Alloy Steel WLL forged on body Do not point load. The load should be evenly distributed over The entire pin to achieve full working load limit. Bolt, Nut & Cotter SCREW PIN BOLT, NUT & COTTER PRODUCT CODE PRODUCT CODE DIMENSIONS SIZE WLL SELF COLORED PAINTED WEIGHT SELF COLORED PAINTED WEIGHT P D L W G 5/8 7,000 M7151 M7151P 1.80 M9151 M9151P /4 10,000 M7152 M7152P 2.72 M9152 M9152P ,000 M7154 M7154P 5.86 M9154 M9154P /4 28,000 M7156 M7156P M9156 M9156P /2 34,000 M7157 M7157P M9157 M9157P /4 50,000 M7177 M7177P M9177 M9177P WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

121 Skookum Shackles ALLOY ANCHOR SHACKLES NO. 263 NO. 264 NO. 320 NO. 330 Screw Pin Shackle Eyed Pin Screw Pin Shackle Hex Head Pin Screw Pin Shackle Towing Shackle Double Nut with or Marine Hex Head Locking Bolts B W L P D R Skookum Gold Standard Forgings All sizes are forged, quenched and tempered. Enamel, zinc plate or galvanized finish. Custom sizes & materials (stainless steel, etc.) are available upon request. Superior strength, hardness & uniformity. Size & working load permanently imprinted. Material heat codes imprinted on bale and pin. SPECIFICATIONS SIZE WLL 1 WEIGHT 2 STOCK NO. DIMENSIONS (TONS) D W L B R P 1/ ± ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± ± ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± ± ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± ± ± / ± ± ± ± Ton=2,000lbs - Design factor is 5 to 1. 2 Weights vary slightly with style of shackle pin used. Specifications subject to change without notice. 119 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

122 ALLOY CHAIN SHACKLES Skookum Shackles NO. 270 NO. 271 NO. 321 NO. 325 Screw Pin Shackle Eyed Pin Screw Pin Shackle Hex Head Pin Screw Pin Shackle Towing Shackle Double Nut with or Marine Hex Head Locking Bolts W L P D R Skookum Gold Standard Forgings All sizes are forged, quenched and tempered. Enamel, zinc plate or galvanized finish. Custom sizes & materials (stainless steel, etc..) are available upon request. Superior strength, hardness & uniformity. Size & working load permanently imprinted. Material heat codes imprinted on bale and pin. SPECIFICATIONS STOCK NO. SIZE WLL 1 WEIGHT 2 DIMENSIONS (TONS) D W L R P =/ ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± ± ± / ± ± / ± ± / ± ± ± ± / ± ± ± ± Ton=2,00lbs - Design factor is 5 to 1. 2 Weights vary slightly with style of shackle pin used. Specifications subject to change without notice. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

123 Skookum Shackles SHEET PILE SHACKLE The No. 59A shackles were specifically designed for pulling sheet piling. They are equipped with an easy opening pin which will not detach and become lost. No tools are required. Replacement pins must replaced or repaired by Skookum in Hubbard, OR. Max opening with pin in open (unlocked) position. Design factor is 5 to1. SPECIFICATIONS SIZE PART NO. WLL 1 (TONS) WEIGHT OPENING 2 J /4 1-1/ /8 1-1/ / /8 1-3/ / DIMENSIONS A B C D E F G H ± ± ± ± ± ± TON GROUND RELEASE SHEET PILE SHACKLE 159A GROUND RELEASE SHEET PILE SHACKLE COMES WITH 1 #320 SHACKLE NOT SHOWN IN PICTURE DESC PART NO. GROUND RELEASE REPAIR KIT K 12 ton 4:1 design factor. Equipped with Skookum 1" #320 bolt type anchor shackle Built with high strength steel. 12" lg. stainless steel release cable with thimble. Repair Kit Available 121 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

124 Sling Saver Fittings / Accessories HIGH PERFORMANCE SLING CONNECTOR IS DESIGNED TO CONNECT HIGH PERFORMANCE SYNTHETIC SLINGS OF ALL MATERIALS. S-237 Capacities available: Working Load Limit (5 to 1): 10,000 through 60,000 lbs. Sling body Widths: 3" through 6" Allows easy connection to master links or eye hooks, and is ideal for bridles Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an increased area for load distribution, thus: Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to master links, shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved. All alloy construction. Design factor of 5 to 1. Individually Proof Tested at 2.5 times Working Load Limit. Each connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability, along with a frame size, and the name Crosby and USA in raised letters. S-238 S-237 HIGH PERFORMANCE SLING CONNECTOR WLL S-237 WEB TO LOK-A-LOY NOMINAL SLING WEIGHT DIMENSIONS 4:1 5:1 ASSY. STOCK FRAME BODY LOK-A-LOY EACH * NO. NO. WIDTH SIZE A B C E G H L N R S W / / / / / *Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit at 4:1 design factor. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times Working Load Limit. Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements of the minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Round Slings by the web sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2010) S-238 HIGH PERFORMANCE SLING CONNECTOR WLL S-238 WEB TO WEB ASSEMBLY STOCK NO. FRAME NO. NOMINAL SLING BODY WIDTH LOK-A-LOY SIZE WEIGHT EACH DIMENSIONS A B C E G H K M W / / / / / / *Maximum Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit at 4:1 design factor. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times Working Load Limit. Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements of the minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Round Slings by the web sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2010) WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

125 Sling Saver Fittings/Accessories Designed around the same concept as our S-280 Web Connector, the S-282 Chain Connector makes the connection from your web sling to existing chain quick & easy. S-282 WEB/CHAIN CONNECTOR Available in three sizes: 3-1/4 ton Working Load Limit - 2" Webbing to 3/8" (10mm) chain. 4-1/2 ton Working Load Limit - 1-1/2" (3" Tapered Webbing) to 1/2" (13mm) chain. 6-1/2 ton Working Load Limit - 2" (4" Tapered Webbing) to 5/8" (16mm) chain. Alloy Steel (Quenched and Tempered) Each Connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it. Uses same spool & cover as S-280 Web Connector. Replacement Kit for Spool & Web Cover available. ROUND WEB SLINGS* S-282 WEIGHT DIMENSIONS SLING SIZE (NO) WEBBING WIDTH EYE WIDTH PLY CHAIN SIZE WLL (TONS)** STOCK NO EACH B C E F 1 & /8 3-1/ /2 4-1/ /8 6-1/ NOTE: Designed for use with Type III, (Eye & Eye), Class 7,2 Ply web slings. **NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Average straightening load (ultimate load) is 5 times the Working Load Limit. S-287 CHOKER HOOK Available in 2 sizes: 3-1/4 tons (2" webbing) and 4-1/2 tons (3" webbing). Each Connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for materials traceability along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it. Special design of hook protects the synthetic sling when dropped or dragged. Design factor of 5 to 1. Forged Alloy steel - Quenched & Tempered. Designed to reduce friction, abrasion, & fraying in choker area. Use same spool and cover as S-280 Web Connector. Replacement Kit for Spool and Web Cover available. ROUND WEB SLINGS* S-287 WEIGHT DIMENSIONS SLING SIZE (NO) WEBBING WIDTH EYE WIDTH PLY WLL (TONS)** STOCK NO EACH A B C D E F G H J AA 1 & / / *NOTE: Designed for use with Type III, (Eye & Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply web slings. For 3" and larger webbing width, tapered eye is required. NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements for minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Roundslings by the Web Sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2001). 123 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

126 Sling Saver Synthetic Sling Hooks WS-320A SYNTHETIC SLING HOOK Hook capacity available: 1-1/2, 3, and 5 tons. All Alloy construction. Design factor of 5 to 1. Each hook has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with a working load limit and the name Crosby forged into it. Originally designed for 2-Ply Web slings, the Crosby Web Sling hook can also be used with Round Slings as long as the Working Load Limit ratings are compatible. The new hook incorporates the following features.: Eye is designed with a wide beam surface which: Eliminates bunching effects. Reduces sling tendency to slide. Allows a better load distribution on internal fibers. All hooks feature Crosby's patented QUIC-CHECK indicators. Hook Web Sling Eye width available: 1", 2", and 3". Fatigue rated to 20,000 cycles at 1-1/2 times the WLL. WEB SLING EYE WIDTH ROUND SLING SIZE (NO) WLL (TONS) WS-320A STOCK NO WSL-320A WITH LATCH WEIGHT EACH HOOK ID CODE S-4320 REP LATCH / FA HA IA HOOK ID CODE WLL (TONS)* DIMENSIONS A B C D F G H J K L M N O P Q T AA FA 1-1/ HA IA *NOTE: Designed for use with Type III, (Eye & Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply web slings. For 3" and larger webbing width, tapered eye is required. NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements for minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Roundslings by the Web Sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2001). WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

127 Sling and Hoist Hooks SLING & HOIST HOOKS WARNINGS & APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS S-319 S-320 S-320N S-322! WARNING Loads may disengage from hook if proper procedures are not followed. A falling load may cause serious injury or death. See OSHA Rule (g)(1)(i)(A) and (g)(4) (iv)(b) for personnel hoisting by cranes and derricks, and OSHA Directive CPL Interim Inspection Procedures During Communication Tower Construction Activities. A Crosby 319, 320 or 322 hook with a PL latch attached and secured with a bolt, nut and cotter pin (or toggle pin) may be used for lifting personnel. A Crosby 319N, 320N or 322N hook with an S-4320 latch attached and secured with cotter pin or bolt, nut and pin; or a PL-N latch attached and secured with toggle pin may be used for lifting personnel. A hook with a Crosby SS-4055 latch attached shall NOT be used for personnel lifting. See OSHA Directive CPL Crosby does not recommend the placement of lanyards directly into the positive locking Crosby hook when hoisting personnel. Crosby requires that all suspension systems (vertical lifelines/ lanyard) shall be gathered at the positive locked load hook by use of a master link, or a bolt-type shackle secured with cotter pin. Threads or Split-Nut may corrode and/or strip and drop the load. Remove securement nut to inspect or to replace S-322 and S-3319 bearing washers (2). Hook must always support the load. The load must never be supported by the latch. Never apply more force than the hook's assigned Working Load Limit (WLL) rating. Read and understand these instructions before using hook ZONE B i.e., Backhoe Bucket 2/3 2/3 45 O 45 O 45 O 45 O ZONE C 60 O 60O ZONE A Side Load WRONG ZONE A: REPAIR NOT REQUIRED ZONE B: 10% OF ORIGINAL DIMENSION ZONE C: 5% OF ORIGINAL DIMENSION ZONE D: SEE MINIMUM THREAD SIZE Side Load WRONG Figure 1 Figure 2 Back Load WRONG Tip Load WRONG RIGHT WRONG Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 *For two legged slings with angles greater than 90, use an intermediate link such as a master link or bolt type shackle to collect the legs of the slings. The intermediate link can then be placed over the hook to provide an in-line load on the hook. This approach must also be used when using slings with three or more legs. ZONE B ZONE A ZONE C ZONE D 125 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

128 SLING & HOIST HOOKS WARNINGS & APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS Sling and Hoist Hooks QUIC-CHECK Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK features: Deformation Indicators - Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e., tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or halfinch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage. Angle Indicators - Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs. Important Safety Information Read & Follow A visual periodic inspection for cracks, nicks, wear, gouges and deformation as part of a comprehensive documented inspection program, should be conducted by trained personnel in compliance with the schedule in ANSI For hooks used in frequent load cycles or pulsating loads, the hook and threads should be periodically inspected by Magnetic Particle or Dye Penetrant. (Note: Some disassembly may be required.) Never use a hook whose throat opening has been increased, or whose tip has been bent more than 10 degrees out of plane from the hook body, or is in any other way distorted or bent. Note: A latch will not work properly on a hook with a bent or worn tip. Never use a hook that is worn beyond the limits shown in Figure 1. Remove from service any hook with a crack, nick, or gouge. Hooks with a nick or gouge shall be repaired by grinding lengthwise, following the contour of the hook, provided that the reduced dimension is within the limits shown in Figure 1. Contact Crosby Engineering to evaluate any crack. Remove from service any hook which has threads corroded more than 20% of the nut engagement length. Never repair, alter, rework, or reshape a hook by welding, heating, burning, or bending. Never side load, back load, or tip load a hook.(side loading, back loading and tip loading are conditions that damage and reduce the capacity of the hook). (See Figure 2.) Eye hooks, shank hooks and swivel hooks are designed to be used with wire rope or chain. Efficiency of assembly may be reduced when used with synthetic material. Do not swivel the S-322 or S-3319 swivel hooks while supporting a load. These hooks are distinguishable by hex nuts and flat washers. The S-3322 swivel hook is designed to rotate under load. The S-3322 is distinguishable from the S-322 by use of a round nut designed to shield bearing. The frequency of bearing lubrication on the S-3322 depends upon frequency and period of product use as well as environmental conditions, which are contingent upon the user's good judgment. The use of a latch may be mandatory by regulations or safety code e.g., OSHA, MSHA, ASME 830, Insurance, etc.. (Note: When using latches, see instructions in Understanding: The Crosby Group Warnings for further information.) Always make sure the hook supports the load. (See Figure 3). The latch must never support the load (See Figure 4). When placing two (2) sling legs in hook, make sure the angle from the vertical to the outermost leg is not greater than 45 degrees, and the included angle between the legs does not exceed 90 degrees* (See Figure 5). Reference Crosby's Hoist Hook Warning and Application information for basic machining and minimum thread size. See ASME Hooks for additional information. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

129 Hoist Hooks SHANK HOOKS! SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION S-319 The most complete line of shank hoist hooks. Available 3/4 to 300 tons. Available in carbon steel, alloy steel, and bronze. Quenched and Tempered. Proper design, careful forging and precision controlled quench and tempering give maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk. Every Crosby Shank Hook has a pre-drilled cam which can be equipped with a latch. Even years after purchase of the original hook, latch assemblies can be added. Load Rating code stamped on each hook (Refer to Hook Identification Code columns below). S-319N WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (TONS) SHANK HOOK STOCK NO. REP. LATCH KITS STOCK NO. CARBON ALLOY BRONZE HOOK ID CODE CARBON S-319C S-319CN ALLOY S-319A S-319AN BRONZE S-319BN SHANK LENGTH TYPE WEIGHT EACH S-4320 PL SS /4 1.5 D Std /2.6 F Std / G Std H Std I Std J Std / K Std L Std N Std O Std O Long P Std P Long S Std S Long T Std T Long U Std U Long W Std W Long X Std Y Std Z Std Proof Load is 2 Times Working Load Limit. All carbon hooks designed with 5/1 design factor. All alloy hooks 1-22t designed with a 4.5/1 design factor. All alloy hooks 30t and larger designed with a 4/1 design factor. All bronze hooks designed with a 4/1 design factor. New 319 style hook. See column Y for actual shank length on next page 127 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

130 Hoist Hooks Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK features. Deformation Indicators Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook up, which allow for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage. Angle Indicators Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs. S-319 Continued DIMENSIONS HOOK ID CODE D F G H J K L M O P R T X Y Z AA** D F G H I J K L N O O P P S S T T U U W W X Y Z /4TC -22TA Dimensions shown are for S-4320 latch kits. Dimensions for sizes 20 ton carbon and larger are for PL Latch Kits. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

131 Sling and Hoist Hooks EYE HOOKS! SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION S-320 All Crosby 320 Eye Hoist Hooks incorporate the following features: Designed with 5:1 Design Factor. Proper design, careful forging and precision controlled quenched and tempering give maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk. Pre-drilled cam which can be equipped with a latch. Eye hooks are load rated. Available in carbon steel and alloy steel. Strategically placed markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK features. (See following page) Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. Low profile hook tip. Integrated latch (S-4320) meets the World class standard for lifting. Heavy duty stamped latch interlocks with the hook tip. High cycle, long life spring. When secured with proper cotter pin through the hole in the tip of the hook, meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g) for personnel hoisting. L-320N WLL* (TONS) CARBON L-320C L-320CN S.C. EYE HOOK STOCK NO. ALLOY L-320A L-320AN S.C. REPLACEMENT LATCH KITS CARBON CARBON ALLOY WEIGHT S-4320 CARBON ALLOY HOOK ID CODE S-320C S.C. G-320C GALV. S320A S.C. EACH STOCK N0. PL STOCK NO. SS-4055 STOCK NO. 3/4 1 D /2 F /2 2 G H I J /2 11 K L N O P S T *Eye Hooks (3/4TC - 22TA), Proof load is 2.5 times Working Load Limit. Eye Hooks (20TC - 60TA), Proof Load is 2 times Working Load Limit. All carbon hooks average straightening loads (ultimate load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 1 ton through 22 ton average load) is 4.5 times Working Load Limit. New 320N style hook. 129 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

132 Sling and Hoist Hooks! SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK features. Deformation Indicators Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook up, which allow for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage. Angle Indicators Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs. S-320 Continued DIMENSIONS HOOK ID* C D F G J K M N O O2 Q T T2 AA D F G H I J K L N O P S T *Eye Hooks (3/4TC - 22TA), Proof load is 2.5 times Working Load Limit. Eye Hooks (20TC - 60TA), Proof Load is 2 times Working Load Limit. All carbon hooks average straightening loads (ultimate load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 30 tons through 60 tons average straightening load (ultimate load) is 4.5 times Working Load Limit. 3/4C-22TA dimensions shown are for S-4320 Latch Kits. Dimensions for sizes 20 ton carbon and larger are for PL Latch Kits. Dimension are for PL-N Latch Kits. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

133 Swivel Hooks S-322 CN/S-322 AN Forged - Quenched and Tempered. Load rating codes stamped on each hook. 322 Swivel Hooks use the same load rating code as 319 Shank Hooks, (review proper Hook Identification Codes). Proper design, careful forging, and precision controlled quench and tempering gives maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk. Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK FEATURES: Deformation Indicators Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage. Angle Indicators Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two slings legs. WLL (TONS)* CARBON ALLOY This hook is a positioning device and is not intended to rotate under load. Use in corrosive environment requires shank and nut inspection in accordance with A.S.M.E. B (b)(2)(c) U.S. Patents 5,381,650 & 5,193,480 & 5,103,755 and foreign equivalents. STOCK NO S-322 CN STOCK NO S322 AN WEIGHT EACH DIMENSIONS A B C D F G H J K L M O R S AA 3/ / / / *NOTE: Carbon swivel hooks.75tc-15tc: proof load is 2 times working load limit. Designed with a 5 to 1 design factor. Alloy swivel hooks 1.5tA-22tA : proof load is 2.5 times the working load limit. Designed with a 4.5 to 1 design factor. Alloy swivel hooks 30tA: proof load is 2 times working load limit. Designed with a 4 to 1 design factor. Dimensions for hooks 3/4 ton carbon thru 22 ton alloy are for S-4320 latch kits. Dimensions for hooks 30 ton alloy are for PL latch kit. WARNING: SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION PRIOR TO USE! REP LATCH STOCK NO 131 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

134 S-3322 SWIVEL HOOKS WITH BEARING Swivel Hooks New anti-friction bearing design allows hook to rotate freely under load. Capacities ranging from 2 through 15 metric tons. Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Proper design, careful forging, and precision controlled quench and tempering gives maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk. Low profile hook tip designed to utilize Crosby S-4320 or PL-N latch kit. Simply purchase the latch assemblies. Even years after purchase of the original hook, latch assemblies can be added. S-3322 hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK FEATURES: Deformation Indicators Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage. Angle Indicators Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two slings legs. For other swivel hooks designed to rotate under load, see page 95, 103, 106, Use in corrosive environment requires shank and nut inspection in accordance with A.S.M.E. B (b)(2)(c) U.S. Patents 5,381,650 & 5,193,480 & 5,103,755 and foreign equivalents. WLL (TONS)* S-3322 STOCK NO L-3322 STOCK NO WEIGHT EACH DIMENSIONS A B C D F G H J K L M O R S AA REP LATCH STOCK NO * NOTE: Proof load is 2.5 times the working load limit. Designed with a 4.5 to 1 design factor. Supplied with latch attached. WARNING: SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION PRIOR TO USE! WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

135 Grab Hooks H-330 CLEVIS GRAB HOOK Forged Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Design factor is 4:1. Features quick and easy assembly. H-330 designed for Crosby Spectrum 4 chain A-330 designed for Crosby Spectrum 7 chain CHAIN STOCK NO. WLL WEIGHT DIMENSIONS SIZE H-330 CARBON A-330 ALLOY* H-330 CARBON A-330 ALLOY EACH A B C D E G H K L N P R 1/ * / * / * / / * / / H-323 EYE GRAB HOOK Forged Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Design factor is 4:1. Features quick and easy assembly. H-323 designed for Crosby Spectrum 4 chain A-323 designed for Crosby Spectrum 7 chain CHAIN STOCK NO. WLL WEIGHT DIMENSIONS SIZE H-323 CARBON A-323 ALLOY* H-323 CARBON A-323 ALLOY EACH A B C D E G K L N R 1/ * / * / * / * / * / * These A-330 hooks are forged with an 8 designating Grade 80, and are suitable for use with Grade 8 chain in overhead lifting applications as long as hook is proof-tested as part of the chain sling assembly or as an individual component per ASME B30.9. We recommend the use of the A-338 which is proof tested and supplied with proof test certificate. 133 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

136 Crosby Shur-Loc Hooks S-1326 Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Individually Proof Tested at 2-1/2 times the 4:1 Working Load Limit with certification. Recessed trigger design is flush with the hook body, protecting the trigger from potential damage. Easy to operate with enlarged thumb access. Positive Lock Latch is Self-Locking when hook is loaded. Rated for both Wire Rope and use with Grade 80/100 Chain. G-414 Heavy Thimble should be used with wire rope slings. Trigger Repair Kit available (S-4316). Consists of spring, roll pin and trigger. S Swivel Hook utilizes anti-friction bearing design which allows hook to rotate freely under load. Fatigue rated The SHUR-LOC hook, if properly installed and locked, can be used for personnel lifting applications and meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g)(1)(i)(A) and (g)(4)(iv)(b). S S-1326 Swivel Hooks Suitable for infrequent, non-continuous rotation under load. CHAIN SIZE GRADE WIRE ROPE DIMENSIONS 100 ALLOY XXIP IWRC S-1326 WEIGHT CHAIN WLL MECHANICAL SPLICE STOCK EACH IN MM 4:1* WLL 5:1* NO. A B C D E F H J L AA** /4-5/ / / / / / * Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit. ** Deformation indicators. S Swivel Hooks Suitable for frequent rotation under load. CHAIN SIZE GRADE WIRE ROPE DIMENSIONS IN MM 100 ALLOY CHAIN WLL 4:1* XXIP IWRC MECHANICAL SPLICE WLL 5:1* S STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH A B C D E F H J L AA** /4-5/ / / / * Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit. ** Deformation indicators. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

137 Crosby Shur-Loc Hooks S-1316 All SHUR-LOC hooks have the following features: Recessed trigger design is flush with the hook body, protecting the trigger from potential damage. Easy to operate with enlarged thumb access. Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. Positive Lock Latch is Self-Locking when hook is loaded. The SHUR-LOC hook, if properly installed and locked, can be used for personnel lifting applications and meets the intent of OSHA Rule (g) (4) (iv) (B). Eye Style incorporates these added features: Individually Proof Tested to 2-1/2 times the WLL with certification. Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. 25% stronger than Grade 80. Suitable for use with Grade 100 and Grade 80 chain. Designed with Engineered Flat to connect to S-1325 chain coupler. S-1317 S-1316 Eye Hook CHAIN SIZE WEIGHT DIMENSIONS S-1316 EACH (MM) WLL * STOCK NO A C D E F H J L AA /4-5/ / / / / / * Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit. S-1317 Clevis Hooks CHAIN SIZE S-1317 WEIGHT DIMENSIONS WLL STOCK EACH (MM) * NO C D E G J L AA / / / / / / / * Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit. 135 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

138 HOOKS SNAP REPLACEMENT SORTING BARREL Hooks A-350 FORGED ALLOY STEEL through 3/4". Wide throat to take heavy thimbles * Ultimate Load is 5 times Safe Working Load. When ordering, EYE diameter ( C ) should be specified. SLIDING CHOKER HOOKS Quenched & Tempered SINGLE PART ROPE SIZE EIGHT PART ROPE SIZE SAFE WORKING LOAD* DIMENSIONS A C E L WEIGHT EACH 3/8 2, /16 5/8 5/8 4-9/ /2 1/8 3, /4 3/4 25/ / /8 3/16 5, /16 3/4 OR 1 5/16 6-3/ /4 1/4 8, /8 1 OR 1-7/16 1-5/ / G-3315 Pressed steel latches and stain less steel springs, bolts and nuts. Safe Working Loads shown are based on Ultimate Load that is 4 times the Safe Working Load. SNAP HOOKS Forged Steel, Quenched & Tempered HOOK SIZE SAFE WORKING LOAD INSIDE DIAM. OF EYE TROAT OPENING LENGTH OVERALL WEIGHT POUNDS PER 100 7/ /4 3/4 3-15/ /16 1, /8 13/16 4-3/ S-3316 A-378 Easily attached to any hoist with welded link load chain and roller chain or wire rope with suitable end fitting. Spring latch, latch bolt with self locking nut stainless steel. Nuts cadmium plated brass. For chain and electric hoists with swivel jaw-forged. REPLACEMENT HOOKS Quenched & Tempered SIZE HOIST (TONS) Deep straight throat permits efficient handling of flat plates or large cylindrical shapes. The long tapered point allow easy grab in rings, pear links, eye bolts or lifting holes. Ultimate load is 5 times the Safe Working Load. WIDTH BETWEEN JAWS DIAM. BOLT OVERALL LENGTH THROAT OPENING WEIGHT EACH 1/2 9/16 3/8 6-1/8 31/ /16 7/ /16 1-1/ SORTING HOOKS Safe Working Load at Tip Safe Working Load at Bottom of Hook 2 TON 7-1/2 TON Overall Length 9-11/16" I.D. of Eye 1-3/8" Opening at Top of Hook 2-13/16" Radius at Bottom of Hook 5/8" Weight Each Forged Alloy Steel Quenched & Tempered 6.42 LBS S-377 Forged Carbon Steel BARREL HOOKS Quenched & Tempered I.D. of Eye 1-9/16" Meets the performance requirements of Federal O.D. of Eye 2-13/16" Specification RR-C-271F, Type V, Class 6, except for those provisions required of the contractor. Over-all Length 5" Width of Lip 2-7/8" Weight Per Pair 3.56 LBS WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

139 Golden Gate Hooks GOLDEN GATE HOOKS The 6 connector styles shown below make it possible for Crosby to furnish a Golden Gate Hook to fit almost any make or model of hoisting equipment including American Engineering Lo-Hed, ARO, Coffing, Electro Lift, Ingersoll-Rand, P & H, Robbins and Myers, Shepard Niles, CM, Shaw-Box, Wright, Yale & Towne. CLOSED SWIVEL BAIL For use where hoisting line or shackle can be inserted into the bail. Suitable for infrequent, non continuous rotation under load. Hook sizes: 1 through 14 SHANK-TYPE HOOK (Standard Length) For use on existing load blocks, with standard shank length. Hook sizes: 2 through 14 SHANK-TYPE HOOK (Long Length) For use on existing load blocks requiring extra shank. Hook sizes: 4 through 17 Style C - with self-closing gate. Style A - with manual-closing gate. Style D - with self-closing gate. Style B - with manual-closing gate. Style K - with self-closing gate. Style I - with manual-closing gate. UNIVERSAL TYPE Open swivel bail for attachment to link chain. Suitable for infrequent, non continuous rotation under load. Hook sizes: 3, 4 & 5 LINK CHAIN NEST With ball-bearing swivel; attaches to chain by an alloy pin. Suitable for frequent rotation under load. Hook sizes: 4, 5 & 6 ROLLER CHAIN NEST Attachment with ball-bearing swivel and full-floating connector. Suitable for frequent rotation under load. Hook sizes: 4, 5 & 6 Style E - with self-closing gate. Style G - with manual-closing gate. Style O - with self-closing gate. Style P - with manual-closing gate. Style S - with self-closing gate. Style R - with manual-closing gate. Letter designations shown beneath each illustration above indicate BOTH connector style and gate type. Each connector is available with either a self-closing or manual-closing gate. (e.g.: A size 4 hook with a closed swivel bail connector and self-closing gate is 4-C; with manual-closing gate, it is 4-A.) 137 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

140 Clevises T U W P D N T A Material: Threads: Finish: Options: C-1035 and SA-182-F-11 in stock U.N.C. Class 2B, Right or Left Hand Self-Colored, Galvanized, Plated Stainless Steel; Other Alloys; Special Threading Maximum working loads have been established with a safety factor of 5:1 using the maximum pin diameter, the resulting net area of the eye at the pin hole, and the expected ultimate tensile strength of C-1035 steel. The maximum tap size (U dimension) shown in Table I is for reference purposes only. It should be used only to determine the largest tap diameter the clevis can accommodate without considering the pin diameter. Use Table II to select the proper combination of tap size and pin diameter for any given size of clevis. Clevis sizes in Table II for any given tap size and pin diameter combination are based upon the net area of the eye at the pin hole being equal to or greater than 125% of the net area at the minor diameter of a round rod without upset ends, threaded Unified National Coarse Series. For any combination of tap size and pin diameter shown, the pin in double shear will develop the strength of the rod if both the rod and pin are made from steel having the same physical properties. The pin must be investigated for bending, however; and if inadequate, a larger diameter pin selected. Pins supplied with clevises by Cleveland City Forge are made from steel having a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 58,000 pounds per square inch, unless otherwise specified. If the pin is made from steel with physical properties lower in value than the steel used for the rod, the pin may not develop the strength of the rod in either shear or bending; requiring a larger diameter pin. Some combinations of tap size and pin diameter shown will not develop the maximum working load of the clevis shown in Table I. Selection of the rod and pin, the material from which both are made, as well as the clevis size adequate to meet the required design load is the responsibility of the purchaser or user. Load imposed upon the clevis should not exceed the maximum working load values shown in Table I. DIAMETER OF TAP Inches TABLE I STANDARD CLEVIS DIMENSIONS Inches CLEVIS NO. D N U MAX. W TOLERANCE A P MAX. MAX WORKING LOAD KIPS TABLE II DIAMETER OF PIN Inches 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1¼ 1½ 1¾ 2 2¼ 2½ 2¾ 3 3¼ 3½ 3¾ 4 4¼ WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE WGT. EACH LBS /16 5/8 5/8 1-1/16 5/16 + 1/ /16 3/4 3-1/ /2 2-1/2 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/4 5/16 + 1/ /2 7-1/2 2-1/ /4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1/2 + 1/32-1/32 5-1/16 1-3/ /2 3-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1/2 + 1/16-1/ /4 1-3/4 2 1/2 + 1/16-1/ /16 2-1/ /4 2-1/8 2-1/2 5/8 + 3/ /2 37-1/ /4 2-1/2 3 3/4 + 3/ /2 7/8 + 1/8-1/ /4 68-1/ /2 + 1/8-1/ /8 4-1/ / / / ½ 2½ 2½ 2½ 3/4 2½ 2½ 2½ 2½ 2½ 7/8 2½ 2½ 2½ 3½ / ½ 1-1/ ½ 1-3/ ½ 3½ 4 1-1/2 3½ 3½ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

141 Wedge Sockets WEDGE SOCKET WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS Extended Wedge Socket Assembly U.S. Patent No. 5,553,360 S-421T THE TERMINATOR NOTE: Existing Crosby S-421 Wedge Sockets can be retrofitted with the New Terminator Wedge. New QUIC-CHECK Go and No-Go features cast into wedge. The proper size wire rope is determined when the following criteria are met: 1. The wire rope shall pass thru the Go hole in the wedge. 2. The wire rope shall NOT pass thru the No-Go hole in the wedge. Important Safety Information Read and Follow Inspection / Maintenance Safety Always inspect socket, wedge and pin before using. Do not use part showing cracks. Do not use modified or substitute parts. Repair minor nicks or gouges to socket or pin by lightly grinding until surfaces are smooth. Do not reduce original dimension more than 10%. Do not repair by welding. Inspect permanent assemblies annually, or more often in severe operating conditions. Assembly Safety Use only with standard 6 to 8 strand wire rope of designated size. For intermediate size rope, use next larger size socket. For example: When using 9/16" diameter wire rope use a 5/8" size Wedge Socket Assembly. Welding of the tail on the standard wire rope is not recommended. The tail length of the dead end should be a minimum of 6 rope diameters but not less than 6". (See Figure 1)! WARNING Use only if trained. Loads may slip and fall if the Wedge Socket is not properly installed. A failing load can seriously injure or kill. Read and understand these instructions before installing the Wedge Socket. Do not side load the Wedge Socket. Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire Rope in the socket. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. "No-Go" "Go" RIGHT *Tail Length Standard 6 to 8 strand wire rope Rotation Resistant Wire Rope A minimum of 6 rope diameters,but not less than 6". FIGURE 1 TABLE I *TAIL LENGTH A minimum of 20 rope diameters, but not less than 6". Rope Size 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/ /8 1-1/4 Clip Size 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/ /8 1-1/4 *Torque Ft./Lbs *The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication. To use with Rotation Resistant wire rope (special wire rope constructions with 8 or more outer strands) ensure that the dead end is welded, brazed or seized before inserting the wire rope into the wedge socket to prevent core slippage or loss of rope lay. The tail length of the dead end should be a minimum of 20 rope diameters but not less than 6". (See Figure 1) Properly match socket, wedge and clip (See Table I) to wire rope size. Align live end of rope, with center line of pin. (See Figure 1) Secure dead end section of rope. (See Figure 1) Tighten nuts on clip to recommended torque. (Table I) Do not attach dead end to live end or install wedge backwards. (See Figure 2) Use a hammer to seat Wedge and Rope as deep into socket as possible before applying first load. 139 WRONG Rope Backward WRONG Wedge Backward WRONG Tail Clipped to live Line FIGURE 2 Operating Safety Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire Rope in the socket. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Efficiency rating of the Wedge socket termination is based upon the catalog breaking strength of Wire Rope. The efficiency of a properly assembled Wedge Socket is 80%. During use, do not strike the dead end section with any other elements of the rigging (Called two-blocking). WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

142 Wedge Sockets THE TERMINATOR! SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION WIRE ROPE SIZE S-421T STOCK NO COMPLETE ASSEMBLY* S-421T WEIGHT EACH S-421TW STOCK NO. WEDGE ONLY WEDGE ONLY WEIGHT 3/ / / / / / / *Terminator Assembly includes Socket, Wedge, Pin and Wire Rope Clip. S-421T WEDGE SOCKETS S-421T U.S. Patent No. 5,553,360 and foreign equivalents Basket is cast steel. Individually magnetic particle inspected. Pin diameter and jaw opening allows wedge and socket to be used in conjunction with open swage and spelter sockets. Secures the tail or dead end of the wire rope to the wedge, thus eliminates loss or Punch out of the wedge. The TERMINATOR wedge eliminates the potential breaking off of the tail due to fatigue. The tail, which is secured by the base of the clip and the wedge, is left undeformed and available for reuse. Incorporates Crosby's patented QUIC-CHECK Go and No-Go feature cast into the wedge. The proper size rope is determined when the following criteria are met: 1. The wire rope should pass thru the Go hole in the wedge. 2. The wire rope should NOT pass thru the No-Go hole in the wedge. Utilizes standard Crosby Red-U-Bolt wire rope clip. Generates a minimum efficiency of 80% based on the catalog breaking strength of the wire rope. Standard S-421 wedge socket can be retrofitted with the new style TERMINATOR wedge. Available with Bolt, Nut and Cotter Pin. WIRE ROPE DIMENSIONS DIA. A B C +/-.09 D G H J K L P R S T U V 3/ / / / / / / Nominal For intermediate wire rope sizes use next larger size socket. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

143 Hook & Eye Turnbuckles HG-225 HOOK & EYE Hot Dip galvanized steel. End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing. Turnbuckle eyes are forged elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment in system and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4" through 2-1/2", a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through eye. Turnbuckle hooks are forged with a greater cross sectional area that results in a stronger hook with better fatigue properties. TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY. Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. Body has UNC threads. Lock Nuts available for all sizes. Meet or exceed all requirements of ASME B D J OPEN K CLOSED A R F S E CLOSED BB M OPEN N CLOSED X CLOSED Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-79 lb., Type 1, Form 1 CLASS 6, and ASTM F-1145, except for those provisions required of the contractor. THREAD DIAMETER & TAKE UP STOCK NO. GALV. WORKING LOAD LIMIT* WEIGHT EACH A D E CLOSED F J OPEN DIMENSIONS K CLOSED M OPEN N CLOSED R S X CLOSED 1/4 x /16 x 4-1/ /8 x /2 x /2 x /8 x /8 x /4 x /4 x /4 x /8 x x *Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. Mechanical Galvanized BB 141 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

144 Hook & Hook Turnbuckles Hot Dip galvanized steel. End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing. Turnbuckle hooks are forged with a greater cross sectional area that results in a stronger hook with better fatigue properties. TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY. Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. Body has UNC threads. Lock Nuts available for all sizes. Fatigue Rated. Meet or exceed all requirements of ASME B J OPEN HG-223 HOOK & HOOK D K CLOSED A F BB E CLOSED M OPEN N CLOSED Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-79 lb., Type 1, Form 1 CLASS 5, and ASTM F-1145, except for those provisions required of the contractor. THREAD DIAMETER & TAKE UP WORKING LOAD LIMIT* WEIGHT EACH *Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. Mechanical Galvanized DIMENSIONS STOCK NO. A D E CLOSED F J OPEN K CLOSED M OPEN N CLOSED BB 1/4 x /16 x 4-1/ /8 x /2 x /2 x /8 x /8 x /4 x /4 x /4 x /8 x x WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

145 Jaw & Eye Turnbuckles G J OPEN K CLOSED A R B S HG-227 JAW & EYE Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-79 lb., Type 1, Form 1 CLASS 8, and ASTM F-1145, except for those provisions required of the contractor. E CLOSED BB M OPEN N CLOSED X CLOSED Hot Dip galvanized steel. End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing. Turnbuckle eyes are forged elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment in system and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4" through 2-1/2", a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through eye. Forged jaw ends are fitted with bolts and nuts for 1/4" through 5/8", and pins and cotters on 3/4" through 2-3/4" sizes. TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY. Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. Body has UNC threads. Lock Nuts available for all sizes. THREAD DIAMETER & TAKE UP STOCK NO. GALV. WORKING LOAD LIMIT* WEIGHT EACH A B E CLOSED G 143 J OPEN DIMENSIONS K CLOSED M OPEN N CLOSED R S X CLOSED 1/4 x /16 x 4-1/ /8 x /2 x /2 x /2 x /8 x /8 x /8 x /4 x /4 x /4 x /4 x /8 x /8 x x x x x /4 x /4 x /4 x /2 x /2 x /2 x /4 x /4 x x /2 x /4 x *Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. Mechanical Galvanized BB WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

146 Eye & Eye Turnbuckles J OPEN K CLOSED A R S THREAD DIAMETER & TAKE UP HG-226 EYE & EYE Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-79 lb., Type 1, Form 1 CLASS 4, and ASTM F-1145, except for those provisions required of the contractor. STOCK NO. GALV. WORKING LOAD LIMIT* WEIGHT EACH A J OPEN K CLOSED M OPEN N CLOSED DIMENSIONS WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE M OPEN N CLOSED R S X CLOSED Hot Dip galvanized steel. End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing. Turnbuckle eyes are forged elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment in system and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4" through 2-1/2", a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through eye. TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY. Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. Body has UNC threads. Lock Nuts available for all sizes. Fatigue Rated. X CLOSED 1/4 x /16 x 4-1/ /8 x /2 x /2 x /8 x /8 x /4 x /4 x /4 x /8 x /8 x x x x x /4 x /4 x /4 x /2 x /2 x /2 x /4 x /4 x x /2 x /4 x *Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. Mechanical Galvanized BB BB

147 Jaw & Jaw Turnbuckles G J OPEN K CLOSED A B THREAD DIAMETER & TAKE UP HG-228 JAW & JAW Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-79 lb., Type 1, Form 1 CLASS 7, and ASTM F-1145, except for those provisions required of the contractor. STOCK NO. GALV. WORKING LOAD LIMIT* WEIGHT EACH A E CLOSED B E CLOSED 145 G M OPEN N CLOSED Hot Dip galvanized steel. End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing. TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY. Forged jaw ends are fitted with bolts and nuts for 1/4" through 5/8", and pins and cotters on 3/4" through 2-3/4" sizes. Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. Body has UNC threads. Lock Nuts available for all sizes. Fatigue Rated. DIMENSIONS J OPEN K CLOSED M OPEN N CLOSED 1/4 x /16 x 4-1/ /8 x /2 x /2 x /2 x /8 x /8 x /8 x /4 x /4 x /4 x /4 x /8 x /8 x x x x x /4 x /4 x /4 x /2 x /2 x /2 x /4 x /4 x x /2 x /4 x *Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. Mechanical Galvanized BB BB WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

148 Wire Rope Thimbles STANDARD WIRE ROPE THIMBLES ROPE DIAMETER OVERALL LENGTH OVERALL WIDTH DIMENSIONS LENGTH INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE GALVANIZED STEEL INSIDE WIDTH OF SCORE WEIGHT POUNDS PER 100 1/ / / / / / / / / /8-1-1/ G-411 STANDARD Recommended for light duty service. G-411 meets Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type II. EXTRA HEAVY WIRE ROPE THIMBLES ROPE DIAMETER OVERALL LENGTH OVERALL WIDTH DIMENSIONS LENGTH INSIDE WIDTH INSIDE OVERALL THICK- NESS WEIGHT POUNDS PER 100 *1/ *5/ *3/ / *1/2-9/ *5/ *3/ / /8-1-1/ /4-1-3/ /8-1-1/ / / / / *Sizes available in Stainless (304) Steel. SOLID WIRE ROPE THIMBLES ROPE DIAMETER OVERALL LENGTH DIMENSIONS OVERALL WIDTH THICKNESS WEIGHT PER 100 1/ / / / / /4-1-3/ GALVANIZED AND STAINLESS STEEL G-414 and SS-414 STAINLESS STEEL EXTRA HEAVY Rugged rope thimbles recommended for heavy duty service. Thimbles G-414 meet Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type III. S-412 SOLID Fits open wire rope socket, boom pendant clevis, as well as wedge socket. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

149 Thimbles SLIP-THRU THIMBLE NEWCO SLIP-THRU THIMBLES are designed to allow passage of an identical thimble through its eye. This is a necessity when a regular sling is used as a choker sling. SLIP-THRU THIMBLES also prevent the eye of the sling from mashing together and the top of the eye wearing excessively. The generous inside dimensions allow the thimbles to fit large crane hooks. C D G B F A THIMBLE CODE SLING SIZE DIMENSIONS AND DATA DIMENSION SINGLE 8 PTS. 6 PTS. 4 PTS. A B C D E R F G *W-2 5/16-3/8 3/32-1/8 3/32-1/8 1/8-3/16 2-1/8 4-1/8 7/16 13/16 9/16 3-1/4 5-1/4 1.3 W-3 1/2-9/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 2-3/8 4-3/8 5/8 1 5/ W-4 5/8-3/4 1/4 1/4-5/16 5/16-1/8 3-3/8 6-5/8 13/16 1-5/16 5/8 5-3/8 8-1/ W-5 7/8-1 5/16 3/8 7/16-1/2 3-3/4 7-1/8 1-1/8 1-5/8 7/8 6-1/4 9-3/8 5.6 W-6 1-1/8-1-1/4 3/8 7/16 9/16-5/8 4-3/8 8-3/8 1-3/8 1-7/ / W-7 1-3/8-1-1/2 7/16-1/2 1/2 3/ /2 1-5/8 2-1/8 1-1/4 8-1/8 12-1/ W-8 1-5/8-1-3/4 9/16 5/8 7/8 6-3/4 11-3/4 1-13/16 2-9/16 1-7/16 9-3/8 14-3/ W-9 1-7/8-2 5/8 3/ /2 2-1/8 3-1/4 1-7/ /4 53 W /8-2-1/4 1/4 7/ /8-1-1/ /2 2-1/2 3-3/ /8 66 W /2-3 7/ /8 1-1/4-1-3/8-1-1/ /2 3-3/ /16 2-1/2 15-3/4 24-3/4 126 *Made from High Tensile Malleable. CRESCENT THIMBLE Designed to protect the bearing surface of a loop where a large dimension loop is necessary. The ears are tapered so that they can be bent over. Standard-Laid Rope Size 3/8" to 3". G A N F B E C D WT. THIMBLE CODE ROPE SIZE DIMENSIONS AND DATA 147 DIMENSION SINGLE 8 PTS. 6 PTS. 4 PTS. A B C D E F G H 6C 3/8-7/16 3-3/2-1/8 1/8 1/8-3/ /32 15/32 2-1/16 3/8 1/2 3/8.75 8C 1/2-9/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 2-1/4 1-1/8 1 5/8 2-1/2 1/2 1/2 1/ C 5/8 1/4 5/16 2-3/4 1-3/8 1-5/32 23/ /32 9/16 19/ C 3/4 1/4 5/16 3/8 3-1/4 1-5/8 1-5/16 13/16 3-1/2 5/8 5/8 5/ C 7/8 7/16 4-1/2 2-1/4 1-7/16 15/16 4-5/16 3/4 11/16 3/ C 1 5/16 3/8 1/2 4-1/2 2-1/4 1-9/16 1-1/ /32 13/16 3/4 7/ C 1-1/8 3/8 7/16 9/16 4-7/8 2-7/ /16 1-1/4 5-1/32 7/8 7/ C 1-1/4 7/16 1/2 5/8 5-1/2 2-3/4 2-1/16 1-7/16 5-3/4 15/16 15/16 1-1/ C 1-3/8-1-1/2 1/2 9/16 3/ /4 1-5/8 6-1/4 1-1/16 1-1/8 1-3/ C 1-5/8 9/16 5/8 6-1/2 3-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/4 6-11/16 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/ C 1-3/4-1-7/8 7/ /2 2-15/ /16 7-3/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/ C 2 5/8 3/ /2 3-3/16 2-3/ /16 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-5/ C 2-1/4-2-1/2 3/4-7/ /8-1-1/4 8-1/2 4-1/4 4-1/8 2-7/8 9-5/8 1-5/8 1-7/ C 2-3/ / /8 3-3/8 11-1/4 1-3/4 2-1/4 2-1/ *Made from High Tensile Malleable. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND ARE APPROXIMATE. WT. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

150 Open Spelter Sockets GROOVED OPEN SPELTER SOCKETS NOTICE: All cast steel sockets 1-5/8" and larger are magnetic particle inspected and ultrasonic inspected. Proof testing available on special order. G-416/S-416 Forged Steel Sockets thru 1-1/2", cast alloy steel 1-5/8" thru 4". Spelter socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100%, based on the catalog strength of wire rope. Ratings are based on recommended use with 6 x 7, 6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope. Note: Above drawing illustrates one groove used on sockets 1/4" thru 3/4". Sizes 7/8" thru 1-1/2" use 2 grooves. Sizes 1-5/8" and larger use 3 grooves. ROPE STRUCTURAL STOCK NO. WEIGHT DIMENSIONS DIAMETER STRAND DIAM. G-416 GALV. S-416 S.C. EACH A C D F G H J L M N 1/ /16-3/ /16-1/ /16-5/8 1/ /4 9/16-5/ /8 11/16-3/ /16-7/ /8 15/ /4-1-3/8 1-1/16-1-1/ /2 1-3/16-1-1/ *1-5/8 1-5/16-1-3/ *1-3/4-1-7/8 1-7/16-1-5/ *2-2-1/8 1-11/16-1-3/ *2-1/4-2-3/8 1-13/16-1-7/ *2-1/2-2-5/8 1-15/16-2-1/ *2-3/4-2-7/8 2-3/16-2-7/ *3-3-1/8 2-1/2-2-5/ *3-1/4-3-3/8 2-3/4-2-7/ *3-1/2-3-5/ / *3-3/ *Cast alloy steel WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

151 Closed Spelter Sockets GROOVED CLOSED SPELTER SOCKETS NOTICE: All cast steel sockets 1-5/8" and larger are magnetic particle inspected and ultrasonic inspected. Proof testing available on special order. G-417 Forged Steel Sockets thru 1-1/2", cast alloy steel 1-5/8" thru 4". Spelter socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100%, based on the catalog strength of wire rope. Ratings are based on recommended use with 6 x 7, 6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope. Closed Grooved Sockets meet the requirements of Federal Specifications RR-S-550D, Type B. Note: Above drawing illustrates one groove used on sockets 1/4" thru 3/4". Sizes 7/8" thru 1-1/2" use 2 grooves. Sizes 1-5/8" and larger use 3 grooves. ROPE DIAMETER STRUCTURAL STRAND DIAM. STOCK NO. WEIGHT DIMENSIONS G-417 GALV. S-417 S.C. EACH A B C D F G H J K L 1/ /16-3/ /16-1/ /16-5/8 1/ /4 9/16-5/ /8 11/16-3/ /16-7/ /8 15/ /4-1-3/8 1-1/16-1-1/ /2 1-3/16-1-1/ /8 1-5/16-1-3/ /4-1-7/8 1-7/16-1-5/ /8 1-11/16-1-3/ /4-2-3/8 1-13/16-1-7/ /2-2-5/8 1-15/16-2-1/ /4-2-7/8 2-3/16-2-7/ /8 2-1/2-2-5/ /4-3-3/8 2-3/4-2-7/ /2-3-5/ / / WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

152 Ideal for on-site applications Improved fatigue life For use on 416 & 417 Spelter Sockets only 100% termination efficiency Temperature operating range from -65 F to 240 F One Booster pack needed if pouring W416-7 temperature is 35 F to 48 F Two Booster packs needed if pouring temperature is 27 F to 35 F APPROXIMATE U.S. MEASUREMENTS 250cc Kit 1 Cup 500cc Kit 1 Pint 1,000cc Kit 1 Quart NATO NUMBERS 100cc cc cc ,000cc Witnessed and tested by American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Swage Buttons/Socket Compound WIRELOCK - RESIN FOR SPELTER SOCKETS WIRE ROPE SIZE AMOUNT OF WIRELOCK REQUIRED WIRELOCK REQUIRED (CC) WIRE ROPE SIZE WIRELOCK REQUIRED (CC) 1/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /8 495 W416-7 KITS BOOSTER KIT SIZE KIT PER CASE STOCK NO. WT. EACH PACK STOCK NO. 100 CC CC CC CC CC Low carbon steel Spherodize annealed Quality controlled Economical to use A multi-purpose fitting for many swaging applications. Manufactured from a special analysis high quality, low carbon steel, and later heat treated. They are precision made with constant quality control checks throughout all stages of manufacturing to assure the best in quality and performance. A D C E B BEFORE SWAGE AFTER SWAGE S-409 SWAGE BUTTONS ROPE DIMENSIONS ITEM DIAMETER A B C D E 1 SB 1/ SB 3/ SB 1/ SB 5/ SB 3/ SB 7/ SB 1/ SB 9/ SB 5/ SB 3/ SB 7/ SB SB 1-1/ SB 1-1/ NOTE: Length is measured from outside end of terminal. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

153 Open Swage Socket OPEN SWAGE SOCKET B C L A F N S-501 E D H Forged from special bar quality carbon steel, suitable for cold forming. M Hardness controlled by spheriodize annealing. Swage Socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100% based on the catalog strength of wire rope. NOTE: S-501 Swage Sockets are recommended for use with 6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope. STOCK NO. ROPE SIZE WEIGHT EACH S-501 OPEN SOCKET SPECIFICATIONS SWAGER / DIE DATA BEFORE SWAGE DIMENSIONS MAX STOCK NO. AFTER 500 TON SWAGE DIE 1000 TON 1500 TON 1500 DIM. DESCRIP TON 3000 TON TONS A B C D E F H L M N (SOCKET) 5 X 7 6 X 12 6 X 12 SIDE LOAD / / / /16-3/ / /16-3/ / /16-1/ / /16-1/ / /16-5/ / /16-5/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / TONS 6 X WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

154 Closed Swage Sockets CLOSED SWAGE SOCKET S-502 B D C Forged from special bar quality carbon steel, suitable for cold forming. E F L A H Hardness controlled by spheriodize annealing. Swage Socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100% based on the catalog strength of wire rope. NOTE: S-502 Swage Sockets are recommended for use with 6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope. S-502 CLOSED SOCKET SPECIFICATIONS BEFORE SWAGE DIMENSIONS SWAGER / DIE DATA STOCK NO. SIDE LOAD MAX ROPE WEIGHT AFTER SWAGE DIE 500 TON 1000 TON 1500 TON STOCK NO. SIZE EACH A B C D E F H L DIM. DESCRIP. (SOCKET) 1500 TON 5 X TON 6 X 12 TONS 6 X 12 TONS 6 X / / / /16-3/ / /16-3/ / /16-1/ / /16-1/ / /16-5/ / /16-5/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

155 Swaged Sockets SWAGED SOCKETS ASSEMBLIES In mechanically swaged fittings, high pressure presses and precision dies cause metal of the socket to flow around wires and strands to offer the ultimate in compactness and strength with minimum weight. Material is weldless, drop-forged steel. Normally, only regular lay rope is used. Swaged assemblies are interchangeable with *poured sockets up through 2" rope diameters. Assembly length is measured from centerline of pins for both open and closed sockets. When purchasing, indicate choice of end fittings by the suffixes OS or CS after the stock number, for open or closed type fittings. Pins and cotters are supplied as standard on open fittings, but assemblies may be specified without pins. Fittings are assembled in the same plane unless specified otherwise when ordered. OS-OS CS-CS OS-CS Pins Parallel 500-P Pins at Right Angles 500-R Pins Parallel 502-P Pins at Right Angles 502-R Pins Parallel 503-P Pins at Right Angles 503-R * These sockets are not interchangeable with zinc poured sockets. OPEN SOCKET DIAMETER CLOSED SOCKET DIAMETER ROPE DIA. C D E F PIN As Ls (AP- PROX.) C D E As Ls (AP- PROX.) 1/4 11/16 5/16 1-1/2 1-3/ /16 1-7/ / /16 5/16 13/16 13/32 1-3/4 1-5/ / / / /8 3/8 13/16 13/32 1-3/4 1-5/ / / / /8 7/16 1 1/ / / /8 1/2 1 1/ / / /8 9/16 1-1/4 5/8 2-1/4 2-1/ /16 2-1/ / /16 5/8 1-1/4 5/8 2-1/4 2-1/ /16 2-1/ / /16 3/4 1-1/2 3/4 2-3/ / / /16 7/8 1-3/4 15/16 3-1/4 3-3/ /8 3-1/ / / /32 3-3/ / / /16 1-1/8 2-1/4 1-3/16 4-1/4 4-1/ /16 4-1/ /16 1-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/16 4-3/ / / /2 1-3/8 2-1/2 1-5/16 5-1/4 5-1/ /2 5-1/ / /8 1-1/ /16 5-3/4 5-3/ /16 5-1/ / /16 1-3/4 3-1/2 1-11/16 6-3/ / / /8 7-3/ / /16 2-1/4* 4-1/4 2-1/8 6-3/4 8-3/ /4 8-3/ /2 2-1/2* 4-1/4 2-1/8 6-3/4 8-3/ /8 8-3/ /4 ROPE DIA. CAPACITY (TONS*) 6X19 & 6X37 IWRC LPS XIP 1/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

156 Wire & Synthetic Rope Fittings and Swivels Electroline manufactures non-swage end fittings and swivels for wire and synthetic rope, cable and line. End fittings include clevis, eyes, studs, hooks and turnbuckles. An Electroline wire rope fitting is installed much like a compression fitting in a plumbing application. The wire rope passes through a sleeve. The strands are fanned-out and a plug is inserted. As the plug is driven into the fanned end of the rope, the diameter of the end increases so that the rope can't dislodge itself. The last thing you do is to put a socket over the sleeve and thread it on tight. It's a procedure essentially entailing three steps. Electroline fitting assemblies are testable as well via a seconds-long onsite inspection process. Each fitting is equipped with an inspection hole through which the rope strands are visible, and proper assembly confirmed. An Electroline fitting is also esthetically pleasing, and therefore appropriate for many applications. More importantly, however, its highly polished, well-finished appearance conveys an impression of strength and security. The fittings are machined to incredible tolerances. They look and perform like the precision instruments they actually are. Electroline fittings are used in a wide variety of applications. Because they are made of high-quality materials such as stainless steel they are a niche product for outdoor use where rust can be a problem. They can be found in zoos, outdoor parking lots, public ballparks, and in just about any other outdoor venue where wire or synthetic rope is employed. ROPE DIA. BOOM PENDANT ASSEMBLIES IMPROVED PLOW, IWRC EXTRA IMPROVED PLOW IWRC BREAKING STRENGTH (TONS) RECOMMENDED CAPACITY TONS (AT 5:1 SF) BREAKING STRENGTH (TONS) RECOMMENDED CAPACITY TONS (AT 5:1 SF) 1/ / / / / / / / Note: 6 x 25 W Regular Lay construction is recommended for all sizes shown. SWAGED SOCKET TYPE TYPE A TYPE B TYPE C WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

157 Eye Bolts FORGED EYE BOLT WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS! WARNING Use only if trained. Loads may slip or fall if proper eye bolt assembly & lifting procedures are not used. A falling load can seriously injure or kill. Read, understand & follow all eye bolt safety information & diagrams presented here. TABLE I (IN-LINE LOAD) Regular Nut Eye Bolt G-291 Shoulder Nut Eye Bolt G-277 Important Safety Information Read and Follow Inspection / Maintenance Safety Always inspect eye bolt before use. Never use eye bolt that shows signs of wear or damage. Never use eye bolt if eye or shank is bent or elongated. Always be sure threads on shank and receiving holes are clean. Never machine, grind, or cut eye bolt. Assembly Safety Machinery Eye Bolt S-279/M-279 SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT 1/ / / / / / / / / / / Shoulder Nut Eye Bolt Installation for Angular Loading Never exceed load limits specified in Table I. Never use regular nut eye bolts for angular lifts. Always use shoulder nut eye bolts (or machinery eye bolts) for angular lifts. For angular lifts, adjust working load as follows: DIRECTION OF PULL ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD 45 degrees 30% of rated working load 90 degrees 25% of rated working load Never undercut eye bolt to seat shoulder against the load. Always countersink receiving hole or use washers to seat shoulder. Always screw eye bolt down completely for proper seating. Always tighten nuts securely against the load. IN-LINE Thickness of spacers must exceed this distance between the bottom of the load and the last thread of the eye bolt. The threaded shank must protrude through the load sufficiently to allow full engagement of the nut. If the eye bolt protrudes so far through the load that the nut cannot be tightened securely against the load, use properly sized washers to take up the excess space BETWEEN THE NUT AND THE LOAD. Place washers or spacers between nut and load so that when the nut is tightened securely, the shoulder is secured flush against the load surface. 155 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

158 IMPORTANT READ & UNDERSTAND THESE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING EYE BOLTS. Regular Nut & Shoulder Nut Eye Bolt Installation for In-Line Loading RIGHT More than one eye bolt dia. of threads, only (1) nut required. RIGHT One eye bolt dia. of threads or less, use two (2) nuts. RIGHT Tighten Hex Nut Securely Against Load. WRONG Eye Bolts Tap Depth: 2.5 x Dia. 2x Dia. (Min.) Tighten hex nut securely against load Tighten hex nut securely against load One eye bolt dia. or less Always inspect eye bolt before use. Always stand clear of load. Always lift load with a steady, even pull do not jerk. Always apply load to eye bolt in the plane of the eye, not at an angle. Operating Safety Never exceed the capacity of the eyebolt See Table I. When using lifting slings of two or more legs, make sure the loads in the legs are calculated using the angle from the vertical to the leg and properly size the shoulder nut or machinery eye bolt for the angular load. Do not reeve slings from one eye bolt to another. This will alter the load & angle of loading on the eye bolt. WRONG Resultant Load After slings have been properly attached to the eye bolts, apply force slowly. Watch the load carefully & be prepared to stop applying force if the load starts buckling. Buckling may occur if the load is not stiff enough to resist the compressive forces which result from the angular loading. Machinery Eye Bolt Installation for In-Line & Angular Loading These eye bolts are primarily intended to be installed into tapped holes. 1. After the loads on the eye bolts have been calculated, select the proper size eye bolt for the job. For angular lifts, adjust working load as follows: DIRECTION OF PULL ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD 45 degrees 30% of rated working load 90 degrees 25% of rated working load 2. Drill and tap the load to the correct sizes to a minimum depth of one-half the eye bolt size beyond the shank length of the machinery eye bolt. 3. Thread the eye bolt into the load until the shoulder is flush and securely tightened against the load. 4. If the plane of the machinery eye bolt is not aligned with the sling line, estimate the amount of unthreading rotation necessary to align the plane of the eye properly. 5. Remove the machinery eye bolt from the load and add shims (washers) of proper thickness to adjust the angle of the plane of the eye to match the sling line. Use Table II to estimate the required shim thickness for the amount of unthreading rotation required. TABLE II SHIM THICKNESS REQUIRED EYE BOLT EYE BOLT SIZE SIZE TO CHANGE ROTATION 90 1/ / / / / / / / / Shim added to change eye alignment 90 Min. tap depth is basic shank length plus onehalf the nominal eye bolt diameter. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

159 Eye Bolts REGULAR NUT EYE BOLTS A! E F G H SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION D B C G-291 Recommended for straight line pull. All Bolts Hot Dip galvanized after threading. Furnished with standard Hot Dip galvanized hex nuts. Forged Steel Quenched and Tempered. Crosby products meet or exceed all the requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties & material traceability, not addressed by ASME B SHANK DIAMETER & LENGTH G-219 STOCK NO. GALV. WORKING LOAD LIMIT WEIGHT PER DIMENSIONS A B C D E F G H 1/4 x /4 x /16 x 2-1/ /16 x 4-1/ /8 x 2-1/ /8 x 4-1/ /8 x /2 x 3-1/ /2 x /2 x /2 x /2 x /8 x /8 x /8 x /8 x /8 x /4 x 4-1/ /4 x /4 x /4 x /4 x /4 x /8 x /8 x /8 x x x x x /4 x /4 x /4 x *Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

160 Eye Bolts SHOULDER NUT EYE BOLTS A G D J F H E B C G-277! SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION Forged Steel Hot Dip galvanized Furnished with standard Hot Dip galvanized, heavy hex nuts SHANK DIAMETER & LENGTH G-277 STOCK NO. GALV. WORKING LOAD LIMIT* WEIGHT PER 100 DIMENSIONS A B C D E F G H J 1/4 x /4 x /16 x 2-1/ /16 x 4-1/ /8 x 2-1/ /8 x 4-1/ /2 x 3-1/ /2 x /8 x /8 x /4 x 4-1/ /4 x /8 x x x /4 x /4 x /4 x *Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. H J E SCREW EYE BOLTS G-275 D C B Forged Steel Quenched and Tempered Hot Dip galvanized A G SHANK DIAMETER & LENGTH G-275 STOCK NO. GALV. WORKING LOAD LIMIT* WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.) DIMENSIONS A B C D E F G H J 1/4 x /16 x 2-1/ /8 x 2-1/ /2 x 3-1/ /8 x WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

161 Eye Bolts SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS Forged Steel Quenched and Tempered. Recommended for straight line pull Working Load Limits shown are for In-line pull. Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B S-279! SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION SIZE STOCK NO. WLL * WEIGHT PER 100 DIMENSIONS A** THREAD B C D E F G H 1/4 x / /16 x 1-1/ / /8 x 1-1/ / /2 x 1-1/ / /8 x 1-3/ / /4 x / /8 x 2-1/ / x 2-1/ /8 x 2-3/ / /4 x / /2 x 3-1/ / /4 x 3-3/ / x / /2 x / *Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit. ** All bolts threaded UNC 159 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

162 Eye Bolts SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS Drop Forged Carbon Steel, Self-Colored ASTM A489 Fully threaded: UNC-2A HANES PRODUCT NO. STOCK NO. UNC-2A SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS RATED CAPACITY SHANK DIA. & THREAD UNC-2A SHANK LENGTH EYE I.D. EYE O.D. A B C D FIT50011 K / /4 1-3/ FIT50031 K / /8 7/8 1-7/ FIT50051 K / / / FIT50071 K / /8 1-3/ / FIT50091 K / /2 1-3/16 2-1/ FIT50111 K / /8 1-9/32 2-9/ FIT50131 K / /4 1-3/8 2-1/ FIT50151 K / /2 2-13/ FIT50171 K / /4 1-11/16 3-1/ FIT50191 K /2 1-13/16 3-9/ FIT50211 K / / FIT50231 K / /16 4-7/ FIT50251 K / /2 2-1/2 5-3/ FIT50270 K / /4 2-7/8 6-1/ FIT50291 K / /4 6-7/ FIT50293 K2037** / / METRIC SIZE UNC-2A APPROX. EQUIV. IN INCHES METRIC SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS THREAD SIZE SHANK LENGTH I.D. EYE O.D. EYE OVERALL LENGTH APPROX. WEIGHT PER A B C D E EACH METRIC RATED CAPACITY IN KGS. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE WEIGHT RATED CAPACITY IN LBS M6 1/4 M6 x M7 5/16 M7 x M8 3/8 M8 x ,110 M10 7/16 M10 x ,628 M12 1/2 M12 x ,030 2,266 M14 9/16 M14 x ,600 3,520 M16 5/8 M16 x ,600 3,520 M18 3/4 M18 x ,140 4,708 M20 7/8 M20 x ,860 6,292 M24 1 M24 x ,850 8,470 M27 1-1/8 M27 x ,200 11,440 M30 1-1/4 M30 x ,400 14,080 M36 1-1/2 M36 x ,970 19,734 M42 1-5/8 M42 x ,960 26,312 M45 1-3/4 M45 x ,720 27,984 M48 1-7/8 M48 x ,400 36,080 M52 2 M52 x ,300 38,060

163 Crosby's Slide-Loc CROSBY S INNOVATIVE ALTERNATIVE TO STANDARD EYE BOLTS The new Crosby SL150 Slide-Loc provides features not found on standard lifting eye bolts. At the center of the new design is the patent pending locking mechanism that slides to lock the bolt for faster installation, then slides back to make ready for lifting without the need for tools. When compared to respective size eye bolts, the Crosby SL150 Slide-Loc : - Has a larger eye opening for easy access. - Utilizes a bail that swivels 360 to keep load aligned with the sling leg, and maintains full WLL at any angle. Swivels 360 Fatigue Rated to 20,000 cycles at 1.5 times the WLL. The patent pending locking mechanism provides quicker installation, without the need for tools. QUIC-CHECK mark indicates if the Crosby SL150 Slide-Loc is ready for the lift. Forged alloy steel and Quenched and Tempered bail provides toughness in potentially abusive field conditions. Meets the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC guidelines and is marked with CE accordingly. WORKING LOAD LIMIT (T) BOLT SIZE VENDOR PART NO. HSI PART NO /8-16x FIT /2-13x1-1/ FIT /8-11x1-5/ FIT /4-10x FIT /8-9x2-1/ FIT x FIT WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

164 ACTEK SWIVEL (SAFETY) HOIST RINGS UNC THREADS Swivel Hoist Rings Rated load from 400 lbs. to 125 tons. Pivots 180 / Swivels 360 Material: AISI 4140 aircraft quality Finish: Black oxide per mil spec cadmium plated RATED LOADS THREAD SIZE A C D E Safety factor: 5:1 100% magnetic particle inspected Certified heat treatment UNC THREADS STANDARD U-BAR PART NO. B F LONG U-BAR PART NO. B F G H TORQUE (FT/LB) 600 1/ / / / / / ,000 3/ / ,000 7/ / ,500 1/ / ,000 7/ / ,500 1/ / ,500 1/ / ,500 1/ / ,000 5/ / ,000 5/ / ,000 5/ / ,000 3/ / ,000 3/ / ,000 3/ ,000 3/ ,000 7/ ,000 7/ , , , , / / , / / , / / , / / , / / , / / , / / , / , / / , WT. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

165 Swivel Hoist Rings HR-125 Swivel Hoist Ring Top washer has the following features: The Working Load Limit and Recommended Torque value are permanently stamped into each washer. Washer is color coded for easy identification: Red - UNC thread. Individually Proof Tested to 2-1/2 time Working Load Limit. Bolt specification is an Alloy socket head cap screw to ASTM A 574. All threads listed are UNC. BOLD SIZE IDENTIFICATION: The size of the bolt will be stated as in the drawing above. Illustration shows meaning of each dimension given. Frame 2 and larger are RFID EQUIPPED. FRAME SIZE NO. HR-125 STOCK NO. WLL * TORQUE IN FT LBS BOLT SIZE A DIMENSIONS EFFECTIVE THREAD PROJECTION LENGTH B C D RADIUS E DIAMETER F G H /16-18 x /8-16 x /2-13 x /2-13 x /8-11 x /8-11 x /4-10 x /4-10 x ** 100 3/4-10 x ** 100 3/4-10 x /8-9 x /8-9 x x x /4-7 x /2-6 x /2 x /2-4 x WEIGHT EACH x /2-4 x 13.0 # *Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. **Ultimate Load is 4.5 times the Working Load Limit for 7000# Hoist Ring when tested in 90 degree orientation. Long Bolts are designed to be used with soft metal (i.e., aluminum) workpiece. While the long bolts may be used with ferrous metal (i.e., steel & iron) workpiece, short bolts are designed for ferrous workpieces only. Bolt specification is an Alloy socket head cap screw to ASTMA 574. # Hex head bolt used on Frame 8 (100,000lb.) Hoist Ring. 163 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

166 GXL CLAMPS Available in a 1/2, 1 and 2 ton capacity. Exclusive feature is a patented wear indicator system. When any of cam s straight line, convex teeth are flattened between unique wear indicator grooves, it is time to change the cam. Drop forged and heat treated components, with gripping surfaces of case hardened alloy steel. Newly designed Cam Engaging Lever keeps the cam in contact with the plate. The tension arm and spring mechanism facilitate attaching and removing the clamp. These clamps will not lift plate when in the lever open position. Lifting Clamps Warning: Never tamper with a clamp s tension arm and spring mechanism during a lift. CAT NO UPC NO GRIP RANGE CLAMP WT WLL (TONS) /16-5/ / /16-3/ /16-7/ SAC (SCREW-ADJUSTED CAM) PLATE CLAMPS Recommended for turning plates from horizontal to vertical as well as through a 180 arc. The convex, serrated cam swivels on a ball joint so that the area of cam engagement increases as load increases Drop forged body and shackle. 100% proof tested with certificate of test attached to each clamp. Note: Screw needs to be hand tight only! Do not over tighten. Cam position under no load. MERRILL MODEL NO CAT NO UPC NO GRIP RANGE CLAMP WT WLL (TONS) SAC /4 1 SAC /4 3 SAC Cam under load. The heavier the load, the greater the bite. HORIZONTAL PLATE CLAMP Dual springs hold cam on the work while the second clamp is placed 100% proof tested with certificate of test attached to each clamp Sold in pairs One man can handle plates with this clamp MERRILL MODEL NO GRIP RANGE CAM WIDTH WT PER PAIR UPC NO WLL CAT NO (TONS) WIDTH 6H /2 5 3/4 32 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

167 Lifting Clamps IPU10 / UNIVERSAL VERTICAL LIFTING CLAMP The IPU10 vertical lifting clamp is used for lifting, turning, moving or vertical transfer of sheet, plates, or fabrications from horizontal to vertical and down to horizontal (180 ) as needed. The hinged hoisting eye allows for the clamp to place and lift the load from any direction, or with a multiple leg sling without side-loading the clamp. IPU10S: For use with Stainless Steel material. IPU10H: For use with materials with a surface hardness to 47Rc (450 HB) MODEL WLL (T)* STOCK NO. WEIGHT JAW A IPU IPU IPU IPU IPU IPU IPU1J IPU IPU10J IPU IPU10J IPU FOR STAINLESS STEEL - WITH UNIVERSAL HOISTING EYE IPU10S IPU10S IPU10S IPU10S FOR VERY HARD MATERIALS - WITH UNIVERSAL HOISTING EYE IPU10H IPU10H IPU10H IPU10H *Design factor based on EN and ASME B Model IPU10R (remote control opening and closing via a cable) on request. IPHGZ / IPHGUZ HORIZONTAL LIFTING CLAMP The IPBC horizontal lifting clamps have a pretension feature that allows the user to attach the clamps to the material for horizontal lifting and transfer of sagging and non-sagging material. These clamps may also be used to handle material that will be used in shears, bending and rolling machines or other fabrication equipment. May also be used for turning beams from the H into the I position. MODEL WLL (T)* IPBC STOCK NO. WEIGHT IPBC IPBC IPBC *Design factor based on EN and ASME B The IPHGZ, IPHGUZ horizontal lifting clamps have a pretension locking feature that allows the user to attach the clamps to the material for horizontal lifting and transfer of sagging and non-sagging material. These clamps may also be used to handle material that will be used in shears, bending and rolling machines or other fabrication equipment. May also be used to move and lift structural shapes such as I-Beams, H-Beams ect. MODEL WLL (T)* STOCK NO. WEIGHT IPHGUZ IPHGZ IPHGZ IPHGZ IPHGZ WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

168 FIXED JAW ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS These Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps are truly versatile in application and may be used for lifting, pulling or as an anchor point. Designed specifically to provide maximum JAW GRIP ADJUSTMENT. Engineered for practical use where mobility is essential. Easily applied and do not require additional tools or width adjusting components such as spacing washers. JAW GRIP ADJ. MIN- MAX INSIDE SHACK- LE CROWN TO SPACER MODEL 0 VERT. JAW APERTURE AVG. WT. S /2 7/8 3-3/4 9 S /2 7/8 3-3/4 11 S2A /2 7/8 3-3/4 18 S /8 3-7/8 24 S3X /2 7/8 4-1/8 22 S3A /8 4-1/8 33 S4S /8 4-1/8 41 S4A /8 4-1/2 62 S /8 109 S /2 5-7/8 129 Lifting Clamps SWIVEL JAW ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS Swivel Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps incorporate the additional benefit of horizontal jaw adjustment. This enables the full length and maximum width of the swivel jaw to anchor evenly on a considerable surface area of the beam flange. Additional tools or width adjusting components are not required. JAW GRIP ADJ. MIN- MAX MODEL 0 VERT. JAW APERTURE AVG. WT. S / /4 22 S5A / /2 31 S / /2 31 S6A / /2 34 S / /2 47 ADJUSTABLE RUNWAY BEAM TROLLEYS SUPERCLAMP Adjustable Runway Beam Trolleys are of acknowledged and experienced design. The unique quality features of this new range of manual traveling gear are the Wheel guarding Anti-drop Plates, which are incorporated into the practical design of these transferable and mobile securing attachments. To complement this range, reference is made to SUPERCLAMP Geared Runway Beam Trolleys which allow additional ease of load conveyance. JAW GRIP ADJ. MIN- MAX INSIDE SHACK- LE CROWN TO SPACER MODEL 0 VERT. JAW APERTURE AVG. WT. B /8 4-3/4 52 B /4 3-7/8 110 B /2 5-1/8 164 INSIDE SHACK- LE CROWN TO SPACER WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

169 Lifting Clamps MODEL TLA & TL The Model TLA is a vertical lifting clamp incorporating a Lock Open and a Lock Closed feature and an auxiliary lock. The clamp is capable of turning a steel plate from horizontal to vertical to horizontal through a 180 degree arc. The Lock Open, Lock Closed feature facilitates attaching and removing the clamp from the plate. The Model TL is identical to the Model TLA except that it does not contain the auxiliary lock. The Model TL is capable of turning a plate from horizontal to vertical and back through the same 90 degree arc. MODEL TL MODEL TLA RATED CAPACITY (TONS) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/ PLATE THICKNESS A 0-5/8 1/2-1 3/4-1-1/4 1-1/4-1-3/4 0-3/4 1/2-1 3/4-1-1/ /2 1-1/ /4-1-1/2 1-1/ /4 3/16-1-1/ /4-1-3/ / / /8 3/8-1-1/ / / /8 B 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-3/ /2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/ /8 4-5/8 4-5/8 4-5/8 4-13/ / / /16 C 6-1/4 6-1/4 6-1/4 6-1/4 7-1/2 7-1/2 7-1/2 7-1/2 7-1/2 9-3/8 9-3/8 9-3/8 9-3/8 9-7/8 9-7/8 9-7/8 9-7/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 12-5/ / / /16 MAX. D 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 11-1/8 13-1/8 13-1/8 13-1/8 13-1/8 13-1/8 16-1/4 16-1/4 16-1/4 16-1/4 17-5/8 17-5/8 17-5/8 17-5/8 20-1/8 20-1/8 20-1/8 20-1/8 21-5/ / / /16 E 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-3/4 3-3/4 3-3/4 3-3/4 MAX. F 4-3/4 5-1/8 5-3/8 5-7/ /4 6-1/2 6-3/4 7-1/4 8-7/8 9-3/8 9-7/8 10-5/ /4 10-3/4 11-3/4 10-1/ /2 12-1/8 13-1/8 14-1/8 G 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-3/4 2-13/ / / / /16 3-3/4 3-3/4 3-3/4 3-3/4 3-13/ / / /16 3-7/8 3-7/8 3-7/8 3-7/8 4-3/4 4-3/4 4-3/4 4-3/4 H 1-13/ / / / /8 2-7/8 2-7/8 2-7/ /8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-7/8 3-7/8 3-7/8 3-7/8 J 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/ WEIGHT MODEL FR The Model FR is a vertical lifting tool for relatively light work. It is small and easy to handle in capacities through three tons. It incorporates a Lock Closed feature which facilitates attaching the clamp to the plate. RATED CAPACITY (TONS) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/ PLATE THICKNESS A 0-3/4 1/2-1 3/4-1-1/ /2 1-1/4-1-3/4 0-3/4 1/2-1 3/4-1-1/ /2 1-1/4-1-3/4 1-1/ /4-1-1/2 1-1/ /4-2-1/ /4 3/4-1-1/2 1-1/ /4-2-1/2 B 2-13/ / / / /16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 4-3/16 4-3/16 4-3/16 4-3/16 C /4 10-3/4 10-3/4 10-3/4 MAX. D 11-1/4 11-1/4 11-1/4 11-1/4 11-1/4 13-3/4 13-3/4 13-3/4 13-3/4 13-3/4 13-3/4 16-3/8 16-3/8 16-3/8 16-3/8 18-3/8 18-3/8 18-3/8 18-3/8 E 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-3/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 2-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 3-5/8 F 4-5/8 4-7/8 5-1/8 5-3/8 5-3/8 5-7/8 6-1/8 6-3/8 6-5/8 6-7/8 7-1/8 6-3/4 7-1/4 7-3/4 8-1/4 7-5/8 7-7/8 8-3/8 8-7/8 G 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/16 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-3/8 3-9/16 3-9/16 3-9/16 3-9/16 H 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 1-5/8 2-1/8 2-1/8 2-1/8 2-1/8 2-7/16 2-7/16 2-7/16 2-7/16 J 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 WEIGHT WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

170 Lifting Clamps The Model HR is a horizontal lifting clamp intended to be used in pairs, sets of pairs, or in a tripod arrangement for transporting steel plates horizontally. The Model HDR is similar to the Model HR except that it contains dual cam assemblies which provide two gripping surfaces. Equipped with serrated gripping cams as standard equipment, both the HR and HDR models are available with smooth, bronze or stainless steel gripping cams to prevent marring when handling polished metals such as stainless steel, copper, aluminum, etc. MODEL HR RATED CAPACITY (TONS) MODEL HR & HDR JAW OPENING A B C D E F G H J K WEIGHT 1/ /4 1/ /16 4-1/16 3 3/8 1/2 3-1/2 1/ /4 1/ /8 5-5/8 6-1/8 7 3/4 1/2 14 3/ /8 5/ /8 5-5/8 6-1/4 7 3/4 3/ / /8 3/ /8 5-5/8 6-3/8 7 3/4 3/ /8 5/8 1-5/8 1-3/8 5-5/8 7-1/4 7 3/4 3/ /8 3/4 2-1/8 1-3/8 7-1/2 9-5/ / MODEL HDR RATED CAPACITY (TONS) JAW OPENING A B C D E F G H J K L WEIGHT 1-1/ /8 5/ /4 5-5/8 6-1/ /16 3/ /8 3/ /4 5-5/8 6-3/ /16 3/ /8 5/8 1-5/8 3-1/4 5-5/8 7-1/ /16 1-5/ /8 3/4 2-1/8 3-1/4 7-1/2 9-5/8 12-1/4 15/16 1-5/8 5-1/4 84 MODEL M The Model M is shown with the structural shape lifting clamps but can also be used for horizontal lifting of plates and structural beams. The Model M incorporates a Lock Closed feature which facilities attaching the clamp to the member being lifted. These clamps must be used in pairs, sets of pairs, or in a tripod arrangement for transporting plate horizontally. Handle is available on 8 ton clamp only. RATED CAPACITY (TONS) JAW OPENING A B C C h D 1/ /16 7-1/ /16 2-1/4 8-7/8 2-5/8 1-7/16 7 1/2 3/4-1-1/2 2-5/16 7-1/16 5-3/16 2-1/4 9-3/8 2-5/8 1-7/16 8 1/2 1-1/ /16 7-1/ /16 2-1/4 9-7/8 2-5/8 1-7/ /2 8-1/8 5-1/2 2-1/4 9-1/2 2-3/4 1-7/ /4-1-1/2 2-1/2 8-1/ / /4 1-7/ / /2 8-1/8 6-1/2 2-1/4 10-1/2 2-3/4 1-7/ /4 3-3/ /4 6-9/16 3-1/ /8 3-7/ / /4 7-3/16 3-1/ /8 3-7/ /4-2-3/4 3-3/ /4 7-15/16 3-1/ /8 3-7/ /2 3-13/ /4 3-5/8 14-1/2 4-3/8 2-3/ /4-2-1/2 3-13/ /4 3-5/8 16-1/2 4-3/8 2-3/ /4-3-1/2 3-13/ /4 3-5/8 14-1/2 4-3/8 2-3/4 41 MAX. E F G H J WEIGHT / /4 11-7/ /2 5-1/ /4-3-1/2 4-15/ / / / / / /4 14-7/ /2 5-1/ WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

171 Bearing Equipped Swivels SWIVELS TIMKEN BEARING EQUIPPED LOAD RATED S-1 JAW & HOOK S-3 JAW & EYE S-5 EYE & EYE SAFE WORKING LOAD* TYPE SWIVEL NUMBER WIRE ROPE SIZE WEIGHT EACH 3 S S - 1 1/ S S - 2 1/ S S - 3 1/ S S - 4 1/ S S - 5 1/ S S - 6 1/ S S - 1 5/ S S - 2 5/ S S - 3 5/ S S - 4 5/ S S - 5 5/ S S - 6 5/ /2 S /2 - S - 1 3/ /2 S /2 - S - 2 3/ /2 S /2 - S - 3 3/ /2 S /2 - S - 4 3/ /2 S /2 - S - 5 3/ /2 S /2 - S - 6 3/ S S - 1 7/ S S - 2 7/ S S - 3 7/ S S - 4 7/ S S - 5 7/ S S - 6 7/ S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S *Safe working load in metric tons. S-2 JAW & JAW S-4 EYE & JAW S-5 EYE & HOOK 169 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

172 Swivels REGULAR R B D A C C A SIZE SIZE SIZE SAFE WORK- ING LOAD * DIMENSIONS A B C D R WEIGHT EACH 1/ /4 11/16 3/4 1-1/ / / /8 13/ /4 3-9/ / /16 1-1/4 1-1/2 4-5/ / /2 1-5/16 1-1/ / / /16 1-3/4 2-3/8 6-9/ / /2 1-3/ /8 7-3/ / /16 2-1/4 3-1/16 8-3/ /2 2-5/16 2-1/2 3-1/2 9-5/ / /8 2-11/16 3-1/8 2-11/ / / / / / *Ultimate Load is five times the Safe Working Load. G-402 REGULAR QUENCHED & TEMPERED JAW END G-403 JAW END QUENCHED & TEMPERED SIZE SAFE WORKING LOAD * DIMENSIONS A B C K N P R WEIGHT EACH 1/ /4 11/16 3/4 15/32 7/8 1/4 2-5/8.21 5/ /8 13/16 1 1/2 7/8 5/ / / /16 1-1/4 5/8 1-1/16 3/8 3-5/8.66 1/ /2 1-5/16 1-1/2 3/4 1-5/16 1/2 4-1/ / /16 1-3/4 15/16 1-1/2 5/8 5-5/ / /2 1-3/ /8 1-3/4 3/4 6-1/ / /16 2-1/4 1-3/16 2-1/16 7/ /2 2-5/16 2-1/2 1-3/4 2-13/16 1-1/8 8-9/ / /8 2-11/16 3-1/8 2-1/ /16 1-3/8 9-7/ / / /8 4-7/16 2-1/4 14-3/ *Ultimate Load is five times the Safe Working Load. R B N A C K SIZE P CHAIN R B D A C E SIZE SIZE SAFE WORK- ING LOAD * DIMENSIONS A B C D E R WEIGHT EACH 1/ /4 11/16 3/4 7/16 15/16 2-1/4.13 5/ /8 13/16 1 1/2 1-1/8 2-23/ / /16 1-1/4 3/4 1-1/2 3-7/ / /2 1-5/16 1-1/2 7/8 1-7/8 4-1/ / /16 1-3/4 1-1/16 2-3/16 5-1/ / /2 1-3/ /4 2-5/8 5-25/ *Ultimate Load is five times the Safe Working Load. G-401 CHAIN QUENCHED & TEMPERED WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

173 Snatch Blocks CROSBY LIGHT CHAMPION BY McKISSICK 418 W/ Hook 419 W/ Shackle 404 Tail Board Forged alloy heat treated hooks. Forged steel swivel tees, yokes and shackles. Hook and shackle assemblies on 4-1/2" through 14" sizes can be interchanged. Can be furnished with bronze bushings or roller bearings. Opening feature permits insertion of rope while block is suspended from gin-pole. 3" thru 18" 418 and 419 blocks have exclusive bolt retaining spring to assure no lost bolts. Can be furnished with SS-4055 hook latch. Pressure lube fittings. Fatigue rated. 3" - 10" feature dual rated wireline sheaves. SHEAVE DIA. BEARING CODE 418 WITH HOOK STOCK NO. 419 WITH SHACKLE 404 TAIL BOARD WIRE ROPE SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (TONS) *Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. **Available in Bronze Bushed only. 3" and 4-1/2" have self-lubricating Bronze Bushing. Fitted with 1-1/4" ID Swivel Eye. May be furnished in other rope sizes. 418 WITH HOOK WEIGHT EACH 419 WITH SHACKLE 404 TAIL BOARD REPLACEMENT SHEAVE STOCK NO. 3** BB /16-3/ ** BB /16-3/ /2** BB /8-1/ BB /8-3/ RB /8-3/ BB /8-3/ RB /8-3/ BB /8-3/ RB /8-3/ BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB RB WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

174 Snatch Blocks CROSBY CHAMPION BY McKISSICK 420 W/ Hook * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. May be furnished in other rope sizes. 421 W/ Shackle 406 Tail Board Hooks and side plates are forged alloy steel and heat treated. Shackles and yokes are forged and heat treated steel. All parts are forged. Side plates are designed to eliminate possibility of rope jamming. Can be furnished with bronze bushings or sealed roller bearings. Opening feature permits insertion of rope while block is suspended from gin-pole. Can be furnished with S-4320 hook latch. Pressure lube fittings. Hook and shackle assemblies can be interchanged. Blocks furnished with dual rated Wireline sheaves. All sizes are RFID EQUIPPED. SHEAVE STOCK NO. WORKING WEIGHT EACH REP. DIAMETER BEARING CODE 420 WITH HOOK 421 WITH SHACKLE 406 TAIL BOARD WIRELINE SIZE LOAD LIMIT (T)* 420 WITH HOOK 421 WITH SHACKLE 406 TAIL BOARD SHEAVE STOCK NO. REP. LATCH STOCK NO. 6 BB /4-7/ RB /4-7/ BB /4-7/ RB /4-7/ BB /4-7/ RB /4-7/ WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

175 Snatch Blocks CROSBY SUPER CHAMPION BY McKISSICK 430 W/ Hook 431 W/ Shackle 407 Tail Board Drop forged, heat treated swivel hook or swivel shackle. Hook and shackle assemblies on 8" through 14" sizes can be interchanged. Can be furnished with bronze bushings or roller bearings. Pressure lube fittings. 430 and 431 blocks have exclusive bolt-retaining spring to assure no lost bolts. Can be furnished with hook latch. 8" and 10" models furnished with dual rated Wireline sheaves. Fatigue Rated. All sizes are RFID EQUIPPED. SHEAVE STOCK NO. WORKING WEIGHT EACH REP. DIAMETER BEARING CODE 430 WITH HOOK 431 WITH SHACKLE 407 TAIL BOARD WIRELINE SIZE LOAD LIMIT (T)* 430 WITH HOOK 431 WITH SHACKLE 407 TAIL BOARD SHEAVE STOCK NO. REP. LATCH STOCK NO. 8 BB / RB / BB / RB / BB RB BB / RB / BB RB BB / RB / BB RB BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / BB / RB / * Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit. May be furnished in other rope sizes. 173 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

176 VB Model Snatch Blocks Manufactured from High Tensile Alloy Steel for light weight / high capacity ratio Designed with 4:1 Safety Factor All Blocks are Individually Proof Tested Sheave runs on lubricated bronze bushing Open swivel with bronze thrust bearing Available with the following fittings: Machined Swivel Stud Eye with Shackle Standard machined oblong-swivel eye accepts shackle pin (standard) or shackle ear (upset) for direct connect to spreader bar or lifting fixture Swivel hook Standard capacities from Ton WLL; Available up to 350 Ton WLL Single or Double Sheave Models available WLL US WIRE ØD DIMENSIONS WEIGHT * MODEL NO. TON IN MM ØD1 ØD2 B H T TA TB TL LBS VB S / /16 9-1/2 10-1/16 1-7/ /4 3-5/ /2 120 VB S / /16 9-7/ /16 1-1/2 2-1/8 12-1/4 3-1/4 28-5/8 125 VB S / / / /16 1-7/ /4 3-1/4 31-1/4 130 VB S / / / /16 1-9/16 2-1/4 14-3/4 3-5/ /4 140 VB S / /4 13-9/ /4 2-1/16 2-3/4 16-1/8 4-7/ / VB S /8-1-3/ /4 13-9/ /4 2-1/16 2-3/4 16-1/8 4-7/ / VB S / / /4 13-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 18-1/2 4-7/ /2 310 VB S /8-1-3/ / /4 13-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 18-1/2 4-7/ /2 310 VB / / /4 2-1/8 2-3/ / /4 330 VB ,5.S / / / /4 2-1/16 2-3/ / / VB S /8-1-1/ / / /4 2-1/8 2-3/ / /4 330 VB ,5.S /8-1-1/ / / /4 2-1/8 2-3/ /4 42-1/2 440 VB S /8-1-1/ / /2 18-1/8 2-15/16 3-1/ / /8 680 VB S /2-1-3/ / /2 18-1/8 2-15/16 3-1/ / /8 680 Minimum Ultimate Strength = 4 x WLL *Represents Standard Models in Inventory. Available in Single or Double Sheave up to 350 Ton Capacity All Models available with Roller Bearings and Hooks All blocks Proof Tested and are supplied with Factory Certificates WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

177 Skookum Sheave Blocks J SKOOKUM R-SERIES UTILI-SHEAVE BLOCKS Multi-use wide throat and Utili-Sheave for passing a variety of line, connecting links and terminations Work hardening manganese steel sheaves maximize wire rope and sheave life R-6, R-8 & R-10 equipped with tapered roller bearings for long life in higher line speed applications R-4 feature straight roller bearings to minimize size Recessed sheave prevents wire rope from binding between sheave and block side Full sided block maximizes sheave protection and strength Versatile draw pin design allows for rapid reeving and ex-change of attaching style Rugged cast alloy steel sides for demanding environments ASTM B30.26 Compliant Working loads from 5 tons to 9 tons. H A G E D C B SPECIFICATIONS BLOCK NO. SHEAVE DIAMETER BEARING REGULAR YOKE PART NO. WIRE ROPE MIN. WIRE ROPE MAX WLL (TONS) REGULAR YOKE WEIGHT SHEAVE NO. DRAW PIN R-4 4 RB /8 3/ R-6 6 TRB /8 1/ R-8 8 TRB /2 5/ R TRB /2 5/ DIMENSIONS BLOCK A B C D E G H J R R R R Please specify Part Number, Sheave size, Working Load Limit (WLL), and Attaching Style when ordering. Ultimate load for yoke attachments is five times WLL. Ton equals 2,000 lbs. 175 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

178 Wire Rope 6 x 19 Classification COMMONLY USED WIRE ROPE CROSS SECTIONS 6 x 19 Seale IWRC 6 x 21 Filler Wire FC 6 x 25 Filler Wire IWRC 6 x 26 Warrington Seale IWRC 6 x 36 Classification 6 x 31 Warrington Seale IWRC 6 x 36 Seale Filler Wire IWRC 6 x 36 Warrington Seale FC 6 x 31 Filler Wire Seale IWRC 6 x 41 Warrington Seale IWRC 6 x 41 Seale Filler Wire IWRC 6 x 46 Seale Filler Wire IWRC 6 x 49 Filler Wire Seale IWRC Cross sections of rotation resistant rope constructions. 3 x 19 Seale 8 x 19 Seale IWRC 8 x 25 Filler Wire IWRC 8 x 17 FC 19 x 7 19 x 19 Seale 35 x 7 35 x 19 Seale WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

179 General Purpose Wire Rope 6 x 7 Classification 6 x 7 Classification Wire Ropes give long service in operating conditions where ropes are dragged along the ground or over rollers. Larger sheaves and drums (than those used for more flexible constructions) are required to avoid breakage from fatigue. 6 x 7 Classification Ropes contain 6 strands with 3 through 14 wires, no more than 9 of which are outside wires. Characteristics: Excellent abrasion resistance; less bending fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Dragging and haulage in mines, inclined planes and tramways, sand lines. IWRC shown: fiber core available Order Guide: 6 x 7 classification wire ropes may be ordered in diameters from 1/4" to 1-1/2"... bright or galvanized... EEIP, EIP and IPS grades... fiber core or IWRC... right or left lay, regular or lang lay. DIA NOMINAL STRENGTH (TONS)* - BRIGHT OR DRAWN GALVANIZED EEIP EIP IPS APPROX WT/FT IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE 1/ / / / / / / / / / / / / x 19 Classification 6 x 19 Classification ropes provide an excellent balance between fatigue and wear resistance. They give excellent service with sheaves and drums of moderate size. 6 x 19 Classification ropes contain 6 strands with 15 through 26 wires per strand, no more than 12 of which are outside wires. 6 x 19 Seale Characteristics: Resistant to abrasion and crushing; medium fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Haulage rope, choker rope, rotary drilling line. IWRC shown: fiber core available 6 x 21 Filler Wire Characteristics: Less abrasion resistance; more bending fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Pull Ropes, load lines, backhaul ropes, draglines. IWRC shown; fiber core available 6 x 25 Filler Wire Characteristics: Most flexible rope in classification; best balance of abrasion and fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Most widely used of all wire ropes - cranes hoists, skip hoists, haulage, mooring lines, conveyors, etc., IWRC shown; fiber core available 6 x 26 Warrington Seale Characteristics: Good balance of abrasion and fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Boom hoists, logging and tubing lines. IWRC shown, fiber core available DIA NOMINAL STRENGTH (TONS)* - BRIGHT OR DRAWN GALVANIZED EEIP EIP IPS APPROX WT/FT IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE 1/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal strengths listed. Galvanizing: For class A galvanized wire rope (EIP and IPS grades only), deduct 10% from the nominal strength shown. 177 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

180 General Purpose Wire Rope 6 x 37 Classification 6 x 37 classification ropes contain 6 strands with 27 through 49 wires, no more than 18 of which are outside wires. More flexible but less abrasion resistant than the 6 X 19 classification. Each strand contains numerous small diameter wires. As the number of wires increases, flexibility increases. Order Guide: 6 x 37 classification wire ropes may be ordered in diameters from 1/4" to 5"... bright or galvanized... EEIP, EIP or IPS grades... IWRC or fiber core... right or left lay, regular lang lay. 6 x 31 Warrington Seal Characteristics: 12 outside wires. Slightly more flexible than 6 x 25 rope with the same abrasion resistance. Typical Applications: Overhead crane and mobile crane hoist ropes. IWRC shown; fiber core available 6 x 36 Warrington Seale Characteristics: 14 outside wires. More fatigue resistance; but less abrasion resistance than 6 x 25 rope. Typical Applications: Overhead crane and mobile crane hoist ropes; winch lines; large diameter towing lines. IWRC shown; fiber core available 6 x 41 Warrington Seale Characteristics: 16 outside wires. Good combination of fatigue and abrasion resistance for operating ropes Typical Applications: Overhead crane and mobile crane hoist ropes; shovel and dragline hoist ropes. IWRC shown; fiber core available 6 x 41 Seale Filler Wire Characteristics: Same characteristics and applications as 6 x 41 Warrington Seale. IWRC shown; fiber core available 6 x 49 Seale Warrington Seale Characteristics: 16 outside wires. Best fatigue resistance and abrasion resistance in 6 x 37 classification Typical Applications: Mooring, towing and anchor lines. IWRC shown; fiber core available DIA NOMINAL STRENGTH (TONS)* - BRIGHT OR DRAWN GALVANIZED EEIP EIP IPS APPROX WT/FT IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE 1/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal strengths listed. Galvanizing: For class A galvanized wire rope (EIP and IPS grades only), deduct 10% from the nominal strength shown. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

181 Wire Ropes ROTATION RESISTANT WIRE ROPES In certain instances the use of rotation resistant wire rope is necessary to provide rotational stability to the lifted load. In general, the use of these specialized wire ropes is limited to those situations where it is impractical to: 1. Use a tag line. 2. Relocate rope dead end. 3. Increase sheave sizes. 4. Eliminate odd-part reeving. 5. Significantly reduce rope loading and rope length. Rotation resistant wire ropes have less of a tendency to unlay when loaded than do conventional wire ropes. This results in improved rotational stability to the lifted load within a safe working load range. Rotation resistant wire ropes are designed in such a way that the rotational force of the outer rope is partially counteracted by the rotational force of the inner rope when the rope is subjected to a load. The rated strengths of rotation resistant ropes are less than the conventional 6 x 19 and 6 x 36 Classification wire ropes, and larger sheaves and drums are required in order to achieve comparable fatigue life. Drum and sheave diameters should be 34 to 36 times rope diameter for the 19 x 7 and 35 x 7 rotation resistant ropes and 21 to 27 times rope diameter for 8 x 19 rotation resistant ropes. Rotation Resistant Ropes are available in a full range of sizes, grades and constructions: Standard constructions for single-part and multi-part lifting. Special wire rope constructions for increased service life in particularly demanding applications Dyform -18 HSLR, Dyform 34LR and 35LS. Note: 1. Swivels are not recommended for use with rotation resistant ropes. 2. Although B30 standards permit rotation resistant ropes to be used under certain conditions at design factors of 3.5:1, we recommend a minimum design factor of 5:1 & a design factor of 7:1 for extended rope life. Dyform - 18HSLR Rotation Resistant For multi-part lifting. 35% greater strength.. DYFORM -18HSLR ROTATION RESISTANT ROPE NOMINAL DIA. STRENGTH* (TONS) APPROX. WT/FT 3/8 7/16 1/ /16 5/8 3/ / / / Dyform - 34LR Strongest, most rotation resistant. For the most demanding hoisting applications. 35LS For demanding applications where highest strength is not mandatory. 179 DYFORM -34LR & 35LS ROTATION RESISTANCE ROPE MIN BREAKING FORCE** (TONS) DIAMETER 1960 (MM) 34LR 35LS x 7 Rotation Resistant Not recommended for multiple part lifting. 8 x 19 Rotation Resistant Can be used for multiple part lifting. 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/ /8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 DIA. 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/ /8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/ APPROX. WT/FT LR 34LR 35LS X 7 ROTATION RESISTANT ROPE NOMINAL STRENGTH* (TONS) EIP IPS APPROX. WT/FT / X 19 ROTATION RESISTANT ROPE 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/ /8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/ *Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal breaking strengths listed. NOTE: These strengths apply only when a test is conducted with both ends fixed. When in use, the strength of these ropes may be reduced if one end is free to rotate. **Listed minimum breaking force is for 1960 & 2160 grade bright (ungalvanized) ropes. Inquire for a minimum breaking force of galvanized ropes. Other sizes available upon request. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

182 Wire Ropes DIA. 5/8 3/4 7/ /8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-5/8 CONSTRUCTEX ROPE NOMINAL STRENGTH* (TONS) APPROX. WT/FT HIGH PERFORMANCE WIRE ROPE Constructex is made of three different strand constructions: 7-wire, 24-wire and 40-wire strands. The nine strands are closed in operation and lightly swaged to postform the rope and give the strands a triangular shape. Compacting increases strength and resistance to crushing. The smooth outside surface enhances abrasion and scrubbing resistance. Constructex can provide 1-1/2 to 2 times the service life of other wire ropes in severely abusive applications. Typical Applications include: tubing lines, logging lines, winch lines, boom hoists, scrap yard, mobile and overhead traveling cranes, hot bed conveyors, car haulage and marine cargo falls. *Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal breaking strengths listed. Other sizes avail able upon request. 6-PAC is recommended for use where the rope is subjected to heavy use or where conditions are extremely abusive, such as offshore pedestal, crawler and lattice boom equipped truck crane boom hoist applications. 6-PAC is also recommended for winch lines, overhead cranes, multipart hoist lines where rotation-resistant ropes are not required, and other applications where flexibility, high strength and resistance to crushing are important, and a cost-effective 6-strand rope is desired. Strands: 6 Wires per strand: Core: IWRC Standard grade: Royal Purple Lay: Right Regular Finish: Bright ROPE DIA. IN MM STANDARD CONSTRUC- TIONS APPROX. WEIGHT (LB/FT) NOMINAL STRENGTH (TONS) 3/ x19 Seale / x19 Seale / x / x / x / x / x x / x / x / x / x / x / x AIRCRAFT CABLE Aircraft Cable is pre-formed and made in accordance with commercial specifications. GAC to military and federal specifications is available. CARBON STEEL AIRCRAFT CABLE Galvanized cable has the highest strength and greatest fatigue life of the materials offered. It has good to fair corrosion resistance in rural to industrial atmosphere environments. This material is most widely used for small diameter cable. Tin over galvanized cable offers greater corrosion resistance and reduced friction over pulleys. 7 x 19 7 x 19 7 X 19 GALVANIZED APPROX. WT 1000 FT/LBS. MIN. BREAKING STRENGTH STAINLESS STEEL MIN. BREAKING STRENGTH (LBS.) DIA. 3/ , / ,000 1,760 5/ ,800 2,400 3/ ,200 3,700 7/ ,600 5,000 1/ ,000 6,400 9/ ,000 7,800 5/ ,800 9,000 3/ ,400 12,000 VINYL COATED GALVANIZED AIRCRAFT CABLE DIA. COATED TO CONSTRUCTION APPROX WT/FT MIN. BREAKING STRENGTH 3/32 3/16 7 x /8 3/16 7 x ,700 1/8 3/16 7 x ,000 3/16 1/4 7 x ,200 1/4 5/16 7 x ,000 3/8 7/16 7 x ,400 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

183 Wire Ropes ABRASION AND BENDING THE X CHART : ABRASION RESISTANCE VS. BENDING-FATIGUE RESISTANCE While there is a possibility, there is likelihood that an application can be found for which there is a precisely suitable wire rope one that can satisfy every indicated requirement. As with all engineering design problems, feasible solutions demand compromise to some degree. At times, it becomes necessary to settle for less than optimum resistance to abrasion in order to obtain maximum flexibility; the latter being a more important requirement for the given job. A typical example of this kind of trade-off would be in selecting a highly flexible rope on an overhead crane. Conversely, in a haulage installation, a rope with greater resistance to abrasion would be chosen despite the fact that such ropes are markedly less flexible. actual wear is slight. The smaller the diameter of the sheave, the sooner these fatigue breaks will occur and the shorter rope life becomes. Another undesirable effect of small sheaves is accelerated wear of both rope and sheave groove. The pressure per unit area of rope on sheave groove for a given load is inversely proportional to the size of the sheave. In other words, the smaller the sheave the greater the rope pressure per unit area on the groove. Both sheaves and rope life can obviously be prolonged by using the proper diameter sheave for the size and construction of rope. Sheave diameter can also influence rope strength. When a wire rope is bent around a sheave, there is a loss of effective strength due to the inability of the individual strands and wire to adjust themselves entirely to their changed position. Tests show that rope strength efficiency decreases to a marked degree as the sheave diameter is reduced with respect to the diameter of the rope. Therefore, it is evident that a definite relationship exists between rope service and sheave size. As a guide to rope users, wire rope manufacturers have established standards for various rope constructions. To secure the most economical service, it is important that the suggested size of sheaves given below be used. Two compelling factors that govern most decisions as to the selection of a wire rope are: abrasion resistance, and resistance to bending fatigue. Striking a proper balance with respect to these two important characteristics demands judgment of a very high order. A graphic presentation of just such comparison of qualities between the most widely used rope constructions and others is given by means of X-chart. Referring to this chart when selecting a rope, the mid-point (at the X) comes closest to an even balance between abrasion resistance and resistance to bending fatigue. Reading up or down along either leg of the X, the inverse relationship becomes more apparent as one quality increases and the other decreases. The wire rope industry refers to this as the X-chart. It serves to illustrate the inverse relationship between abrasion resistance and resistance to bending fatigue in a representative number of the most widely used wire ropes. 6 6 x 7 NUMBER OF OUTSIDE WIRES PER STRAND LEAST RESISTANCE TO BENDING FATIGUE GREATEST LEAST RESISTANCE TO ABRASION GREATEST 6 x 19 S 6 x 21 FW Flattened Strand 6 x 25 FW 6 x 31 WS 6 x 36 WS 6 x 49 WS 6 x 64 SFWS EFFECT OF SHEAVE SIZE Wire ropes are manufactured in a great variety of constructions to meet the varying demands of wire rope usage. Where abrasion is an important factor, the rope must be made of a coarse construction containing relatively large wires. In other cases, the great amount of bending to which the rope is subjected is more important. Here, a more flexible construction, containing many relatively small wires, is required. In either case, however, if the rope operates over inadequate size sheaves, the severe bending stresses imposed will cause the wires to break from fatigue, even though PROPER SHEAVE AND DRUM SIZES CONSTRUCTION SUGGESTED D/d* RATIO MINIMUM D/d* RATIO 6 x x 7 or 18 x 7 Rotation Resistant x 19 Seale x 27 H Flattened strand x 31 V Flattened strand x 21 Filler wire x 25 Filler wire x 31 Warrington Seale x 36 Warrington Seale x 19 Seale x 25 Filler wire x 41 Warrington Seale x 42 Filler WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

184 Wire Ropes ABRASION RESISTANCE...DECREASES with Smaller Wires FATIGUE RESISTANCE...DECREASES with Fewer Wires...INCREASES with Larger Wires...INCREASES with More Wires DIAMETER WIRE ROPE NOMINAL STRENGTHS AND WEIGHTS 6 X 19 CLASS 6 X 36 CLASS NOMINAL STRENGTH IN TONS OF POUNDS IMPROVED PLOW STEEL EXTRA IMPROVED PLOW STEEL APPROXIMATE WEIGHT PER FOOT FIBER CORE IWRC IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC 3/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Available galvanized at 10% lower strengths, or in equivalent strengths on special request. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

185 Wire Ropes INSPECTION THE KEY TO LONGER, SAFER WIRE ROPE USE Any wire rope in use should be inspected on a regular basis. You have too much at stake in lives and equipment to ignore thorough examination of the rope at prescribed intervals. The purpose of inspection is to accurately estimate the service life and strength remaining in a rope so that maximum service can be had within the limits of safety. Results of the inspection should be recorded to provide a history of rope performance on a particular job. On most jobs, wire rope must be replaced before there is a risk of failure. A rope broken in service can destroy machinery and curtail production. It can also kill. JUST LOOKING AT THE ROPE IS NOT ENOUGH When an inspector takes a look at a rope, he may see sections showing excessive wear. By flagging the rope, he can quickly determine where the rope is rubbing or contacting parts of the equipment, and then repair, replace or modify the condition causing wear. Inspections of sheaves is a relatively simple, yet very vital task. A sheave groove gauge, usually obtainable from a wire rope manufacturer, is used to check the grooves in a sheave. Hold the gauge perpendicular to the surface of the groove to observe properly the groove size and contour, as in this illustration. Because of the great responsibility involved in ensuring safe rigging on equipment, the man assigned to inspect should know wire rope and its operation thoroughly. Inspections should be made regularly and the results recorded. When inspecting the rope, the condition of the drum, sheaves, guards, cable clamps and other end fittings should be noted. The condition of these parts affects rope wear; any defects detected should be repaired. To ensure rope soundness between inspections, all workers should participate. The operation can be most helpful by watching the ropes under his control. If any accident involving the ropes occurs, the operator should immediately shut down his equipment and report the accident to his supervisor. The equipment should be inspected before resuming operation. The Occupational Safety and Health Act has made periodic inspection mandatory for most wire rope applications. Photo shows new gauge and worn sheave. This new gauge is designed with one-half the allowable oversize (see table). Using the new gauge, when you do not see light, the sheave is OK. When you do see light under the new gauge, the sheave should be replaced. NOMINAL ROPE DIAMETER ALLOWABLE ROPE OVERSIZE ONE-HALF ALLOW- ABLE ROPE OVERSIZE 0" - 3/4" +1/32" +1/64" 13/16" - 1-1/8" +3/64" +3/128" 1-3/16" - 1-1/2" +1/16" +1/32" 1-9/16" - 2-1/4" +3/32" +3/64" 2-5/16" - & larger +1/8" +1/16" 183 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

186 Wire Ropes SHEAVES SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR: 1. Correct groove diameter 2. Roundness or contour to give proper support to the rope 3. Small holes, cracks, uneven surfaces, or other defects that might be detrimental to the rope 4. Extreme deep wear A sheave should also be checked to make sure it turns freely, is properly aligned, has no broken or cracked flanges, and has bearings that work properly. Drums should also be inspected for signs of wear that could damage rope. Plain-faced or smooth drums can develop grooves or impressions that prevent rope from winding properly. Repair by resurfacing the face or replacing the lagging. RIGHT WAY Set the machinist's caliper to read the widest diameter. Vernier scale reads to 1/128th of an inch. Scrubbing will occur if the rope tends to close wind. If the tendency is to open winding, the rope will encounter abnormal abuse as the second layer forces itself down between the open wraps of the first layer on the drum. Operating with a smooth drum calls for special care. Be sure the rope is always tightly wound and thread laid on the first layer. Any loosening of the line is easily observed as the winding will be bad and the rope will be coming off with a series of bad spots. Grooved drums should be examined for tight or corrugated grooves and for differences in depth or pitch that could damage the second and subsequent layers. Worn grooves can develop extremely sharp edges that shave away small particles of steel from the rope. Correct this condition by grinding or filing a radius to replace the sharp edge. Drum flanges, as well as the starter, filler and riser strips, should be checked. Excessive wear here often causes unnecessary rope abuse at the change of layers and cross-over points. Other places of contact such as rollers, scrub boards, guides and end-attachments should also be inspected. MEASURE THE WIDEST DIAMETER Ropes and sheave grooves must be precisely fitted to each other to get the most service out of your wire rope dollar. Make measurement of rope diameter a normal part of your inspection program. WRONG WAY This is the wrong way to measure wire rope diameter. Widest diameter is not being read. There's only one right way to measure rope diameter: use machinist's calipers and be sure to measure the widest diameter. The drawings at the left compare the right way with the wrong way. This method is not only useful for measuring the diameter of a new rope, but also for determining the amount of wear and compression that has occurred while the rope has been in use. Accurate recording of this information is essential in helping to decide when to replace wire rope. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

187 Wire Ropes COMMON WIRE ROPE ABUSES Neglect and abuse are the two chief enemies of wire rope life. One costly form of neglect is lack of proper field lubrication. Abuse takes many forms: improper reeling or unreeling, wrong size or worn sheaves, improper storage, and bad splicing are a few. CONDITION OF MACHINERY CRUSHING. Because of loose winding on drum, rope was pulled in between underlying wraps and crushed out of shape. Wire rope performance depends upon the condition of the equipment on which it operates; poorly maintained equipment will usually result in reduced rope life. EFFECTS OF SHOCK-LOADING AND VIBRATION The destructive effects of jerking or shock-loading are visually noticeable. Vibration has somewhat the same effect, and is equally destructive. An individual shock may be slight, but many rapidly repeated slight shocks can have the effect of several large shocks. TOO SUDDEN LOAD RELEASE. The sudden release of a load caused birdcaging. Here individual strands open away from each other, displacing the core. Vibration which occurs directly above a load is often unavoidable. Whipping of the section of rope immediately above the load is also common. In these cases, rapid wire fatigue is possible. For reasons of safety, this section should be examined regularly. Wire rope failure is usually cumulative. Each repeated overstress brings the rope nearer to failure. Thus, a wire rope may become fatigued to a point close to failure under a heavy load, and actually fail under a much lighter load. LACK OF LUBRICATION. Premature breakage of wires resulted from locking of strands, which was caused by insufficient lubrication. OVERSTRESSING In any hoisting operation, there should be no slack in the wire rope when the load is applied. Otherwise, the resulting stress will be excessive. Overstressing can also be the result of too-rapid acceleration or deceleration. Wire rope will withstand considerable stress if the load is applied slowly. As with ordinary twine, a quick snap will cause overstressing and breakage. This applies both when starting to lift a load, and when bringing it to a stop. CORROSION Corrosion can seriously shorten wire rope life, both by metal loss & by formation of corrosion pits in the wires. These pits act as stress-concentration points in the wires in much the same manner as do nicks. INFREQUENT INSPECTION. Neglect of periodical inspection left this rope in service too long, resulting in considerable abrasion. IMPROPER HANDLING. Kink or dog leg was caused by improper handling and/or installation. A kink causes excessive localized or spot abrasion. continued WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

188 Wire Ropes WIRE ROPE ABUSE continued Wire rope left on machines shut down for long periods of time deteriorates rapidly. To preserve the rope for future sue, it should be removed, cleaned and thoroughly lubricated. CAUSES OF CORROSION DAMAGE Pitting, erosion and surface effects of many different types can all result in corrosion damage. Because they tend to increase corrosion, the following conditions should be considered and noted when applicable, during the ordering of wire rope: acid and alkaline solutions, gases, fumes, brine and salt air, sulphurous compounds, and high humidity and temperature. Lubricants are readily available to reduce the severity of attack of most of these conditions. EFFECTS OF SEVERE HEAT Where wire rope is subjected to severe heat (e.g., foundry cranes) it will not give the service expected because it will deteriorate more quickly. Wire ropes exposed to hot-metal handling or other extreme heat sometimes require independent wire rope cores. REVERSE BENDING. Running this rope over one sheave and under another caused fatigue breaks in wires. EXCESSIVE EXPOSURE TO ELEMENTS. Too much exposure combined with surface wear and loss of lubrication caused corrosion and pitting. TOO LONG IN SERVICE. Repeated winding and overwinding of this rope on a drum while it was under heavy stress caused the unusually severe wear shown. SHIFTING ROPES FROM ONE JOB TO ANOTHER Sometimes an idle wire rope from one operation is installed on another to keep the rope in continuous service. This extremely poor practice is an expensive economy. Because wire rope tends to set to the conditions of its particular operating job, the differing bends, abrasions and stresses of a new operation can produce premature failure. Therefore, for a maximum life and efficiency, a rope should be used only on the job for which it has been specified. MACHINERY OPERATION Some operators are harder on their machinery than others and as a result they get shorter rope life. In certain instances, enough extra work is done to more than offset the additional wear-and-tear on equipment and wire rope. The operation may be more efficient from the production standpoint as a result, but those in charge of rope purchases should be made aware of the probable reduction in rope life and increased rope costs. UNDERSIZE SHEAVE GROOVES. Sheaves were too small, causing strands to pinch. Wires then fail in the valley between the strands. POOR WORK PROCEDURES. Damage to strands and wires resulted from electric arcing. LACK OF KNOWLEDGE. Here's what occurs when a loop which has been pulled through and tightened remains in service. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

189 Wire Ropes ROPE STRENGTH AND DESIGN FACTORS The rope strength design factor is the ratio of the rated strength of the rope to its operating stress. If a particular rope has a rated strength of 100,000 lbs. and is working under an operating stress of 20,000 lbs., it has a rope strength design factor of 5. It is operating at one-fifth or 20% of its rated strength. Many codes refer to this factor as the Safety Factor which is a misleading term, since this ratio obviously does not include the many facets of an operation which must be considered in determining safety. Wire rope is an expendable item a replacement part of a machine or installation. For economic and other reasons, some installations require ropes to operate at high stresses (low rope strength design factors). On some installations where high risk is involved, high rope strength design factors must be maintained. However, operating and safety codes exist for most applications and these codes give specific factors for usage. When a machine is working and large dynamic loadings (shock loading) are imparted to the rope, the rope strength design factor will be reduced which could result in overstressing of the rope. Reduced rope strength design factors frequently result in reduced service life of wire rope. O.S.H.A. (A.N.S.I.) Removal Criteria 5. A.N.S.I. Safety Codes, Standards and Requirements rope must be removed from service when diameter loss or wire breakage occurs as follows: DIAMETER LOSS ORIGINAL DIAMETER LOSS 5/16 & smaller 1/64 3/8-1/2 1/32 9/16-3/4 3/64 7/8-1-1/8 1/16 1-1/4-1-1/2 3/32 NUMBER OF WIRE BREAKS NUMBER BROKEN WIRES IN RUNNING ROPES NUMBER BROKEN WIRES IN STANDING ROPES A.N.S.I. NO. EQUIPMENT IN ONE ROPE LAY IN ONE STRAND IN ONE ROPE LAY IN ONE STRAND B30.2 Overhead & Gantry Cranes 12 4 Not specified Not specified B30.4 Portal, Tower & Pillar Cranes B30.5 Crawler, Locomotive & Truck Cranes B30.6 Derricks B30.7 Base Mounted Drum Hoists B30.8 Floating Cranes & Derricks A10.4 Personnel Hoists 6* 3 2* 2 A10.5 Material Hoists 6* Not specified Not specified Not specified *Also remove for 1 valley break. OSHA requires monthly record keeping of wire rope condition. Note: Current industry recommendations and OSHA Standards are based upon the use of steel sheaves. The manufacturer of plastic or synthetic sheaves or liners should be consulted for their recommendations on the safe application of their product, and possible revision in rope inspection criteria when used with their product. 187 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

190 Wire Ropes ROPE STRENGTH AND DESIGN FACTORS To the abuses of bending over small diameter sheaves, pinching in undersize sheave grooves, crushing when winding on drums, and failing due to excessive rotation. Left lay rope has greatest usage in oil fields on rod and tubing lines, blast hole rigs, and spudders where rotation of right lay rope would loosen couplings. The rotation of a left lay rope tightens a standard coupling. A wire rope is a piece of flexible, multi-wired, stranded machinery made of many precision parts. Usually a wire rope consists of a core member, around which a number of multi-wired strands are laid or helically bent. There are two general types of cores for wire rope fiber cores and wire cores. The fiber core may be made from natural or synthetic fibers. The wire core can be an Independent Wire Core (IWRC), or Strand Core (SC). The purpose of the core is to provide support and maintain the position of the outer strands during operation. UNDERSTAND WHAT THE LAYS OF WIRE ROPE MEAN Lay of a wire rope is simply a description of the way wires and strands are placed during construction. Right lay and left lay refer to the direction of strands. Right lay means that the strands pass from left to right across the rope. Left lay means just the opposite; strands pass from right to left. Regular lay and lang lay describe the way wires are placed within each strand. Regular lay means that wires in the strands are laid opposite in direction to the lay of the strands. Lang lay means that wires are laid in the same direction as the lay of the strands. Any number of multi-wired strands may be laid around the core. The most popular arrangement is six strands around the core, as this combination gives the best balance. The number of wires per strand may vary from 3 to 91, with the majority or wire ropes falling into the 7-wire, 19-wire, or 36 wire strand categories. LENGTH OF SERVICE DEPENDS ON HOW YOU TREAT YOUR WIRE ROPES. Most of the wire rope used is right lay, regular lay. This specification has the widest range of applications and meets the requirements of most equipment. In fact, other lay specifications are considered exceptions and must be requested when ordering. HERE ARE SOME EXCEPTIONS Lang lay is recommended for many excavating, construction, and mining applications, including draglines, hoist lines, dredgelines and other similar lines. Here's why. Lang lay ropes are more flexible than regular lay ropes. They also have greater wearing surface per wire than regular lay ropes. Where properly recommended, installed and used, lang lay ropes can be used to greater advantage than regular lay ropes. However, lang lay ropes are more susceptible. RIGHT LAY LEFT LAY RIGHT LAY LEFT LAY REGULAR LAY REGULAR LAY LANG LAY LANG LAY WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

191 D/d Ratio HOW TO CALCULATE THE D/d RATIO D/d Ratio Efficiencies D/d Ratio Efficiencies % % 1" 15" D/d ratio = 15: 15" 1" = 15 15:1 ratio = Approx. 88% efficiency. Radius of Contact 20 92% % 15 88% 3 71% 10 86% % 8 84% % 6 80% % 5 78% 2 65% % % % % 4 75% % % 1 50% Wire Rope Slings The diameter of curvature around which a wire rope sling is bent affects its capacity. This is known as the D/d ratio. The capital D refers to the diameter of a sheave, hoist drum, or with rigging the diameter of the object to which the sling hitch is applied. The lower case d represents the diameter of the wire rope. To determine the D/d ratio, divide the diameter of the wire rope sling into the diameter of the load. A good rule to follow is to try and keep at least a 6:1 ratio which results in an 80% efficiency of the sling. A 1:1 ratio results in only 50% efficiency of the sling. Softeners, as seen above, are often used to help create a better D/d ratio. For example, when the diameter of the load is 15 times the diameter of the wire rope sling the D/d ratio is 15:1. 1" 4" Softener protecting chain Alloy Chain Sling D/d Ratio Strength Efficiencies 6:1 or greater 100% 5:1 90% 4:1 80% 3:1 70% 2:1 60% less than 2:1 Not recommended D/d ratio = 4:1 4" 1" = 4 4:1 ratio = Approx. 80% efficiency. Chain Slings As with wire rope slings, the diameter of curvature around which an alloy chain sling is bent affects its capacity. To determine the D/d ratio, divide the diameter of the alloy chain sling into the diameter of the load. For example, when the diameter of the load is 4 times the diameter of the alloy chain sling the D/d ratio is 4: WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

192 Wire Ropes BLOCK TWISTING Block twisting or cabling is one of the most frequently encountered wire rope problems in the construction field. When this problem occurs, the wire rope is most often blamed, and other equally important factors in the operation are overlooked. Personnel experienced with handling of wire rope know that conventional wire ropes will twist or unlay slightly, when a load is applied. In a reeved hoisting system, subjected to loading and unloading such as a load hoisting line, this results in block twisting and possibly distortion of the wire rope. Cabling of the block most frequently occurs as the load in the wire rope is released, and the falls are in a lowered position. Cabling may be considered as the twisting of the block beyond one-half of a revolution (180 twisting) of the traveling block. When this condition occurs, the operator shows good judgment in not making additional lifts, until the conditions causing the problem are corrected. The following machine and site conditions should be investigated for possible improvement in block twisting. 1. Reduced wire rope length. Longer rope lengths cause more twisting than short rope lengths. This applies particularly to the amount of wire rope in the falls. 2. Reduce the amount of load lifted. Heavily loaded ropes have more torque and twist than ELASTIC STRETCH lightly loaded ropes. This condition would also apply to the speed of loading or shock loading, since this condition also causes higher wire rope loading. 3. Eliminate odd-part reeving, where the wire rope dead-end is on the traveling block. Wire rope torque, from the application of load, is greatest at the rope dead-end. 4. Relocate the rope dead-end at the boom, in order to increase the separation between the dead-end and the other rope parts. This applies a stabilizing load directly to the traveling block. The original equipment manufacturer should be consulted before making this modification. 5. Increase sheave size. This increases the amount of separation between wire rope parts and may improve the situation by applying stabilizing loads and reducing the amount of rope torque transmitted to the traveling block. 6. Restrain the twisting block with a tag line. One or more of the foregoing suggestions may eliminate the problem without resorting to specialized wire rope which may not only be difficult to locate but expensive as well. The use of special rotation resistant wire ropes will not likely be required unless the intended length of rope falls exceeds 100 feet, or the length of the load hoisting line exceeds 600 feet. In the event these latter conditions exist, the user should also anticipate using a combination of the rotation resistant wire rope and the foregoing field suggestions for the more severe problems. Elastic stretch results from recoverable deformation of the metal itself. Here, again, a quantity cannot be precisely calculated. However, the following equation can provide a reasonable approximation for a good many situations. Change in load (lb.) x Length (ft.) Changes in length (ft.) = Area (in.2) x Modulus of Elasticity (psi) The modulus of elasticity is given below. APPROXIMATE MODULUS OF ELASTICITY (POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH) ROPE CLASSIFICATION ZERO THROUGH 20% LOADING 21 TO 65% LOADING* 6 x 7 with fiber core 11,700,000 13,000,000 6 x 19 with fiber core 10,800,000 12,000,000 6 x 36 with fiber core 9,900,000 11,000,000 8 x 19 with fiber core 8,100,000 9,000,000 6 x 19 with IWRC 13,500,000 15,000,000 6 x 36 with IWRC 12,600,000 14,000,000 *Applicable to new rope, i.e., not previously loaded. PHYSICAL PROPERTIES ELASTIC PROPERTIES OF WIRE ROPE The following discussion relates to conventional 6- or 8-strand ropes that have either fiber or steel cores; it is not applicable to rotation-resistant ropes since these constitute a separate case. Wire rope is an elastic member; it stretches or elongates under load. This stretch derives from two sources: 1. Constructional, and 2. Elastic. In actuality, there may be a third source of stretch a result of the rope rotating on its own axis. Such elongation, which may occur either as a result of using a swivel, or from the effect of a free-turning load, is brought about by the unlaying of the rope strands. Because the third source is a subject that is beyond the scope of this publication, discussion will be directed to constructional and elastic stretch. CONSTRUCTIONAL STRETCH When a load is applied to wire rope, the helically-laid wires and strands act in a constricting manner thereby compressing the core and bringing all the rope elements into closer contact. The result is a slight reduction in diameter and an accompanying lengthening of the rope. Constructional stretch is influenced by the following factors: 1. Type of core (fiber or steel), 2. Rope construction (6 x 7, 6 x 25 FW, 6 x 41 WS, 8 x 19 S, etc.), 3. Length of lay 4. Material. Ropes with wire strand core (WSC) or independent wire rope core (IWRC) have less constructional stretch than those with fiber core (FC). The reason for this is the fact that the steel cannot compress as much as the fiber core. Usually, constructional stretch will cease at an early stage in the rope's life. However, some fiber core ropes, if lightly loaded (as in the case of elevator ropes), may display a degree of constructional stretch over a considerable portion of their life. A definite value for determining constructional stretch cannot be assigned since it is influenced by several factors. The following table gives some idea of the approximate stretch as a percentage of rope under load. ROPE CONSTRUCTION APPROX. STRETCH* 6 strand FC 1/2% - 3/4% 6 strand IWRC 1/4% - 1/2% 8 strand FC 3/4% - 1% *Varies with the magnitude of the loading. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

193 General Information In reeving a pair of tackle blocks, one of which has more than two sheaves, the hoisting rope should lead from one of the center sheaves of the upper block. When so reeved, the hoisting strain comes on the center of the blocks and they are prevented from toppling, with consequent injury to the rope by cutting across the edges of the block shell. FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 ROPE STRENGTH AND DESIGN FACTORS FIGURE 3 FIGURE 4 To reeve by this method, the two blocks should be placed so that the sheaves in the upper block are at right angles to those in the lower one, as shown in the following illustrations. Start reeving with the becket, or standing end, of the rope. It is good practice to use a shackle block as the upper one of a pair and a hook block as the lower one. A shackle would prevent any accidental disengagement of the block from its attaching point in the event of an unusual movement of the attaching point or block. The lower block having a hook is more readily attached or detached from the load. See Figures 1 through 5. FIGURE 5 DOUBLE AND DOUBLE TRIPLE AND DOUBLE TRIPLE AND TRIPLE QUADRUPLE AND TRIPLE SHEAVE NO. 5 SHEAVE NO. 1 SHEAVE NO. 3 VARYING SHEAVE REVOLUTIONS IN A PAIR OF TACKLE BLOCKS To raise a load one foot, the lower block must be raised one foot, and in accomplishing this, each working rope must be shortened one foot. In the example above, Ropes 1, 2, 3, etc., must be shortened one foot to raise the load one foot. Assuming that the circumference of each sheave is one foot, Sheave No.1 must make one revolution to shorten Rope No. 1; Sheave No. 2 must make one revolution to take up the one foot slack form Rope No. 1 and one additional revolution to shorten Rope No. 2; Sheave No. 3 must make two revolutions to take up the two feet of slack from Ropes 1 and 2 and one additional revolution to shorten Rope No. 3, etc. for each succeeding sheave. Viz: Rope No. 1 must travel one foot on Sheave No. 1. Rope No. 2 must travel two feet on Sheave No. 2. Rope No. 3 must travel three feet on Sheave No. 3. Rope No. 4 must travel four feet on Sheave No. 4. Rope No. 5 must travel five feet on Sheave No. 5. Therefore, all the sheaves in a set of blocks revolve at different rates of speed. Sheave No. 2 rotates twice as fast as No. 1, Sheave No. 3 rotates three times as fast as No.1, Sheave No. 4 four times as fast as No. 1, etc. Consequently the sheaves nearest the lead line, rotating at higher rates of speed, wear out more rapidly. SHEAVE NO. 2 SHEAVE NO. 4 All sheaves should be kept well lubricated when in operation to reduce friction and wear. 191 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

194 HOW TO FIGURE LINE PARTS General Information NUMBER OF PARTS OF LINE RATIO FOR BRONZE BUSHED SHEAVES RATIO FOR ANTI-FRICTION BEARING SHEAVES To help figure the number of parts of line to be used for a given load or the line pull required for a given load, the following ratio table is provided with examples of how to use it: 1 PART OF LINE 2 PART OF LINE 3 PART OF LINE 4 PART OF LINE 5 PART OF LINE USING THE RATIO TABLE RATIO FORMULA TOTAL LOAD TO BE LIFTED = RATIO SINGLE LINE PULL IN POUNDS Example: To find the number of parts of line needed when weight of load and single line pull is established. Sample Problem: 72,480 lbs. (load to be lifted) 8,000 lbs. (single line pull) = 9.06 RATIO Refer to ratio 9.06 in table or number nearest to it, then check column under heading Number of Parts of Line parts of line to be used for this load. Example: To find single line pull needed when weight of load and number of parts of line are established. Sample Problem: 68,000 lbs. (load to be lifted) 6.60 (ratio of 8 part line) = 10,300 lbs. (single line pull) 10,300 lbs. single line pull required to lift this load on 8 parts of line. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

195 General Information LOADS ON BLOCKS The Rated Load Values for blocks shown in Crosby Group literature are shown as Working Loads, Safe Working Load and Resultant Safe Working Load ; and all these terms are defined as the maximum amount of total load that should be exerted on the block and its fitting, the fitting being a hook, shackle, eye, loop, etc. It must be recognized that this total load value MAY BE DIFFERENT than the weight being lifted or pulled by a hoisting or hauling system and, therefore, it is necessary to determine the total load being imposed on each block in the system in order to properly determine the rated capacity block to be used. A single sheave block that is used to change direction of a load line can be subjected to total loads GREATLY DIFFERENT than the weight being lifted or pulled. The amount of total load changes with the angle between the incoming and departing lines to the block. The following chart indicates the factor that is multiplied by the line pull to obtain the total load on the block: ANGLE FACTOR ANGLE FACTOR ANGLE FACTOR TOTAL LOAD ANGLE LINE PULL LINE PULL Example: A gin pole truck being used to lift a weight of 1,000 lbs. There is no mechanical advantage to a single part load line system, so, winch line pull is equal to 1,000 lbs. or the weight being lifted. Total load on snatch block shown as A equals 1,000 lbs. times angle factor for 50. Total load on A = 1,000 x 1.81 = 1,1810 lbs. Total load on toggle block shown as B equals 1,000 lbs. times angle factor for 135. Total load on B = 1,000 x.76 = 760 lbs. WINCH LINE PULL 135 B 50 A 1000 LBS Example: Hoisting system using a traveling block to lift a weight of 1,000 lbs. The mechanical advantage at the traveling block C is 2 because 2 parts of a load line support the 1,000 lbs. weight; so, the line pull equals the 1,000 lbs. divided by 2 or 500 lbs. Total load on traveling block shown as C equals 500 lbs. times angle factor for 0. Total Load on C = 500 x 2.00 = 1,000 lbs D Total load on stationary block shown as D equals the dead end load of 500 lbs. plus the line pull of 500 lbs. times the angle factor for 40. Total Load on E = 500 x.84 = 420 lbs. 50 E C Total load on block shown as F equals 500 lbs. times the angle factor for 90. Total Load on F = 500 x 1.41 = 705 lbs LBS 193 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

196 Basic Lift Engineering EFFECT OF ANGLES Various sling manufacturers refer in their specification tables to leg angles of slings during lifts since these angles have a direct relationship to lifting capability of a sling. Regardless of how the sling angle may be stated, or the method used to compute stress in a sling leg, the sling is the same. Capacity does not change but stresses on sling legs change with rigging angles. Much misunderstanding results because the carrying capacity of a sling leg is reduced by the rigging angle. What happens is that the operator is lifting the load straight up (vertical) while the legs are pulling at an angle, thereby causing a disadvantage. For quick figuring in the shop, a 60-degree leg angle causes a loss in lifting capacity of 15%... a 45-degree angle reduces capacity by 30%... and a 30-degree angle, 50%. This rule of thumb is not 100% accurate, but is easy to remember and slightly on the safe side. It is always good practice, within limits, to keep the sling leg angle as large as possible. The length and width of the load sling length, and available headroom are determining factors in this sling angle. It is neither economical nor good practice to exceed a 45-degree sling leg angle. Angles less than 45 degrees not only build up tension in the sling legs out of all proportion to the weight of the load, they also create a much greater in-pull on the ends of the load. This produces eccentrically loaded column effect, as an engineer would describe it meaning simply that long, slender objects have a tendency to buckle. Angles less than 45 degrees indicate some thought should be given to the use of a lifting beam or other device in connection with the lift. Studying typical sling charts readily reveals that lifting capacities on slings are misleading unless the sling angle is stated. The same sling that will handle 10 tons at an 85-degree leg angle will only handle 5 tons if this angle is decreased to 30 degrees. GOOD SLING PRACTICE Regardless of what type of sling may be employed, there are accepted good working rules which will help increase useful sling life as well as improve safety. These include: 1.Use The proper sling for the lift. Whether Twin- Path, Web, Chain, or Wire Rope, the proper sling is the one with the best combination of work and handling feature of the proper length and rated capacity for the situation. 2.Start and stop slowly. Crane hooks should be raised slowly until the sling becomes taut and the load is suspended. Lifting or lowering speed should be increased or decreased gradually. Sudden starts or stops place heavier loads on a sling comparable to jamming the brakes on a speeding automobile. A rule of thumb: Shock loads can double the stress on a sling. 3. If possible, set the load on blocks. Pulling a sling from under a load causes abrasion and curling making the sling harder to handle on the next lift, while reducing strength through loss of metal. 4. Sharp corners cut slings. Use protector arcs, Cornermax and Synthetic Armor Wear Pads between sharp corners and the sling body. 5. Store in a dry room. Moisture is a natural enemy of wire rope as are acid fumes and other caustic gases. 6. Avoid handling hot material or objects in direct contact with the sling. Strength goes down as temperature goes up! 7. Dropping casting, tools or heavy objects on slings, or running over them with trucks, can cause damage. Always hang slings when not in use. 8. Use hooks properly. Point loading reduces hook capacity. Pull should be straight in the line of lift. SELECTING A SLING The following is presented as a guide only to help in selection of a sling for a lift. 1.Determine the Load: The weight of the load must be known. This is always the starting point. 2. Decide the Hitch: Shape and bulk of the load must be accommodated as well as weight. Determine whether a straight attachment at some point on the load, a choker around the load, or some form of basket hitch will best control the load during the lift. 3. Adequacy of Lifting Device: The lifting device must have adequate capacity for making the lift, and provide any maneuverability required once the load is hoisted. 4. Room to Lift: Make certain the lifting device has sufficient headroom to raise the load to the height required. Headroom will affect the length of sling. 5. Length of Sling: By applying your decision on the type of hitch to knowledge of the headroom offered by the lifting device, the length of sling can be calculated. 6. Use Rated Capacity Chart: Always doublecheck that the sling type and capacity you choose, when rigged at the angle determined by the length of the sling, or the specific type of hitch, will handle the load. Attaching the sling and completing the lift should be an orderly procedure without surprises when these steps have been followed. Two further precautions should be noted, however. First, plan to protect both load and sling from damage at sharp corners, etc. Cornermax and Synthetic Armor Wear Pads should be provided at the lift site. A protective pad should be used anytime a sling passes around a sharp corner. Last by no means unimportant by being last every sling should be visually examined from end to end BEFORE EVERY LIFT. It must always be kept in mind that the manufacturer's Rated Capacity applies only to a new sling in unused condition. A sling should be carefully examined to determine that it is in as nearly new condition as practicable before each lift. There are specific standards on the use and care of slings in industries such as shipping and construction, and these provide some guidance for sling inspectors. Consensus standards published as ANSI B30.9 are particularly helpful. ANSI Standard B30.9 specifies that a wire rope sling should be removed form service any time any of the following conditions are detected: 1. Ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay, or five broken wires in one strand in one rope lay. 2. Kinking, crushing, bird caging or any other damage resulting in distortion of the wire rope structure. 3. Evidence of heat damage. 4. End attachments that are cracked, deformed, or worn. 5. Hooks that have been opened more than 15% of the normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point, or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook. 6. Corrosion of the rope or end attachments. It is apparent from the foregoing that inspection of a wire rope sling to meet these removal criteria requires more than a casual understanding of wire rope design and manufacture, and the responsibility for daily inspections must be in the hands of trained personnel. Most of the foregoing applies equally to any type of sling and careful inspection by a trained inspector is necessary for safe sling use. If you require training for any type of sling inspection, contact Hanes Supply for more information. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

197 Lift Engineering With the Pythagorean Theorem knowing two sides of a right triangle makes it possible to calculate the third side C B A To find c (hypotenuse) Given: a 2 + b 2 = c 2 Example: = c 2 ; = c 2 ; 25 = 5 To find a Given: c 2 -b 2 = a 2 Example: = a 2 ; 25-9 = c 2 ; 16 = 4 LOAD ANGLE FACTORS 5,000 LBS 5,000 LBS H L L 15 = LAF (Load Angle Factor) Example: = 1.5 (LAF) H 10 L Tension in L = x L's share of the load H H=10' 10,000 LBS L=15' Tension in L = 15 x 5,000; x 5,000 Ten. = 7,500 lbs. TENSION IN OVERHEAD HOISTS A 6' 2' 6' B 6 Ten. in A = x 3,000 Ten. in A = 9,000 lbs. 2 (As load moves, tension changes) 6,000 LBS OFF-SET CENTER OF GRAVITY (SHARE OF THE LOAD) A B Inverse Proportion To Distance 3' 7' 10,000 LBS Lift Point A Lift Point B = 10, = = 10, = x 10,000 = 7,000 lbs..30 x 10,000 = 3,000 lbs. OFF-LEVEL LIFT POINTS L 1 H 1 H 2 L 2 W x D 2 x L 1 TL1 = (D2 x H 1 ) + (D 1 x H 2 ) TL 2 = W x D 1 x L 2 (D 2 x H 1 ) + (D 1 x H 2 ) LEGEND W = Load Weight L 1 = Length Leg 1 L 2 = Length Leg 2 H 1 = Vertical Height 1 H 2 = Vertical Height 2 D 1 = Horizontal Distance 1 D 2 = Horizontal Distance 2 D 1 D WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

198 500 LBS STRAIGHT OR VERTICAL, attachment, is simply using a sling to connect a lifting hook to a load. Full rated lifting capacity of the sling may be utilized, but must not be exceeded. Whenever a single sling is used in this manner, a tagline should be used to prevent load rotation which may cause damage to the sling. When two or more slings are attached to the same lifting hook in straight or vertical manner, the total hitch becomes, in effect, a lifting bridle, and the load is distributed among the individual slings. CHOKER hitches reduce lifting capability of a sling, since this method of rigging affects ability of the wire rope components to adjust during the lift. A choker is used when the load will not be seriously damaged by the sling body or the sling damaged by the load, and when the lift requires the sling to snug up against the load. As the horizontal angle between the legs of a sling decreases, the load on each leg increases. The effect is the same whether a single sling is used as a basket, or two slings are used with each in a straight pull, as with a 2-legged bridle. Anytime pull is exerted at an angle on a leg or legs of a sling, the load per leg can be determined by using the data in the table at right. Proceed as follows to calculate this load and determine the rated capacity required of the sling, or slings, needed for a lift. 500 LBS The diameter of the bend where the sling contacts the load should keep the point of choke against the sling BODY never against a splice or the base of the eye. When a choke is used, the sling rated capacity must be adjusted downward to compensate for loss of capability. A choker hitch should be pulled tight before a lift is made NOT PULLED DOWN DURING THE LIFT. It is also dangerous to use only one choker hitch to lift a load which might shift or slide out of the choke. BASKET hitches distribute a load between the two legs of a sling within limitations described below. Capacity of a sling used in a basket is affected by the bend, or curvature, where the sling body comes in contact with the load just as any sling is affected and limited by bending action, as over a sheave. Basic Lift Engineering CALCULATING THE LOAD ON EACH LEG OF A SLING 1000 LBS EVERY LIFT USES 1 OF 3 BASIC HITCHES 1. First, divide the total load to be lifted by the number of legs to be used. This provides the load per leg if the lift were being made with all legs lifting vertically. 2. Determine the angle. 3. Then MULTIPLY the load per leg (as computed in No. 1 above) by the Load Factor for the leg angle being used (from the table below) to compute the ACTUAL LOAD on each leg for this lift and angle. THE ACTUAL LOAD MUST NOT EXCEED THE RATED SLING CAPACITY. Thus, in drawing three (sling angle at 60 ): = 500 (Load Per Leg if vertical lift) 500 x = 577 lbs. = ACTUAL LOAD on each leg at the 60 HORIZ. angle being used. In drawing four (sling angle of 45 ): = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift) 500 x = 707 lbs. = ACTUAL LOAD on each leg at the 45 HORIZ. angle being used. STRAIGHT CHOKER LOAD LOAD LEG ANGLES (DEGREES) BASKET LOAD LOAD FACTOR LBS LBS 577 LBS 1000 LBS 1000 LBS 577 LBS 707 LBS 1000 LBS 1000 LBS 1000 LBS 1000 LBS LBS Rated Capacity Adjustment For Choker Hitches ANGLE OF CHOKE IN DEGREES PERCENT OF SLING RATED CAPACITY APPLICABLE 100% 87% 74% 62% 49% When a choke is drawn down tight against a load, or a side pull is exerted resulting in an angle of less than 120, an adjustment must be made for further reduction of the sling rated capacity. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

199 Basic Lift Engineering Carrying Full Load Balancing Load The number of legs in a multi-leg sling will also have some bearing on the total lifting capacity. Unless the load is flexible, it is wrong to assume that a 3 or 4 leg hitch will safely lift a load equal to the safe load on one leg multiplied by the number of legs, because there is no way of knowing that each leg is carrying its share of the load. With slings having more than 2 legs lifting a rigid load, it is possible for two of the legs to be carrying a majority of the load while the others only balance it. Equal loading can be maintained on all legs using adjustable hitches, turnbuckles, or chain lever hoists. Bridle Sling Capacity Calculation Rated Load = single leg sling rated capacity x number of legs x sine of the horizontal angle. Sines 60 deg deg deg Ways to help equalize the loading on a 4-leg rigging system. Leg lengths equal Lever Hoists Turnbuckles Adjustable Hitches Two 2-leg bridles instead of one 4-leg Use sub-link assembles on 4-leg bridles 197 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

200 SLING HITCHES Sling Hitches There are three basic hitches; the vertical hitch, the choker hitch and the basket hitch. All other hitches are a combination or variation of the these sling hitches. Vertical Hitch - A hitch where the sling is used in an eye and eye or straight-pull configuration. The vertical hitch capacity reflects a full 100% of the slings Working Load Limit (WLL). The hitch's efficiency is reduced when used at any angle less than 90 from the horizontal plane. Vertical Hitch Choker Hitch - A hitch formed when one end of the sling is passed under or through the load and back up through the sling eye or hardware then is attached to the lifting hook or other device. The choker hitch WLL reflects 75% to 80% of the vertical hitch rating, when the angle of choke is 120 or greater. When the angle of the choke is less than 120, the hitch efficiency is reduced accordingly. Choker Hitch Basket Hitch - A hitch formed when the sling is passed under or through the load and back up with both ends placed in the hoisting hook or other device. The basket hitch WLL is 200% of the vertical hitch rating as long as both legs of the hitch are within 5 of vertical and the correct D/d ratio for the sling type is achieved. When the legs of the hitch are less than 90, its efficiency is reduced accordingly. Basket Hitch WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

201 135 Sling Hitches 2-leg Bridle Hitch Bridle Hitch - A hitch where multiple vertical hitches (usually 2 to 4 slings) are attached to a single upper attachment point to facilitate making the lift. Bridle Sling - A sling where multiple legs are gathered on a master link during fabrication. Bridle sling capacities are based on a specific angle with all legs lifting an equal share of the load weight. 2-leg Sling Hitch Rendered Choker Hitch - A hitch where the bite of the choke is rendered, to some degree, off to the side of the load. This helps to control a high center. Bite of Hitch Rendered Choke Hitch RENDERED CHOKER ADJUSTMENT ANGLE OF CHOKE EFFICIENCY OVER % % % % % Rendered Hitch Capacity = Choker WLL X Angle of Choke Efficiency 199 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

202 Sling Hitches Double Wrap Choker Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as a choker hitch that does not have an extra wrap. However, this hitch provides more load control because the extra wrap, around the load, provides 360 contact around the load. The double wrap is great for bundled loads and controlling a high center of gravity. Dbl. Wrap Choker Hitch Double Wrap Basket Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as a basket hitch. The extra wrap provides 360 contact around the load. The double wrap is great for bundled loads and controlling a high center of gravity. Dbl. Wrap Basket Hitch Double Choker Hitch - This hitch has double the choker hitch capacity when the body of the sling passes through the eyes and back to the hook. Thus allowing for full adjustment of the sling to equalize loading on all parts of the sling. Dbl. Choker Hitch Inverted Basket Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as a standard basket hitch: less the reduction of a small D/d ratio. It is used to increase the D/d ratio from a vertical basket through a shackle. It also provides continual adjustments when used in conjunction with snatch blocks during tilt up operations. It is possible for the inverted basket to run over the saddle of the hook unless restrained. Inverted Basket Hitch WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

203 Sling Hitches Double Basket Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as two basket hitches (with the same angle). This hitch should be used at angles no less than 60 from the horizontal plane. A tighter angle may cause the basket part of the hitch to run, making the load unstable. The hitch achieves an equilateral triangle at 60. Double Basket Hitch Adjustable Hitch - This hitch should be used with the choker hitch rating. This hitch is used for loads which have an offset center of gravity. For this hitch to work, the bends in the hitch must be tight. When slack, the hitch should be adjusted to the desired length. Once under load, friction will allow the hitch to stay in place. Rigging hardware should be used in the bite of the hitch. Adjustable Hitch Endless Choker Hitch - A choker hitch formed with an endless style sling provides a more stable hitch than if formed with an eye and eye style sling. This is because it provides a large base of support under the load. Endless Choker Hitch Endless Basket Hitch - A basket hitch formed with an endless style sling provides a more stable hitch than a basket hitch formed with an eye and eye style sling because it gives a large base of support under the load. Endless Basket Hitch 201 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

204 Sling Hitches Double Wrap Basket Hitches Double Wrap Choker Hitches Rendered Choker Hitch Endless Sling Vertical Hitches Two Vertical Hitches Adjustable Hitch WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

205 Measuring Bridle Sling Length Not all bridle sling lengths are measured the same. See the following examples: Sling Length Wire rope, synthetic web and synthetic roundslings are measured from the sling's bearing point located on the lower part of the master link to the bearing point of the sling or hardware attached on its opposite end. Wire Rope Sling Bridle Sling Length Alloy chain sling length is measured from bearing point to bearing point, this measurement is known as the Reach. The Reach is measured from the upper bearing point of master link to the bearing point of the sling or hardware attached on its opposite end. Alloy Chain Sling Bridle 203 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

206 How to Read a Tag Each synthetic web sling shall be marked to show: 1. Manufacturer's name or trademark 2. Manufacturer's code or stock number 3. Rated load for at least one hitch type and the angle it is based on 4. Type of synthetic web material 5. Number of legs if more than one Each wire rope sling shall be marked to show: 1. Manufacturer name or trademark 2. Rated load for at least one hitch type and the angle it is based on 3. Diameter or size 4. Number of legs if more than one Each alloy chain sling shall be marked to show: 1. Manufacturer's name or trademark 2. Grade and unique identification (e.g., serial number) 3. Nominal chain size 4. Rated load for at least one hitch type and the angle it is based on 5. Reach (length of sling measured from bearing to bearing point) 6. Number of legs (branches) WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

207 General Information DEFINITIONS OF TERMS Abrasion: The mechanical wearing of surface resulting from frictional contact with materials or objects. Breaking Strength: That total force (lbs. or kg.) at which the sling fails. The total weight strain which can be applied before failure. Usually at five times the rated capacity. Bunching: Squeezing of a synthetic sling in narrow hardware or in a narrow lifting point. Competent Person: A person designated for inspection who is trained, qualified by knowledge and practical experience and the necessary instructions to enable the required test or examination to be carried out. Design Factor (DF): A multiple of working load limit which varies from country to country. In North America a 5:1 DF is the standard. In Europe and Australia, a 7:1 DF is the standard. In Japan 6:1. Double Basket Hitch: This is a basket hitch with the middle pulled up over the lifting hook between each eye (end) of the sling to form two basket hitches. It has the same rating as two basket hitches (with the same angle). This hitch should not be used at angles less than 60 to the horizontal. Double Choker Hitch: This hitch has double the single choker hitch capacity when the body of the sling passes through the eyes and back to the hook. Double Wrap Basket Hitch: A basket hitch with one addi tional wrap around the load, providing 360 contact around the load in order to have more control of the load during a lift. This hitch is great for bundled loads and high centers of gravity. The rating is the same as a single basket. Double Wrap Choker Hitch: This hitch has the same rating as a single choker hitch except it has an extra wrap around the load for greater stability, providing 360 contact around the load. Elongation: The measurement of stretch, expressed as a percentage of the finished length. External Warning Indicator (EWI): A type of visual over load indicator that can be installed on Slingmax roundslings. Fitting: A load bearing metal component which is fitted to the sling. Can be of steel, aluminum or other material that will sustain the rated capacity of the sling. Hitch/Vertical: Hitch/Choker: Hitch/Basket: A method of attachment whereby the sling extends from the crane hook to the load in a straight connection. The sling is passed around the load and back through itself and is connected to the crane hook. The sling then tightens around the load when it is strained. The sling is passed from the crane hook around the load and attached to the crane hook. 205 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

208 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS General Information Length: The distance between bearing points of the sling. Proof Load: The average load to which an item may be subjected before visual deformation occurs or a load that is applied in the performance of a proof test. Proof Load Test: A non-destructive load test usually to twice the rated capacity of the sling. Qualified Person: A person who, by possession of a recog nized degree or certificate of a professional standing in an applicable field, or who, by extensive knowledge, training and experience, has successfully demonstrated the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter and work. Rated Load: The maximum recommended load that should be exerted on the item. The following terms are also used for the term Rated Load: Working Load, Working Load Limit, and Resultant Working Load. All rated load values, unless noted otherwise, are for in-line pull with respect to the centerline of the item. Safe Working Load (SWL): See Working Load Limit (WLL). Safety Factor: A measurement no longer used in the USA to describe the design factor of a sling. Shock Load: A resulting load from the rapid change of movement, such as impacting or jerking, or a static load. A Shock Load is generally significantly greater than the static load. Side Loading: A load applied at an angle to the vertical plane of a crane boom or the lifting axis of rigging hardware. Sling Loading: The total tension load applied to a sling during a lifting application. Synthetic Fiber: Man-made material used for the cover, the core and the thread of the Twin-Path sling products. Tell-Tails: Which extend past the tag area of Twin-Path slings. Extension of the load core yarns. When the sling is stretched beyond its elastic limit, they shrink and eventually disappear under the tag. Take out of service if less than 1/2" is exposed. Thread: The synthetic yarn which is used to sew the sling covers and tag and to provide the stitch which separates the individual load cores. Twin-Path : A patented and trademarked product which is composed of two separate load cores and two contrasting color covers. Twin-Path Core: The load bearing multiple fibers of polyester, aramids, or K-Spec which, when wound into the seamless tubes, become the load bearing yarns of the sling. If other materials are used, follow the manufacturers recommendations. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

209 General Information DEFINITIONS OF TERMS Twin-Path Cover: The seamless tubes, usually at least two separate and contrasting colors for easier inspection that contain the cores. Covers may be of polyester, Covermax nylon, or aramids depending on the desired finished characteristics of the product. Ultimate Load: The average load at which the item is being tested fails or no longer supports the load. Ultimate Strength: Same as break strength-that total force (lbs or kg) at which the sling fails. The total weight strain that can be applied before failure. Vertical Rated Capacity (VRC): The Vertical Rated Capacity is the maximum rated capacity for a sling in a straight hitch or vertical configuration. Working Load Limit (WLL): The maximum weight that a piece of rigging equipment should carry. Rated capacity, load rating, Safe Working Load (SWL) and Working Load Limit are frequently used interchangeably. Break strength divided by design factor equals Working Load Limit. CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS All ratings shown in this literature are based upon the items being new or in as new condition. Catalog ratings are considered to be the greatest load that should be applied to the item; therefore, any shock loading must be considered when selecting the item for use in a system. The products shown in this literature are subject to wear, misuse, overloading, corrosion, deformation, intentional alteration and other usage factors which may necessitate a reduction in the product's Rated Capacity or a reduction in its Design Factor. Therefore, it is recommended that all products be regularly inspected to determine their condition as a basis for deciding if the product may continue to be used at the catalog assigned WL, a reduced WL, a reduced design factor, or removed from service. 207 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

210 Common Conversions SUMMARY OF COMMON CONVERSIONS FACTORS IF YOU KNOW: MULTIPLY BY: TO FIND: Inches 25.4 Millimeters (mm) Inches 2.54 Centimeters (cm) Feet 0.30 Meters (m) Yard Meters (m) Miles 1.61 Kilometers (km) Millimeters.0394 Inches Centimeters.39 Inches Meters 3.28 Feet Meters 1.09 Yard Kilometers.62 Miles Metric Tons U.S. Tons U.S. Tons.9072 Metric Tons Kilograms Pounds Pounds.453 Kilograms Metric tons Pounds Metric tons Kilograms Fahrenheit (temp.) 5/9 (after subtracting 32) Celsius (temp.) Celsius (temp.) 9/5 (then add 32) Fahrenheit (temp.) DECIMAL / METRIC EQUIVALENT TABLE FRACTION DECIMAL METRIC (MM) 1/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / / WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

211 Weights of Material MATERIALS AND LIQUIDS - POUNDS/CU. FT. Aluminum 165 Granite, Solid 168 Asbestos 153 Iron Casting 450 Asphalt 81 Lead 710 Brass 524 Limestone, Solid 163 Brick, Soft 100 Lumber - Fir 32 Brick, Medium 115 Lumber - Oak 62 Brick, Hard 130 Lumber - RR Ties 50 Bronze 534 Marble, Solid 160 Coal 56 Oil, Motor 60 Concrete, Reinforced 150 Paper 75 Copper 556 Portland Cement, Loose 94 Crushed Rock 95 Portland Cement, Set 183 Diesel 52 River Sand 120 Dry Earth, Loose 75 Rubber 94 Dry Earth, Packed 95 Steel 490 Gasoline 45 Water, Fresh 63 Glass 161 Zinc 437 Steel Plate 1/8" 5 MATERIAL - POUNDS/SQ. FT. Aluminum Plate 1/8" /4" 10 1/4" /2" 20 1/2" /4" 30 3/4" " 40 1" FORMULAS AND INFORMATION H = Height W = Width L = Length d = diameter r = radius (1/2 dia.) p = 3.14 (rounded 3.15) [area of a square or rectangle = HW] [Vol of cube = HWL] [Circumference of circle = pd] [area of a circle = pr 2 or the approximate area of a circle = 80% of the dia 2 (dia x dia x.80)] 209 WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

212 USA Standard Crane Hand Signals Use Main Hoist. Tap fist on head; then use regular signals. Use Whipline. (Auxiliary Hoist). Tap elbow with one hand, then use regular signals. Raise Boom. Arm extended, fingers closed, thumb pointing upward. Lower Boom. Arm extended, fingers closed, thumb pointing downward. Travel. Arm extended forward, hand open and slightly raised, make pushing motion indirection of travel. Swing. Arm extended, point with finger in direction of swing of boom. Hoist. With forearm vertical, forefinger pointing up, move hand in small horizontal circle. Lower. With arm extended downward, forefinger pointing down, move hand in small horizontal circles. Raise the Boom and Lower the Load. With arm extended, thumb pointing up, flex fingers in and out as long as load movement is desired. Lower the Boom and Raise the Load. With arm extended, thumb pointing down, flex fingers in and out as load movement is desired. Travel. (One Track). Lock the track on side indicated by raised fist. Travel opposite track in direction indicated by circular motion of other fist, rotated vertically in front of body. (For crawler cranes only). Travel.(Both Tracks). Use both fists in front of body, making a circular motion about each other, indicating direction of travel; forward or backward. (For crawler cranes only.) Additional Signals for Bridge Cranes Extend Boom. (Telescoping Booms). Both fists in front of body with thumbs pointing outward Retract Boom. (Telescoping Booms). Both fists in front of body with thumbs pointing toward each other. Stop. Arm extended, palm down, hold position rigidly. Emergency Stop. Arm extended, palm down, move hand rapidly right and left. Bridge Travel. Arm extended forward, hand open and slightly raised, make pushing motion in direction of travel. Trolley Travel. Palm up, fingers closed, thumb pointing in direction of motion, jerk hand horizontally. Extend Boom. (Telescoping Boom). One Hand Signal. One fist in front of chest with thumb tapping chest. Retract Boom. (Telescoping Boom). One Hand Signal. One fist in front of chest, thumb pointing outward and heel of fist tapping chest. Move Slowly. Use one hand to give any motion signal and place other hand motionless in front of hand giving the motion signal. (Hoist slowly shown as example.) Dog Everything. Clasp hands in front of body. Multiple Trolleys. Hold up one finger for block marked 1 and two fingers for block marked 2. Regular signals follow. Magnet is Disconnected. Crane Operator spreads both hands apart palms up. WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

213 HSI Training H RIGGING anes Supply seminars are hands-on demonstrations for a wide range of industrial and contractor applications. Our rigging & safety specialists are available to conduct training seminars at your facility, or you can take advantage of our fully equipped facilities. REVIEW OF ASME B30: Overview of safety codes and standards covering cranes and rigging equipment. EQUIPMENT SELECTION: Hardware capabilities Hitch selection INSPECTION (B30.9/B30.26): Rejection criteria Identification/tags Slings and hardware SAFETY CONFINED SPACE: An overview of entering a permit-required confined space as it relates to Fall Arrest Rescue retrieval. Live davit arm demonstration and showing of the rescue retrieval and fall arrest equipment required in confined space entry. SAFE APPLICATIONS: Share of load Lifting at angles ABC S OF FALL PROTECTION: Anchor Points, Bodywear, Connectors - An overview of proper fall protection configurations that are capable of withstanding fall arrest forces when connected. Discussion of fall protection harnesses: An overview of the different types and how to wear them correctly. LANYARDS VS RETRACTABLES: Discussion of the advantages that retractables offer over traditional lanyards as connecting devices. Discussion of minimum fall clearance heights for each device. INSPECTION GUIDELINES: Discussion of OSHA requirements for inspection of fall protection products/equipment. 211 FITTING OF HARNESSES: Discussion of proper fitting of Fall Protection harnesses. 100% TIE OFF APPLICATIONS: Review 100% tie off connections with personal retractables and lanyards. HORIZONTAL LIFELINE APPLICATIONS: Review different types of horizontal lifelines that are temporary or permanent. WE CAN CUSTOMIZE TRAINING TO YOUR SPECIFIC NEEDS WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930

214 Rental and Repair RENTAL When purchasing isn't an option... Rent the equipment you need! We have a large selection of equipment where and when you need it. Reliable, Dependable and Ready To Work! Air Compressors Air Tools Blocks Compaction Equipment Concrete Core Drilling/Sawing Concrete Equipment Electric Tools Fastening REPAIRS Gas Cutting Equipment Hoists/Lifting Equipment Hydraulic Equipment Lighting Equipment Main Lifting Equipment Material Handling Paint Spray Equipment Pipe Equipment Pressure Washers Pulling/Bending Equipment Pumps Safety Equipment Swaging Tools Ventilation Equipment Welders/Generators Winches Arbortech Dewalt Makita Honeywell Bw Technologies Stout Enerpac Honda Dynadrade Chicago Pneumatic Tools My-Te Fein / Jancy Ridgid Propress Ridgid Seesnake Ridgid Commercial We service what we sell Greenlee Hougen Milwaukee Husqvarna Construction Ingersoll-Rand Eibenstock Southwire Crosby Panasonic Coffing Hoist Under Warranty Metabo Bosch Stihl Diamond Products Powerteam Sumner Yamaha Power Columbus Mckinnon Miller Equipment Mi-T-M Corp Harrington Weka Sioux Wacker Not limited to the list. Just give us a call and we will let know if we can service it WORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE

215 This Rigger s Handbook is dedicated to Theodore C. Hanes, the founder of Hanes Supply. Ted left us on August 11, We know it is appropriate that the history of Hanes Supply should be told by Ted. His hard work, common sense and dedication enabled Hanes Supply to move forward into the next millennium. It all started when Tex McLaughlin taught me how to splice cable in order to obtain my Federal A and E Aircraft Mechanics License #8867 on May 1, After leaving American Airways August 20, 1936 to become a Professional Firefighter, I soon learned that splicing cable for local contractor friends like Herb Darling and Howard Stimm put extra bread on the table. Soon we had to take operations into larger quarters at 23 Poplar Avenue. In 1962 we moved to the warehouse at 1294 Seneca Street, giving us the space for a larger Sling Shop and also the ability to be an Allied Products Supply House with more products and quicker, better service. Our new 55,000 square feet warehouse at 55 James E. Casey Drive enables us to stock even more products to better service our customers. The increasing number of Hanes Supply customers in Central New York State convinced us to open our new Rochester Warehouse. Hanes Supply is committed to making the moves to give the best possible service to all of our customers. On October 1, 1975 I retired as a Battalion Chief from the Buffalo Fire Department enabling me to devote more time to the company until my son Bill could take the wheel. Bill graduated in June 1980 as a Civil Engineer from the State University at Buffalo and is now President of Hanes Supply, Inc. Having been around watching Dad since he was 9 years old, he thoroughly knows the wire rope business. In association with his friends Dennis St. Germain and Jim Boyco, Bill and the Hanes Supply Crew have learned many modern improvements in sling productions. Many thanks to our hard working staff led by our Operations Manager and son-in-law Dave Learn, Retired Office Manager Hermine Bruno, my other son Ted Hanes, II and my late wife Nellie C. Hanes who have all been very valuable assets to our business. Ted Hanes, 1996 Ted had many other accomplishments including being a Buffalo Firefighter for 39 years, retiring as Battalion Chief in During WWII, Ted served in the Coast Guard Reserve. Ted was Commodore of the Buffalo Yacht Club in 1957 and Master of his Masonic Lodge in Ted and Nellie had five children in the 1950 s. When most couples would be thinking of retirement, they were busy providing the best home and education for their children. Work was never a four letter word to Ted. Long days and nights of working at Hanes Marine and Cable and the Buffalo Fire Department were common. He spent countless hours making slings by walking around the rigger s vise. His strength and determination built Hanes Supply into what it is today. He also had the strength to pass the company to the next generation. Your memory and leadership will never leave us. Special thanks to a great man who we are proud to have had as our father. God bless you. WE PROUDLY FLY OUR FLAGS! Thank you, Bill Hanes/ Dave Learn/ Ted Hanes II

216 BUFFALO, NY ROCHESTER, NY ALBANY, NY SYRACUSE, NY WATERTOWN, NY BRANFORD, CT NORTH & SOUTH CAROLINA One of the foremost leaders in the industry Specializing in Lifting Solutions Manufacturer of Slingmax, Wire Rope, Chain & Nylon Slings Complete Contractor & Industrial Supplier ISO 9001:2015 REGISTERED 55 James E. Casey Drive Buffalo, NY U.S.A. PHONE $12.95 US Dollars Printed in Canada